The Organic Law of 19 June, of Qualifications and Vocational Training, aims at the organisation of an integral system of vocational training, qualifications and accreditation, which will respond effectively and transparency of social and economic demands through the various forms of training. To this end, it creates the National System of Qualifications and Vocational Training, defining it in Article 2.1 as the set of instruments and actions necessary to promote and develop the integration of vocational training offerings, through the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, as well as the evaluation and accreditation of the corresponding professional skills, in order to promote the professional and social development of the people and cover the needs of the production system.

The National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, as set out in Article 7.1, is designed to facilitate the integrated nature and adequacy of vocational training and the labour market, as well as training throughout life, the mobility of workers and the unity of the labour market. This catalogue consists of the qualifications identified in the production system and the training associated with them, which is organised in training modules.

Article 5.3 of the Organic Law of 19 June, gives the National Qualifications Institute the responsibility to define, develop and maintain the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, in its quality of technical organ of support to the General Council of Vocational Training, whose regulatory development is set out in Article 9.2 of Royal Decree 1128/2003 of 5 September, which regulates the National Catalogue of Qualifications Professionals, in accordance with Article 9.4, the obligation to maintain permanently updated by its periodic review which, in any case, shall be carried out within a period of not more than five years from the date of inclusion of the qualification in the catalogue.

Therefore, this order is issued in application of Royal Decree 817/2014 of 26 September 2014 laying down specific aspects of professional qualifications for the purposes of which it is amended, Article 7.3 of the Organic Law of 19 June 2002 on qualifications and vocational training, which was obtained by the Council of State of the Council of State 618/2014 of 23 July 2014, is applicable to the approval and effects of the legislation.

Thus, in this order they are updated, as a complete replacement of their Annexes, eleven professional qualifications of the Professional Family Wood, Furniture and Corcho that have an antiquity in the National Catalogue of Professional qualifications exceeding five years, to which Royal Decree 817/2014 applies, of 26 September.

In the process of drafting this order, the Autonomous Communities have been consulted and the General Council of Vocational Training and the State School Council have issued a report.

Under the joint proposal of the Minister for Education, Culture and Sport and the Minister for Employment and Social Security, I have:

Article 1. Object and scope of application.

purpose of this ministerial order is to update 11 professional qualifications for the Professional Family of Wood, Furniture and Corcho, and to replace the corresponding annexes, in application of the Royal Decree 817/2014 of 26 September laying down specific aspects of professional qualifications for the purposes of which the amendment, approval procedure and effects of the Directive is applicable to Article 7.3 of the organic law 19 June, of qualifications and vocational training.

Updated professional qualifications are valid and are applicable throughout the national territory and do not constitute a regulation of professional practice.

Article 2: Updating of certain professional qualifications of the Professional Family Wood, Furniture and Corcho, established by Royal Decree 295/2004 of 20 February establishing certain qualifications Professional training modules are included in the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, as well as their corresponding training modules which are incorporated into the Modular Catalogue of Vocational Training.

As set out in the single additional provision of Royal Decree 295/2004 of 20 February 2004, the professional qualifications are updated, the specifications of which are contained in Annexes LVII, LIX, LX, LXI, LXII and LXIII of the aforementioned royal decree:

One. A new wording is given to Annex LVII, Professional Qualification 'Manufacture of cork stoppers'. Level 1. MAM057_1, which is listed as Annex I to this order.

Two. A new wording is given to Annex LIX, Professional Qualification "Furniture installation". Level 2. MAM059_2, which is listed as Annex II to this order.

Three. A new wording is given to Annex LX, Professional Qualification "Finishing of carpentry and furniture". Level 2. MAM060_2, which is listed as Annex III to this order.

Four. A new wording is given to Annex LXI, Professional Qualification "Wood serrated". Level 2. MAM061_2, which is listed as Annex IV to this order.

Five. A new wording is given to Annex LXII, Professional Qualification "Mounting of furniture and carpentry elements". Level 2. MAM062_2, which is listed as Annex V to this order.

Six. A new wording is given to Annex LXIII, Professional Qualification "Carpentry and furniture projects". Level 3. MAM063_3, which is listed as Annex VI to this order.

Article 3. Updating of certain professional qualifications of the Professional Family Wood, Furniture and Corcho, established by Royal Decree 1228/2006 of 27 October, supplementing the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, by the establishment of certain professional qualifications, as well as their corresponding training modules which are incorporated into the Modular Catalogue of Vocational Training.

As set out in the unique additional provision of Royal Decree 1228/2006 of 27 October, the updating of professional qualifications, the specifications of which are set out in Annexes CCXII, is appropriate. CCXIII, and CCXIV of the aforementioned royal decree:

One. A new wording is given to Annex CCXII, Professional Qualification 'Manufacture of cork objects'. Level 1. MAM212_1, which is listed as Annex VII to this order.

Two. A new wording is given to Annex CCXIII, Professional Qualification 'Obtaining sheets, plywood and rechinks'. Level 2. MAM213_2, which is listed as Annex VIII to this order.

Three. A new wording is given to Annex CCXIV, Professional Qualification "Manufacture of particle board and wood fibres". Level 2. MAM214_2, which is listed as Annex IX to this order.

Article 4. Updating of certain professional qualifications established by Royal Decree 1136/2007 of 31 August 2007 supplementing the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications by establishing three qualifications Professional Family Wood, Furniture and Corcho.

As set out in the single additional provision of Royal Decree 1136/2007 of 31 August 2007, the updating of professional qualifications, the specifications of which are contained in the Annexes CCLXXV and CCLXXVI of the aforementioned royal decree:

One. A new wording is given to Annex CCLXXV, Professional Qualification "Application of varnishes and lacquers in carpentry and furniture elements". Level 1. MAM275_1, which is listed as Annex X of this order.

Two. A new wording is given to Annex CCLXXVI, Professional Qualification "Carpentry and furniture work". Level 1. MAM276_1, which is listed as Annex XI of this order.

Final disposition first. Competence title.

This order is dictated by the powers conferred on the State by Article 149.1.1st and 30th of the Constitution, on the regulation of the basic conditions that guarantee the equality of all Spaniards in the exercise of the rights and in the fulfilment of constitutional duties, and for the regulation of the conditions for obtaining, issuing and approval of academic and professional qualifications.

Final disposition second. Entry into force.

This order shall enter into force on the day following that of its publication in the "Official State Gazette".

Madrid, October 1, 2015. -Government Vice President and Minister of the Presidency Soraya Saenz de Santamaria Anton.

ANNEX I

PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: MANUFACTURE OF CORK TAPES

Professional Family: Wood, Furniture and Corcho

Level: 1

Code: MAM057_1

General competition:

Perform first-level preparation, control, cleaning and maintenance operations of machines, tools and equipment for the manufacture of plugs and discs of natural and agglomerated cork, in accordance with the conditions of security of agreement with the established quality procedures and criteria.

Competition Units:

UC0157_1: Manufacture of natural cork plugs and disks

UC0158_1: Manufacture agglomerated cork plugs

UC0159_1: Terminate cork plugs

Professional Environment:

Professional Scope:

Develops its activity in the production department in connection with the maintenance, in the area of first transformations of the wood and the professional cork, dedicated to the manufacture of cork plugs, in medium and Small firms, normally employed, engaged in the manufacture of different types of cork stoppers. It develops its activity depending on its case, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors:

It is located in the manufacturing sector of cork articles, a sub-sector for the manufacture of plugs.

Relevant Occupations and Jobs:

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Material preparations for the manufacture of plugs:

Plugs and Disk Mechanizers

Stopper end operators

cork treatment workers, in general

Machine operators for making cork plugs

Associated Training (420 hours)

Training Modules:

MF0157_1: Manufacture of natural cork plugs and disks (150 hours)

MF0158_1: Manufacture of agglomerated cork plugs (150 hours)

MF0159_1: Finishing cork plugs (120 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: MANUFACTURE NATURAL CORK PLUGS AND DISCS

Level: 1

Code: UC0157_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Perform basic first-level maintenance and equipment manufacturing operations in the manufacture of natural cork stoppers, discs and plugs, to keep them operational, complying with applicable regulations of occupational risks, safety and the environment, following instructions.

CR 1.1 Basic maintenance operations are carried out with equipment for the manufacture of plugs, discs and multipiece natural cork stoppers, such as: boiler for cork, presses, transport equipment, among others, according to the form and periodicity indicated.

CR 1.2 The tools, materials, and accessories usable in the machine or equipment for the manufacture of plugs, discs and plugs of natural cork, are prepared, carrying out simple assemblies, keeping them operational, according to indications.

CR 1.3 The simple and interchangeable elements of the machine or equipment for the manufacture of plugs, discs and multipiece natural cork plugs: gubes, blades, saws, axles, rods, suction tubes, and others, are adjusted, checking that there is no slack.

CR 1.4 The interchangeable elements of the machine or equipment for the manufacture of plugs, discs and plugs of natural cork: electric motors, pulleys, wheels, transmitters and others, are cleaned, checking that they do not remain remains of dirt.

CR 1.5 The operation of machines or equipment, used in the manufacture of plugs, discs and multipiece natural cork plugs: boiler for cork, presses, transport equipment, among others are checked, detecting possible failures, reporting to the top responsible, for possible failures in each shift, day, or in the change of lots.

CR 1.6 The tools and tools used in cleaning and maintenance such as rags, spatulas, fixed keys, screwdrivers, oil, oil and other, are ordered, according to the order established.

CR 1.7 The tuning of the slicing and drilling machines is performed, considering the selection of the tools, their sharpening and fixing parameters according to the product to be obtained.

CR 1.8 The records and annotations of maintenance operations on equipment used in the manufacture of plugs, disks, and multi-piece plugs are performed on the established support.

RP 2: Make the collection, unloading and stacking of farts or prepared cork pallets (which has undergone a first cooking), for the manufacture of plugs, discs and multipiece natural cork plugs, identifying possible non-compliant materials, complying with the applicable labour, safety and environmental risk regulations, following instructions.

CR 2.1 The farts or cork pallets, prepared, used in the manufacture of plugs and natural cork discs, are arranged, according to the characteristics of the order, by scoring the movements of entry and exit.

CR 2.2 Possible deteriorated items of materials received, which do not meet the requirements of: quality and quantity, established are detected, rejecting them.

CR 2.3 Prepared cork farts or pallets, used in the manufacture of natural cork multipiece plugs, discs and plugs, are unloaded with the equipment set for this purpose, stacking them in the places allocated in the store, controlling not to damage the material.

CR 2.4 Discharged materials are marked with labels for immediate identification and control.

CR 2.5 Downloaded materials are stored, stacked in containers or areas that are ready for effect and can be located.

CR 2.6 The temperature, humidity, lighting and warehouse time conditions are checked, communicating to the immediate responsible, some possible deviation.

CR 2.7 The records and annotations of the receive operations are performed on the established media, following instructions.

RP 3: Perform second-firing operations of farts or cork pallets prepared for the manufacture of natural cork stoppers, discs and plugs, complying with applicable safety and occupational safety regulations, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The farts or cork pallets are immersed in the cooking boiler, in second cooking, using the required means, equipment and mechanisms, preventing the flotation of the same.

CR 3.2 The cork is cooked, in the cooked boiler, controlling parameters (temperature, water conditions and cooking time, among others), adjusting them according to instructions, checking the parameter values.

CR 3.3 The replacement of the cooking water from the cork farts and the cleaning of the boilers is carried out periodically in continuous operation and after each stop.

CR 3.4 The water changes of the boiler and its consumption are recorded, according to the support established in the production process.

CR 3.5 The cooked cork farts are placed in the place of rest with the equipment, required, controlling that it is a covered, clean and aerated place, adjusting the parameters (temperature and humidity), as established in the production process.

RP 4: Perform machining and drilling operations of second-firing cork plates to manufacture natural cork plugs, complying with applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 4.1 The cork irons are cut into cross sections, obtaining slices of a width determined by the length of the stopper to be obtained, adjusting the parameters of the machine (slicer) to the established conditions, following instructions.

CR 4.2 The cork slices are drilled, by cutting with gubia, obtaining plugs in the direction of the width of the slice.

CR 4.3 The natural cork plugs obtained are selected, rejecting those with firewood or other defects, reusing the generated waste.

CR 4.4 The semi-finished natural cork plugs are obtained by means of mechanical operations for the winding of the ends and the polishing of the side.

CR 4.5 The natural cork plugs obtained, dried, by heat treatment, reducing the humidity level.

CR 4.6 The chosen natural cork plugs are stored according to instructions and in the required environmental and cleaning conditions.

RP 5: Perform plate and laminate machining operations, to obtain natural cork discs (or washer), complying with applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 5.1 The prepared cork irons are cut, in cross sections, by getting slices, adjusting the machine parameters in the required conditions and the manufacturing instructions.

CR 5.2 The prepared cork slices are laminated with blades, up to the established thickness, eliminating scraping and tummy, obtaining cork sheets.

CR 5.3 The cork sheets obtained are stung, by the operation of stung with gubia, obtaining natural cork discs.

CR 5.4 The semi-finished natural cork discs are obtained by means of mechanical operations of smoothing the faces by polishing the discs.

CR 5.5 The natural cork discs obtained, are dried, by heat treatment, reducing the level of humidity.

CR 5.6 The chosen natural cork discs are stored according to instructions and in the required environmental and cleaning conditions.

RP 6: Perform machining and sizing operations to manufacture multi-piece plugs, complying with applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 6.1 The prepared cork plates are cut, in cross sections in slices, of a width determined by the length of the stopper to be obtained from them, adjusting the parameters of the machine in the conditions required and the manufacturing instructions.

CR 6.2 Prepared cork slices are laminated with blades, up to the desired thickness, eliminating scraping and tummy, adjusting to what is established in the production process.

CR 6.3 The queues are applied to the pieces with the required quantity per surface unit, checking the elapsed time since their preparation.

CR 6.4 The wrapped pieces are pressed, controlling the pressure and time parameters.

CR 6.5 The cork sheets are stung with gubia, to obtain plugs in the direction of the width of the pasted slices, following instructions.

CR 6.6 Deform, broken, woody plugs and pieces are rejected, separating from the obtained plugs.

CR 6.7 The semi-finished multipart plugs of natural cork are obtained by means of mechanical operations of winding the ends and polishing of the side, following instructions.

CR 6.8 The obtained plugs are dried, reducing the humidity level by heat treatment, following instructions.

CR 6.9 The selected multipart plugs are stored according to instructions and in the required environmental and cleaning conditions.

Professional context:

Production media:

Boiler to cook the cork. Forklift trucks. Conveyor belt. Press for fendardar. Blade sharpening equipment, slicing, manual and automatic drillmaker. Machine for removing bellies and backs, laminator. Food quality plastic containers.

Products and results:

Maintenance operations of the machine for the manufacture of plugs and natural cork discs, made. Preparation of prepared cork irons. Second cooking of controlled cork irons. Machining of cork irons. Natural cork plugs, discs and multi-piece plugs.

Information used or generated:

Manuals, books, codes, magazines and catalogues, technical machine preparation sheets; Work instructions. Applicable rules for the prevention of risks and occupational and environmental health. Maintenance tabs. Applicable international law on upholstery practices.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: MANUFACTURE AGGLOMERATED CORK PLUGS

Level: 1

Code: UC0158_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Run support operations in basic cleaning operations, first-level maintenance and equipment on the manufacture of agglomerated cork stoppers, for operation, in compliance with the regulations applicable, following instructions.

CR 1.1 The tools, materials, and accessories usable in the machine or equipment for making agglomerated cork plugs are prepared, keeping them in conditions of use.

CR 1.2 Basic cleaning and maintenance operations, in the manufacture of agglomerated cork stoppers, such as: laminators, bar cutting machines, machine guns, among others, is carried out according to the Form and periodicity indicated.

CR 1.3 The machines or equipment used in the manufacture of agglomerated cork stoppers are checked at each day at the end of turn or in the change of lots, identifying the possible anomalies and informing the superior responsible.

CR 1.4 The tools and tools used in cleaning and maintenance work: rags, spatulas, fixed keys, screwdrivers, oil, oil and other, are ordered, according to the order established.

CR 1.5 The records and annotations of equipment maintenance operations used in the manufacture of agglomerated cork plugs are performed on the established support.

CR 1.6 The simple and interchangeable elements of machinery or equipment for the manufacture of agglomerated cork stoppers: gubes, blades, saws, axles, rods, suction tubes, pulleys, wheels, transmitters and others are fitted, avoiding holguras, using the set utensils.

CR 1.7 The simple and interchangeable elements of the machine or equipment made of agglomerated cork stoppers are cleaned with the products indicated, checking that there is no debris left.

RP 2: Make the collection and storage of materials for the manufacture of cork granules, complying with the applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 2.1 The materials for the manufacture of cork granules: refuting and cooked pieces, cuts of cork from the preparation of plugs and discs, are received, according to the characteristics of the order, scoring the input and output movements.

CR 2.2 Possible order failures are detected, rejecting materials that do not meet the required characteristics of: quality, quantity, and measurements, following instructions.

CR 2.3 The cork granulate manufacturing materials are unloaded with the discharge equipment, distributing them in the places allocated in the warehouse: in synthetic silos or sacs, controlling not to damage the material following instructions.

CR 2.4 Discharged materials are marked with labels for identification and control.

CR 2.5 The downloaded materials are stored, identified in the containers or areas that are ready for effect and can be located.

CR 2.6 The temperature, humidity, and time conditions, among others, of the warehouse are checked, communicating to the immediate responsible, some possible deviation.

RP 3: Get cork granules, by grinding in mills for the manufacture of plugs, complying with applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The cork is crushed in mills, obtaining crushed cork.

CR 3.2 The crushed cork is granulated according to the specified dimensions and shapes, with the fine mills.

CR 3.3 The cork granules are sorted by their size, by sieves.

CR 3.4 The cork granules are sorted by density, by densimetric separation, according to their volumetric mass and densimetric table speed, controlling the outputs.

CR 3.5 The cork powder produced during manufacture is intended and stored for further use.

CR 3.6 The cork granules are dried, ensuring that the moisture has not been completely removed, if they are intended for storage.

CR 3.7 The different granules are stored in dependencies and under the specified conditions, following instructions.

RP 4: Manufacture buffets (cylindrical piece of agglomerated cork), mangoes (cylinder of natural cork), and stoppers of one or more pieces of cork by agglomeration, by extrusion, to obtain quality products, complying with the applicable rules, following instructions.

CR 4.1 The additives and queues required to obtain cork agglomerates are prepared in the established proportions.

CR 4.2 The additives, tails and agglomerated cork are mixed in the specified doses and time, using approved queues and in the environmental conditions established, complying with the applicable regulations.

CR 4.3 The specified quantities of tail and granulate are deposited in the casting machine until the filling level is reached, dosing the tail according to the dimensions of the surface to fill and control the time that elapse between the application of the queue and the pressing.

CR 4.4 The tail and granulate mixture is extracted, the resulting mixture being deposited in the individual molds of the machine by agglutination of the cork granulate with binders and additives, and hot polymerization, controlling parameters of: time, permanence, pressure and temperature, within the limits set.

CR 4.5 The blocks of the obtained molds are emptied, controlling the cooling thereof, with the required means, subsequently obtaining: buffets, handles and plugs.

CR 4.6 The buffets (cylindrical piece of agglomerated cork) are obtained by extrusion by cutting the obtained blocks by fixing the cutting distance of the equipment, according to the specified dimensions.

CR 4.7 The handles and plugs are obtained by mechanical operations of beveling, winding of ends and polishing of sides, of the obtained blocks, according to specifications.

CR 4.8 The mangoes and plugs obtained, are dried by heat treatment, reducing the level of humidity.

CR 4.9 The mangoes, buffets and plugs obtained are stored according to instructions and in the required environmental and cleaning conditions.

RP 5: Manufacture of agglomerated plugs with natural cork discs, by independent molding, by pressing and sizing, to obtain quality products, complying with applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 5.1 The disks required to obtain agglomerated plugs (from sparkling) are selected according to specifications.

CR 5.2 The disk/s press the handle or plug, controlling the applied force and the pressure time.

CR 5.3 He/s/s attached to the handle or plug is dried/n in the drying ovens, controlling time, temperature and air humidity.

CR 5.4 The mechanical operations of beveling, cutting edge and polishing side of the plugs are made according to specifications.

CR 5.5 The agglomerated plugs with natural cork discs obtained by independent molding are selected according to specifications.

CR 5.6 The agglomerated plugs with selected natural cork discs are stored according to instructions and in the required environmental and cleaning conditions.

Professional context:

Production media:

Fartwo transport lift trucks. Conveyor belt. Blade sharpening equipment, slicing, manual and automatic drilldown, extrusion machine and manufacture of agglomerated cork bars. Machine for cutting agglomerated cork bars. Mixer, mill or shredder. Machine for making cork handles. Sieve, densimetric table, molding. Food plastic containers for plugs. Mixer, moulds, press and stove for the manufacture of individual molding plugs.

Products and results:

Simple tuning, item assembly, and maintenance operations on the machines, made. Cork stoppers, agglomerated with or without natural cork discs, buffets, corks and cork handles and agglomerated stoppers with natural cork discs.

Information used or generated:

Manuals, books, codes, regulations, journals and catalogues. Technical data sheets for the preparation of applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks and health. Maintenance tabs. Instructions. Technical specifications. Applicable international law on upholstery practices.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: END CORK PLUGS

Level: 1

Code: UC0159_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Perform support tasks in basic cleaning operations, first-level maintenance and commissioning of equipment at the completion of cork plugs, for operation, complying with applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 1.1 Basic cleaning and maintenance operations, in the completion of cork plugs, are performed according to the indicated form and periodicity.

CR 1.2 The machines or equipment, used for the completion of cork plugs at each end of turn, day or in the change of lots, are checked, verifying that they remain in the state of use, identifying the possible anomalies and reporting to the top manager.

CR 1.3 The tools and tools used for cleaning and maintenance work: rags, spatulas, fixed keys, screwdrivers, oil, oil, oil and other, are ordered according to the instructions received.

CR 1.4 The records and annotations of maintenance operations on equipment used in the completion of cork plugs are performed on the established support.

CR 1.5 The tools, materials, and accessories usable in the machine or equipment for the completion of cork plugs are prepared, keeping them in conditions of use, following the instructions of the person responsible for the machine.

CR 1.6 The simple and interchangeable elements of the machine and equipment for the completion of cork plugs: electrical resistors, cap-and-cap rosettes, diabolical abrasives, axles, lija bands, abrasive stones, cylindrical pumps of colkilling and washing, photoelectric cells, gas injectors and others, among others, are adjusted, following the indications of the person responsible for the machine.

CR 1.7 The simple and interchangeable elements of the machine or equipment for terminating cork plugs are cleaned with the indicated products, checking that there are no debris left.

RP 2: Perform the semi-finished cork stoppers, to obtain final products with the quality established, complying with the applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 2.1 The cleaning solution of the stopper is prepared at the required dose to clean it superficially and improve its appearance, following instructions.

CR 2.2 The plugs are washed with the prepared dissolution, by means of the washing equipment, dosing the water inlet, controlling the components and time of the process to ensure the cleaning, the removal of the dust and the disinfection of the plugs.

CR 2.3 The washed plugs are dried with the drying equipment, programming the temperature and relative humidity by obtaining plugs with the specified moisture content.

CR 2.4 The mixture consisting of powder from the rectification of earplugs and washers of natural cork, and food-use glue, is prepared in the proportions required for obtaining colkilled stoppers, complying with the applicable environmental conditions.

CR 2.5 The colmatated plugs are obtained, regulating the parameters (time, temperature, among others), in the measuring devices of the bombast hype, so that the sequins of the natural plugs are filled with the preparation, for the sealing of the pores of the plugs.

CR 2.6 The colkilled plugs are coated, depositing a layer, pigmented or not, on the surface thereof.

CR 2.7 The plugs are classified according to their visual appearance, porosity, color, among others, by means of systems, manual and/or automatic, according to specifications.

CR 2.8 The head plugs are obtained by casting the heads to the bodies of the plugs.

RP 3: Make surface treatment of plugs, for marking, counting and surface treatment and marketing, complying with applicable regulations in the counting, packing and protection of plugs for their transport, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The inks for marking are prepared, complying with the applicable regulations of products in contact with food.

CR 3.2 The text, logo and/or image is printed on the surface of the plugs with ink on fire or with fire directly (in the case of plugs for cava or champagne), adjusting the tampon of the marking machine, according to the client specifications.

CR 3.3 The surface of the stopper is coated with a layer of paraffin or silicone to lubricate the stopper and facilitate its introduction into the bottle.

CR 3.4 The plugs are introduced into the pre-programmed counting machine for counting.

CR 3.5 The counted plugs are packaged in polyethylene bags, controlling the atmosphere and injecting a protector into the specified dose.

CR 3.6 Packaged plugs are then inserted into cardboard boxes to ensure the conditions in their displacement and/or expedition.

Professional context:

Production media:

Machine to wrap the cork handles with the disks. Polishing. Colmatar hype, washing machine plugs, earplugs dryer, surface treatment hype. Electronic classifier. Ribbon for selecting the plugs. Marker by fire, marker in ink. Contadora. Lifting platforms.

Products and results:

Preparation and maintenance of equipment and facilities for the completion of cork plugs. Natural cork stoppers, of a natural multipiece cork, of agglomerated cork with natural cork discs.

Information used or generated:

Manuals, books, codes, regulations, journals and catalogues. Technical data sheets for machine preparation. Applicable rules for the prevention of risks and occupational and environmental health. Maintenance tabs. Instructions. Technical specifications. Applicable international law on upholstery practices.

TRAINING MODULE 1: MANUFACTURE OF PLUGS AND NATURAL CORK DISCS

Level: 1

Code: MF0157_1

Associated with UC: Fabricate plugs and natural cork discs

Duration: 150 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Carry out the first level cleaning, preparation and maintenance operations of the machinery and equipment used in the manufacture of plugs, discs and multi-piece natural cork plugs.

CE1.1 Recognize the operation, constitution and safety devices of machinery and equipment used in the manufacture of plugs, discs and multipiece natural cork plugs.

CE1.2 Identify the first-level maintenance operations of the teams and run them according to the appropriate instructions or manuals.

CE1.3 Adequating the processing equipment to the requirements of the process to be executed.

CE1.4 Explain the anomalies or main operating problems more frequently, during the use of the equipment used in the manufacture of plugs, discs and plugs multipart natural cork, identifying the correction indicated in each case.

CE1.5 In a practical case of maintenance of equipment in the manufacture of plugs, discs and plugs of natural cork, from a given condition:

-Replace items in equipment and installations at the time and condition marked by the maintenance plan.

-Carry out the maintenance of use and replacement of elements of the various equipment and systems of movement and stacking of materials.

-Maintain the cleaning and environmental protection conditions of the various spaces.

-Perform the cleaning of machines, equipment and areas, achieving the required levels in the manufacture of plugs, discs and multipiece natural cork plugs.

C2: Describe the process of making plugs and natural cork discs.

CE2.1 Relate the different phases of the manufacturing processes of natural cork plugs, with the input and output products and the operations performed in each phase.

CE2.2 Describe the operation sequences (preparation of machines and tools, power, control, verification and maintenance) that characterize the process, relating them to machines and equipment.

CE2.3 Describe the typical risks and errors of the manufacturing process, as well as the necessary personal protective means.

C3: Control stocks of natural cork irons, through their movements of warehouse input and output, specifying their characteristics, types and status through established parameters.

CE3.1 Identify defects and pathologies of the natural cork, describing the methods and means used in their protection.

CE3.2 In a scenario of control of stock of irons, with established conditions:

-Perform the heavy, sizing and cubing of cork irons.

-Calculate the degree of humidity of cork irons, by means of the manipulation and reading of the necessary instruments.

-Classify cork pieces based on their caliber and/or defects.

-Register the operations performed, based on established criteria.

C4: Describe the loading and unloading of natural cork.

CE4.1 Describe cork stacking conditions to ensure their preservation.

CE4.2 Describe unloading and stacking equipment of cork irons, indicating their suitability according to the pieces to be manipulated.

CE4.3 Define how the discharge and stacking of cork irons would take place.

C5: Control the boilers and other equipment for the cooked of cork irons, complying with the applicable regulations in the production of cork.

CE5.1 Describe the materials and mechanisms of boilers and other equipment, as well as tools and tools required for the cooking of cork irons.

CE5.2 Define the proper use and characteristics of the storage places of the cooked cork sheets.

CE5.3 Describe the inherent risks associated with the cork irons process.

CE5.4 In a practical case of cooking of cork irons, under established conditions:

-Operate with the mechanisms to insert and keep the cork irons submerged.

-Check the temperature, conditions, and cooking times of the cork irons, according to specific conditions.

-Make water changes and cleaning of cork irons cooking boilers, recording the necessary water consumption, as well as setting the criteria to be followed for water replenishment and cleaning.

-Operate with the mechanisms to remove from the boilers and store the cooked cork irons.

C6: Specify the cutting operations of cork irons, operating with laminators and cutters, as well as the rest of the equipment, complying with the applicable regulations in the manufacture of cork.

CE6.1 Describe the operations inherent in the cutting of natural cork irons, specifying blade sharpening factors as well as the thickness of parts to be obtained.

CE6.2 Describe the periodic maintenance and replacement operations of laminator and cutter elements.

CE6.3 Describe the inherent risks associated with the rolling process.

C7: Get multi-piece plugs, operating on natural cork pieces.

CE7.1 In a scenario of obtaining multi-piece plugs, under established conditions:

-Prepare queues at the required proportions and conditions.

-Apply queues to the appropriate amount per surface unit, controlling the elapsed time between the preparation and its application.

-Praise the cast pieces by controlling the time and pressure, according to established criteria.

-Apply occupational health standards, prevention of occupational and environmental risks inherent in the process.

C8: Make the slicing of the cork plates and the drilling of the slices and sanding of the plugs using the specific machinery.

CE8.1 Describe the risks associated with slicing plates and drilling the slices and sanding the plugs.

CE8.2 In a practical case of slicing, drilling and sanding irons, with established conditions:

-Select the cutting tools in correct sharpening conditions, installing them properly in the slicer.

-Operate the slicer to obtain cork slices with defined dimensions, adjusting the position of the blades.

-Select bits in correct sharpening and conservation conditions, installing them in the drill.

-Get cork plugs with the specified diameter, adjusting the piercing blades.

-Separate quality plugs from those with firewood or defective.

-Manipulate beveling machines and cork ear plugs, according to established length and diameter criteria.

C9: Manufacture rectified discs of sparkling wine plugs, operating with specific machines.

CE9.1 Describe the process of obtaining rectified discs for sparkling wine plugs, assessing: blade sharpening factors, as well as thickness and quality of the pieces to be obtained.

CE9.2 Explain the risks associated with making rectified disks.

CE9.3 In a scenario of obtaining rectified disks, given the given conditions:

-Install cutting tools, adjusting them in sharp conditions, placing them in the slicer.

-Feed the cork-rolling machines, according to established thickness criteria.

-Feed machines for obtaining discs for sparkling wine plugs, according to established criteria for dimensions and thickness.

-Separate discs of sparkling wine stoppers with quality from those with firewood or defective.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 with respect to CE1.5; C3 for CE3.2; C5 for CE5.4; C7 complete; C8 for CE8.2; C9 for CE9.3.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the production rules set by the organization.

Interpret and execute the work instructions.

Respect the organization's internal procedures and rules.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. The cork. Features

Concept. Structure. Composition. Physical and chemical properties Defects. Diseases and pathologies. Types. Classification. Cork moisture: Concept. Methods of calculation. Measuring instruments.

2. Simple operations for the adjustment and assembly of interchangeable elements and the maintenance of machinery for the manufacture of cork stoppers.

Preparation of: gubes, blades, saws, shafts, rods, suction tubes, and others.

Cleaning of the cork stoppers manufacturing equipment.

Assembly of elements.

Measurement and parameter control equipment.

First-level maintenance of machines and equipment required in the manufacture of plugs. Operating failures. Features.

Typology of breakdowns.

Various causes that determine problems on the systems.

Detection of worn and/or deteriorated items.

Correcting simple failures.

Replacing simple items.

Lubrication and cleaning; regulation and adjustment.

Tuning the machines.

3. Material collection and storage operations for the manufacture of cork

Reception and storage of raw material and protective products of cork stoppers. Features.

Cork Cubication.

Download of materials. Precautions.

Fulfillment of input records of raw material and protective products. Conformity of the reception. Cases of non-compliance and actions.

Corcho characteristics (provenance, appearance, humidity, among others).

Classification of subjects and receiving products.

Cubing and heavy cork processes.

Distribution and location.

Cork Stack. Conditions of the facilities.

Protection of groups or piles of cork. Means of protection.

Corcho quality control.

Singularities and Corcho Piece Defects.

Quality control and cork classification procedures.

Cork Moisture Control Procedures.

Material handling and transport operations.

Means of handling and transport of piles and piles of cork in bulk.

4. Second-cooked operations of cork irons

Obtaining of natural cork plugs, discs and plugs. Features.

Second cooking.

Boilers and cork-cooked equipment. Types, uses, applications, and maintenance.

Applying the necessary controls to obtain optimal quality during the boil. Control plans.

Using the different machines and tools, and running the appropriate technical elements to the boil.

Method of checking and controlling the moisture of the cork.

Transport and stabilization of cork: handling and transport systems. Types, applications, and uses.

Stabilization of the raw material. Foundation and purpose.

5. Manufacture of natural cork stoppers

Handling the different machines and tools for making natural cork plugs.

Obtaining manufacture of natural cork plugs. Features and key points.

Corcho quality. Concept, foundation and purpose.

Quality controls during processing.

Rebar: machines and equipment used in the slicing of cork irons.

Slicing technical specifications (dimensions, humidity, and slice direction).

Drilling. Machines and equipment used in drilling.

Technical specifications for drilling (dimensions and humidity).

Unlensed (or Preliminary Chosen). Machines and equipment used in dislening.

Technical specifications (alterations and defects, and plug-in classification criteria).

Drying. Machines and equipment used in drying.

Technical specifications of drying (temperature, air flow, humidity and time).

Dimensional rectification.

Machines and equipment used in dimensional rectification (end-of-end, polishing of the body and beveling). Dimensional rectification technical specifications (dimensions, humidity, finish).

6. Multipiece plugs and natural cork discs. Regulations applicable to the manufacture of corks

Natural Cork Multipiece Plugs. Description.

Method of checking and controlling the moisture of the cork.

Applications. Methods.

Sliced. Cork laminate.

Encolado. Sticking of the pieces. Chopped.

Natural cork discs. Description.

Sliced. Chopped Up. Drying. Polished.

Treatment, disposal and use of waste.

Regulations applicable to the manufacture of corks.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the manufacture of plugs and natural cork discs, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: MANUFACTURE OF AGGLOMERATED CORK STOPPERS

Level: 1

Code: MF0158_1

Associated with UC: Fabricate agglomerated cork plugs

Duration: 150 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Describe the manufacturing process for agglomerated cork plugs.

CE1.1 Relate the different phases of the manufacturing processes of agglomerated cork stoppers, with the input and output products and the operations performed in each phase.

CE1.2 Describe the operation sequences (preparation of machines and tools, power, control, verification and maintenance) that characterize the process, relating them to machines and equipment.

CE1.3 Describe the typical risks and errors of the manufacturing process, as well as the means of personal protection.

C2: Perform the first-level cleaning, preparation and maintenance operations of the machinery and equipment used in the manufacture machinery of agglomerated cork stoppers.

CE2.1 Recognize the operation, constitution and safety devices of machinery and equipment used in the manufacture of plugs, discs and multi-piece natural cork plugs.

CE2.2 Explain the anomalies or main operating problems more frequently, during the use of the equipment used in the manufacture of agglomerated cork stoppers, identifying the correction indicated in each case.

CE2.3 Identify the first-level maintenance operations of the teams and run them according to the appropriate instructions or manuals.

CE2.4 In a practical case of equipment maintenance in the manufacture of agglomerated cork stoppers, from given conditions:

-Replace items in equipment and installations at the time and condition marked by the maintenance plan.

-Perform the cleaning of machines, equipment and areas, achieving the required levels in the manufacturing machines of agglomerated cork stoppers.

-Carry out the maintenance of use and replacement of elements of the various equipment and systems of movement and stacking of materials.

-Maintain the cleaning and environmental protection conditions of the various spaces.

-Admit the processing equipment to the requirements of the process to be executed.

C3: Get cork granules, operating with granulate-collection equipment, as specified, complying with applicable regulations.

CE3.1 Describe the process of obtaining the agglomerated cork, distinguishing the types and qualities used to obtain it.

CE3.2 Evaluate cork items for granulate (by weighing, sizing, and cubing), calculating and describing the level of stock determined at any time.

CE3.3 Confect cork granulate stock record parts, interpreting and completing them according to set criteria.

CE3.4 Describe the inherent risks associated with the process of obtaining cork granules.

CE3.5 Describe granulated cork storage conditions, referred to as necessary temperature and humidity.

CE3.6 In a scenario of obtaining granulates, from given conditions:

-Classify various cork items for agglomerate, according to location criteria, temporality of their use.

-Manipulate cork crushing mills, according to specified specifications.

-Manipulate cork dust aspiration mechanisms, according to specified specifications.

-Manipulate granulated cork sifting equipment, based on criteria of dimension, density, shape and speed of the process.

C4: Apply Agglomerated Cork bar obtention techniques, controlling parameters, complying with applicable regulations.

CE4.1 Describe the process of obtaining agglomerated cork bars, based on criteria for use and characteristics of the granules, tails and additives.

CE4.2 Describe the periodic maintenance and replacement operations of process machinery items.

CE4.3 Describe the inherent risks associated with the process of obtaining agglomerated cork bars.

CE4.4 Specify the technique and purpose of the cooling of mangoes obtained by cutting the agglomerated cork bars.

CE4.5 In a scenario of obtaining agglomerated cork bars, from given conditions:

-Obtaining adhesive mixtures in sanitary composition for the sizing, using the mixing equipment, especially controlling the time between its preparation and the pressure putting of the pieces to be wrapped.

-Feed the hoppers and handle controls of the extrusion machines, programming with established criteria the speed of the engine, the pressure and the temperature, as well as the tubes of expulsion of bars with the diameter requested.

-Choose and adjust the saws of the cutting mechanisms of the agglomerated cork bars, according to specified specifications.

C5: Get agglomerated cork plug units, complying with applicable regulations.

CE5.1 Describe the process of obtaining agglomerated cork stoppers, based on criteria for use and characteristics of the granules, tails and additives.

CE5.2 Calculate quantities of granulated cork, tails and additives, depending on the proportions determined between these elements, to feed the mixing machines.

CE5.3 Specify the differences between extrusion and molding in the procurement of the agglomerated plug

CE5.4 In a practical scenario of obtaining agglomerated cork plug units, from given conditions:

-Obtain suitable adhesive mixtures in sanitary composition for the sizing, using the mixing equipment, especially controlling the time between their preparation and the pressure putting of the pieces to be wrapped.

-Feed the molds and manipulate controls of the extrusion machines, programming with established criteria the speed of the engine, pressure and temperature, as well as the vacuum of the blocks of the molds.

-Describe and act on the periodic maintenance and replacement of items in the process machinery.

C6: Carry out the gluing and pressing operations in obtaining mangoes or agglomerated cork plugs, controlling mixtures of adhesives and parameters of thought.

CE6.1 Specify the risks associated with sizing and pressing in the earplugs.

CE6.2 In a practical scenario of obtaining mangoes or agglomerated cork stoppers, on the basis of given conditions:

-Prepare the mixtures in the appropriate proportions, using sanctioned queues.

-Dosify the queue by looking at the dimensions of the surface to wrap, controlling the time between its preparation and the application.

-Set the disk to the handle or plug, controlling pressure and time according to established criteria.

-Describe and act on the periodic maintenance and replacement of items in the process machinery.

C7: Get corrected cork plugs, operating with grinding machines, complying with applicable regulations.

CE7.1 Describe the operation of cork plug grinding machines.

CE7.2 Describe the periodic maintenance and replacement operations of process machinery items.

CE7.3 In a practical scenario for obtaining rectified plugs, under established conditions:

-Feed the grinding machines, controlling the amount of incoming materials.

-Manipulate controls on grinding machines, according to specified specifications.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 with respect to CE2.4; C3 for CE3.6; C4 for CE4.5; C5 for CE5.4; C6 for CE6.2; C7 for CE7.3.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the production rules set by the organization.

Interpret and execute the work instructions.

Respect the organization's internal procedures and rules.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. Cork granules

Manufacturing techniques. Refining of granules. Drying of granules. Cubing and grading of cork granules: Techniques. Calculation of the required parameters. Calculation of stocks and completion of required documents.

Triation of the cork. Concept. Purpose. Methods. Equipment and maintenance of equipment.

Tamizado. Concept. Purpose. Methods. Equipment and maintenance of equipment.

Granulated cork storage. Concept. Purpose. Conditions. Equipment and maintenance of equipment.

2. Simple operations for the adjustment and assembly of interchangeable elements and the maintenance of machinery for the manufacture of agglomerated cork stoppers

Preparation of interchangeable machine elements: electric motors, pulleys, wheels, transmitters.

Cleaning of the manufacturing equipment of agglomerated cork stoppers.

Assembly of elements.

Measurement and parameter control equipment.

First-level maintenance of machines and equipment required in the manufacture of agglomerated plugs.

Malfunction. Features.

Typology of breakdowns.

Various causes that determine problems on the systems.

Detection of worn and/or deteriorated items.

Correction of simple failures that affect operation.

Replacing simple, broken, or worn-out items.

Lubrication and cleaning; regulation and adjustment.

Tuning the machines.

3. Reception and storage of the raw material and protective products

Download of materials. Precautions.

Receipt compliance. Cases of non-compliance and actions.

Corcho characteristics (provenance, appearance, humidity, among others).

Classification of subjects and receiving products.

Cubing and heavy cork processes.

Encoding and marking of materials and products that are received.

Systems.

Calculation and control of stocks by implementing established protocols or guidelines. Distribution and location, stacked of cork. Conditions of the facilities.

Protection of groups or piles of cork. Media.

4. Crushed cork granules

Granulated Cork Sifting Mechanisms.

Crushed cork granulate systems, according to specified volumetric dimensions and mass.

Teams and applications thereof.

Uses and applications of equipment for the refining of cork particles.

5. Drying of cork granules

Machines and equipment used. Tools. Means of production.

Tuning parameters (temperature, relative humidity of air, and time).

Drying programs. Types. Uses and applications.

Control of the humidity of each piece.

Process conditions.

6. Agglomerated cork

Concept. Structure. Characteristics of the cork used as raw material. Procurement techniques. Types and qualities.

Sucked out of cork powder. Concept. Applications. Methods. Equipment and maintenance of equipment.

agglomerated cork bars. Concept. Features. Process for obtaining. Methods. (Get, cut and sanding). Equipment and maintenance of equipment.

Independent plug molding.

Extrusion of the granulated cork. Concept. Methods. Process parameters. Equipment and maintenance of equipment.

Queues and Additives: Features. Applications. Dosage for preparing adhesive mixtures.

Quality control in processes for obtaining agglomerated cork stoppers. Influence factors in relation to the product and processes.

Rules applicable to obtaining granulates.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the manufacture of agglomerated cork stoppers, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 3: COMPLETION OF CORK PLUGS

Level: 1

Code: MF0159_1

Associate to UC: Terminate the cork plugs

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Perform the first-level cleaning, preparation and maintenance operations of the machinery and equipment used in the cork stoppers termination machines.

CE1.1 Recognize the operation, constitution and safety devices of machinery and equipment used in the termination of cork plugs

CE1.2 Describe the periodic maintenance and replacement operations of process machinery items.

CE1.3 Identify the first level maintenance operations of the teams and run them according to the appropriate instructions or manuals.

CE1.4 Describe the periodic maintenance and replacement operations of machinery elements in the process of washing and drying cork plugs.

CE1.5 Perform the cleaning of machines, equipment and areas, achieving the required levels in the cork stoppers termination machines.

CE1.6 Explain the anomalies or main operating problems more frequently, during the use of the equipment used in the completion of cork plugs, identifying the correction indicated in each case.

CE1.7 In a practical case of maintenance of equipment in the manufacture of plugs, discs and plugs of natural cork, from a given condition:

-Replace items in equipment and installations at the time and condition marked by the maintenance plan.

-Carry out the maintenance of use and replacement of elements of the various equipment and systems of movement and stacking of materials.

-Maintain the cleaning and environmental protection conditions of the various spaces.

-Admit the processing equipment to the requirements of the process to be executed.

C2: Define characteristics of the equipment for the colkilling of cork stoppers, according to criteria of quality and characteristics of the plugs, tails and additives.

CE2.1 Calculate quantities of cork stoppers to colkill, tails and cork powder, depending on the proportions determined between these elements, to feed colkilling machines.

CE2.2 Describe the process of killing cork stoppers, based on criteria of quality and characteristics of the plugs, tails and additives.

CE2.3 Specify the inherent risks associated with the process of colkilling cork plugs.

C3: Perform washing and drying operations of cork plugs, operating with specific equipment.

CE3.1 Describe the process of washing and drying cork stoppers, taking into account the established rules, the products and their solutions to be used as well as the performance times of the same.

CE3.2 Explain the risks associated with the washing and drying operations of cork plugs.

CE3.3 In a practical case of washing and drying cork plugs, from given conditions:

-Get proper solutions from the established cork stoppers cleaning products.

-Manipulate controls of machines for the washing of cork stoppers, according to dissolution criteria and established times.

-Manipulate controls of drying equipment of cork stoppers, according to criteria established in terms of temperature and relative humidity.

C4: Classify plugs for subsequent packaging and dispatch, complying with applicable regulations.

CE4.1 Describe the classification and marking process of plugs, products to be used, based on their manufacturing characteristics as well as the customer's request.

CE4.2 Classify plugs manually by their types and characteristics, according to the corresponding order note, rejecting those that do not comply.

CE4.3 Determine the risks inherent in the classification and marking process of plugs

CE4.4 In a practical scenario of classification, marking and surface treatment of cork plugs; from given conditions

-Feed and manipulate stoppers sorting machines, scheduling their performance based on orders.

-Manipulate marking machines or tincing of plugs, according to established conditions.

-Manipulate lubricated plugs, according to established conditions.

C5: Describe the operation of the plug-in packaging machines.

CE5.1 Describe the packing and counting process of plugs, assessing the condition of packaging and protection.

CE5.2 Specify the operation of the cap packing machines, according to established conditions.

CE5.3 Specify the environmental risks and protection inherent in the cap packaging process.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 with respect to CE1.7; C3 with respect to CE3.3; C4 with respect to CE4.4.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the production rules set by the organization.

Interpret and execute the work instructions.

Respect the organization's internal procedures and rules.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. Simple operations for the adjustment and assembly of interchangeable elements and maintenance of cork stoppers termination machines

Adjustment of interchangeable elements: cylindrical colkilling and washing pumps, electric motor, photoelectric cells, gas injectors, electrical resistors, cap-and-cap rosettes, diabolical abrasive, axes, sandbands, abrasive stones.

Cleaning protocol for cork stoppers termination equipment.

Assembly of elements.

Measurement and parameter control equipment.

Maintenance of more common equipment, machines and installations and problems in the semi-finished cork stoppers process.

Malfunction. Features.

Typology of breakdowns.

Various causes that determine problems on the systems.

Detection of worn and/or deteriorated items.

Correction of simple failures that affect operation.

Replacing simple, broken, or worn-out items.

Lubrication and cleaning; regulation and adjustment.

Tuning the machines.

2. Previous operations for the termination of cork plugs

Washing and drying. Machines and equipment used in the washing and drying of cork stoppers.

Technical specifications for washing and drying.

Colkilled. Concept. Purpose. Methods. Machines and equipment used in the killing of plugs.

Technical specifications of the colkilled.

Coating.

Machines and equipment used in the coating. Technical specifications of the coating.

Chosen. Machines and equipment used in the chosen one.

Technical specifications of the chosen (coating defects).

Glued the heads (for head plugs).

Machines and equipment used in the gluing of heads. Technical specifications of the gluing of the heads.

3. Completion and surface treatment operations of plugs

Marking of plugs. Machines and equipment used in the marking. Products to be used: ink and fire. Types, uses, and applications.

Surface treatment of plugs. Machines and equipment used in surface treatment. Technical specifications (silicone and paraffin).

Counting and packing, and transport of plugs. Machines and equipment used in the counting and packing and transport of plugs.

Technical specifications for counting and packing and transport of plugs. Stock control. Control plans.

Waste and effluent management.

Cork Dust Aspiration Systems. Equipment and applications thereof.

Transport and treatment of waste and effluent. Applicable environmental plan.

Quality control in cork stoppers termination processes. Factors of influence in relation to the product and processes. Regulations applicable to the end of plugs.

Applicable regulations for products in contact with food.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the termination of cork plugs, which will be credited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX II

PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: FURNITURE INSTALLATION

Professional Family: Wood, Furniture and Corcho

Level: 2

Code: MAM059_2

General competition:

Install custom and modular furniture, planning the work and performing the assembly, adjustment and finishing operations at the location with the required quality in terms of safety, occupational health and safety environmental.

Competition Units:

UC0163_2: Schedule installation, collection of materials, machines, and tools

UC0164_2: Compose and fix furniture and perform complementary installations

UC0165_2: Check operation and perform tuning and finishing operations

Professional Environment:

Professional Scope:

Develops its professional activity in the production department, dedicated to marketing and installation of furniture, in private entities, in large, medium, small, self-employed or self-employed companies. It develops its activity, depending on its case, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. You may have staff in your position at times, for seasons or in a stable way. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors:

It is located in the productive sector of wood, in the subsectors of assembly and installation of carpentry and furnishing.

Relevant Occupations and Jobs:

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Assembler assemblers of wood products and similar materials:

Ebans and assimilated workers

Custom-to-measure furniture assemblers and cabinets

Kitchen and bathroom furniture assemblers

Furniture repairers

Furniture Facility Planning And Management Technicians

Associated Training (540 hours)

Training Modules:

MF0163_2: Furniture installation projects (150 hours)

MF0164_2: Furniture installations (270 hours)

MF0165_2: Setting and finishing furniture installations (120 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: PLAN INSTALLATION, COLLECTION OF MATERIALS, MACHINES, AND TOOLS

Level: 2

Code: UC0163_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Get sketches, drawings and templates from measurements made to define the installation of furniture and auxiliary elements.

CR 1.1 The data required for drawing of the sketch, definition plans or templates to be drawn up are obtained from the measurements, using the useful ones set for that purpose.

CR 1.2 The information required (simple drawings, sketches, schemes with measures, catalogues, constructive solutions, lists of requests of the client, among others) is obtained from the measurements made in line with the customer tastes, to define the furniture installation solutions.

CR 1.3 The sketches and templates are drawn with the data and measurements obtained to be able to develop the solutions for installation of furniture and auxiliary elements.

CR 1.4 Installation definition plans and simple complementary ones are drawn to collect the data, measurements and details (location of elements, constructive solutions), enabling decision making and the customer's previous compliance.

CR 1.5 The installation to be carried out, is determined from the information obtained from the definition plans of the furniture and auxiliary elements, and according to the type of installation (kitchen, bathroom, custom cabinet, furniture for public spaces, among others).

CR 1.6 The required templates are drawn, from the drawings made and the mounting needs, to address the installation of the installation demanded by the client, collecting measurements, intakes and curves between other.

CR 1.7 The data for the installation is collected, planning it according to the typology (kitchen, bathroom, custom cabinet, furniture for public spaces, among others), complying with the applicable rules of safety of risks labor.

CR 1.8 The installation media listing is made based on the installation requirements and mounting needs.

RP 2: Prepare materials and tools, maintaining equipment and according to established criteria for the installation of furniture and auxiliary elements.

CR 2.1 The templates are manufactured from the croquis, in cardboard or in the wood of the ocumen, by means of real-scale machining.

CR 2.2 The selection of the portable equipment and tools required for the installation, is performed according to the type of installation (kitchen, bathroom, custom cabinet, furniture for public spaces, among others) and the characteristics of the same (available space, environmental features, access, among others).

CR 2.3 The first level maintenance of the machines and equipment used in the installation of furniture and auxiliary elements is carried out in the form and periodicity indicated in the manual of use, provided by the manufacturer, following the guidelines set out in the maintenance sheet, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards.

CR 2.4 The selection of materials required for the installation of furniture and auxiliary elements, is carried out according to the use and functionality, according to technical criteria, required by the client, as specified in the installation project.

CR 2.5 The list of fungible materials, tools and equipment for the installation of furniture and auxiliary elements, is made from the forecasts, according to the type of installation, taking into account expected needs and the asked suppliers to ensure that no element is omitted.

CR 2.6 The list of parts and materials that make up the installation of furniture, is made, taking into account, anticipated needs and the order made to the suppliers, including the furniture and parts of what is installed.

CR 2.7 The collection of specified materials, tools and equipment is carried out taking into account the lists of parts, materials, tools and equipment.

RP 3: Carry out the transport of furniture, equipment and tools to the place of installation with the means established, depending on the material to be transported, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks and environmental.

CR 3.1 The means of transport are selected, responding to capacity, security and access criteria to the place of installation.

CR 3.2 The furniture, equipment, and tools are loaded with the load handling means, taking into account the order of discharge and the balance of volumes and weights.

CR 3.3 The load is fixed, considering the path, the type of material and its physical and surface characteristics.

CR 3.4 The load is transported according to the schedule of the load, meeting schedules and the applicable labor risk prevention regulations.

CR 3.5 The furniture, equipment and tools are unloaded with the means of handling loads, positioning them in the established place, taking into account the requirements of the installation, complying with the rules of prevention at work and environmental risk.

CR 3.6 The loading, unloading and transport are carried out with the use of individual protective equipment (E.P.I.) and required safety, occupational health and environmental conditions.

Professional context:

Production media:

Drawing and drawing tools and tools. Equipment and useful for data collection, measurement. Computer equipment and software for the generation of drawings and sketches. Basic tools for obtaining templates. Useful for the maintenance and development of tools. Elements of transport and handling of loads. Personal protective equipment.

Products and results:

Croquis, planes and templates from measurements. Prepared tools and materials. Transport of furniture, equipment and tools to the place of installation.

Information used or generated:

Projects, plans and technical manuals of products. Catalogues. Lists of tools and tools. Lists of furniture and auxiliary items Work orders and parts of incidents. Documentation of means of transport and cargo handling. Applicable rules for risk prevention and environmental protection.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: COMPOSE AND FIX FURNITURE AND PERFORM COMPLEMENTARY FACILITIES

Level: 2

Code: UC0164_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Repose the installation of furniture and auxiliary elements, at the location, to perform complementary facilities.

CR 1.1 Installation site check (location, measurements, elements) is performed considering project conditions compliance.

CR 1.2 The repose of the installation takes place, depending on the type of furniture (kitchen, bathroom, custom cabinet, furniture for public spaces, among others), correcting possible deviations and scoring the possible incidents.

CR 1.3 The review of the complementary facilities (location, powers, capabilities) is controlled, verifying the match with what is reflected in the project.

RP 2: Locate the furniture at the intended location, according to specifications set out in the installation project, to carry out complementary facilities, complying with safety, occupational health, environmental standards applicable.

CR 2.1 The protections and packaging are removed, checking the status of furniture and ancillary elements and noting possible incidents.

CR 2.2 The protections are removed by grouping them by type of material (plastic, cardboard, among others), for recycling and disposal.

CR 2.3 The components of the furniture required in the installation are positioned near the final location, taking into account the architectural elements, the facilities and not making it difficult for the subsequent tasks.

CR 2.4 The furniture elements are placed on floors and walls that are free of dirt, in optimal conditions (without moisture, cracks, escapes), taking into account the mounting plane and the technical specifications.

CR 2.5 The location of the pipes (electricity, water, air, telephone, data network, musical thread) is carried out with the technical means and devices to avoid incidents during the positioning of fixing elements (taco, squads, among others).

RP 3: Set elements of carpentry and furniture, adjusting to the installation plans and the memory of qualities, depending on the type of furniture (kitchen, bathroom, household measure, furniture for public spaces, among others) for the assembly of complementary facilities, complying with the applicable rules.

CR 3.1 The wall fixing systems are determined, considering the base support, depending on the number of plates, plaster, brick, tile, plaster, concrete, among others and the type of furniture.

CR 3.2 The different parts of the installation are joined, following the order established with the required fixings, taking into account the characteristics of the furniture, using the tools established, applying pressure and having in count, load resistance, mobility and deformations in its structural elements.

CR 3.3 The assembly and the fixing of carpentry and furniture elements is carried out, according to the type of installation (kitchen, bathroom, custom cabinet, furniture for public spaces, among others), using the techniques to type.

CR 3.4 The linear elements (countertop, socket, copete, portaluz, cornices, among others) and the decorative elements (moldings, appliqués, among others) are fixed to the installation, adapting to the furniture.

CR 3.5 The operations of fixing carpentry and furniture elements are carried out without the architectural elements and the facilities being damaged, allowing for possible repairs and subsequent revisions.

CR 3.6 The carpentry and furniture elements are fixed, using the required individual protective equipment (E.P.I.) and complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

RP 4: Prepare the furniture for the external assembly of the complementary elements, in collaboration with other installations, following the techniques of each process, complying with the applicable regulations.

CR 4.1 Facilities that require specific qualifications (basic kitchen appliances, TV equipment, video, sound, telephone, among others), other than the one that is collected in this facility, are accompanied by specialist staff, depending on the type of installation, although it does help in simple activities.

CR 4.2 The furniture that requires complementary facilities (kitchen appliances, encastrable sanitary appliances, TV equipment, video, sound, telephony, among others) is prepared according to the requirements of the project, which allow possible repairs and subsequent revisions using individual protective equipment (E.P.I.), complying with the applicable safety standards.

CR 4.3 The external assembly of the complementary elements (kitchen appliances, castrable sanitary appliances, among others), is carried out, in collaboration with other installations, complying with the regulations, according to the requirements of the project.

RP 5: Prepare furniture, according to assembly instructions, to place the fittings and accessories, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health, environmental standards.

CR 5.1 The elements of the installed furniture are prepared according to the project for the placement of the fittings and accessories (shooters, crystals, among others) required.

CR 5.2 The tools used in the placement of hardware and accessories are selected according to established requirements.

CR 5.3 The fittings and accessories in the furniture are mounted according to mounting instructions without causing damage to the components of the mounted installation, using individual protective equipment (E.P.I.), complying with the standards of applicable security.

Professional context:

Production media:

Manual and electro-portable tools. Prefabricated assemblies and subsets. Fixing elements, fittings and hardware elements. Optical, laser and detector levels of electrical installations, water pipelines and others.

Products and results:

Repose of the installation of the furniture and auxiliary elements, made. Location of the furniture at the intended location. Parts of joinery and furniture, fixed. Preparation of the furniture for the external assembly of the complementary elements.

Information used or generated:

Projects, plans, and installation manuals. Incident and installation sheet. Applicable rules for risk prevention and environmental protection.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: CHECK OPERATION AND PERFORM TUNING AND FINISHING OPERATIONS

Level: 2

Code: UC0165_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Adjust the assembled components and fittings in the installation of the furniture, to achieve the fixing of the elements, complying with the safety, occupational health, environmental standards applicable.

CR 1.1 The tools and means used in tuning, assembly, and finishing operations are selected according to established criteria.

CR 1.2 The components of the furniture installation are adjusted, taking the maximum tolerances indicated in the project.

CR 1.3 The fittings installed in the furniture are adjusted, checking the operation of the mechanisms.

CR 1.4 The components of the installation of the furniture are checked together, observing that the aesthetics are achieved to the rest of the project, according to requirements.

RP 2: Review the installation of furniture, verifying the fit and assembly to check the operation of the installed furniture.

CR 2.1 The pieces that are part of the furniture are checked, verifying the assembly and its adjustment to the project.

CR 2.2 The movable parts of the installation of furniture are checked, verifying its operation and its adjustment with the characteristics defined in the project of closing, opening, separation, adjustment and linearity, among others.

RP 3: Perform checks on the installation of furniture, verifying that the performance described in the project is achieved, to carry out the final review of the finish, in compliance with the applicable Regulations.

CR 3.1 The installed elements are manually replayed, achieving the adjustment, operation and finish, according to the final completion described in the project.

CR 3.2 Potentially toxic finishing products are prepared in the required place, complying with the regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 3.3 The adjustment of the restored zone with respect to the adjacent zones is checked, verifying the adjustment to the parameters of vivacity, tonality and clarity, applying the final finish, if there is no harmony in the whole.

CR 3.4 The review of the damage suffered in the elements of the installation of furniture by the transport and installation is carried out, reaching the performance and design initially established in the project.

CR 3.5 The detected incidents, due to transport and installation, are recorded in the incident sheet for the assessment by the person responsible.

CR 3.6 The delivery notes and installation compliance, as well as the satisfaction survey are signed and/or completed by the customer, after the detailed explanation of the same and the verification of the correspondence with the project.

Professional context:

Production media:

Checking and tuning tools. Rutators and repairers. Wrist varnishes, broths, rags, lijas and stropajos of aluminium or steel. Color wax and basic dyes, useful, products, and manual application elements.

Products and results:

Done and trim operations. Review of the installation of furniture. Checks made for finishing the finish.

Information used or generated:

Technical and safety sheets of finished products. Safety regulations for complementary facilities. Job summary tab of the installation. Technical sheets of the products applied. Incident sheet. Survey of satisfaction. Delivery and compliance notes and notes. Applicable rules for risk prevention and environmental protection.

TRAINING MODULE 1: FURNITURE INSTALLATION PROJECTS

Level: 2

Code: MF0163_2

Associate to UC: Plan the installation, collection of materials, machines, and tools

Duration: 150 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Describe the process of the furniture installation project, taking care of the installation phases.

CE1.1 Recognize the different types of furniture facilities that can be made (kitchen, bathroom, home and custom cabinets, furniture for public spaces).

CE1.2 Describe the different phases of the installation project, relating them to each other.

CE1.3 Relate the media involved in the installation of furniture.

CE1.4 Recognize the importance of the different phases of the installation of furniture (data collection, project, transport, installation and adjustment).

C2: Interpret plans, representing and characterizing the space where it is done in the installation of furniture and making the necessary data collection.

CE2.1 Interpret sketches, scale plans, and distributions to deduce the type of installation.

CE2.2 Identify conventional signs and symbols that are used in the representation of electrical, gas, and plumbing installations.

CE2.3 In a scenario of preparing a sketch, from a given project:

-Dimensions the interiors of paraments, hollows, pillars.

-Size devices or elements to integrate into the construction or installation (radiators, appliances, decorative items).

-Set angles, curvatures, and surface irregularities.

-Position the elements of the installation (light points, switches, sockets, taps, drains, vents).

-Get other data necessary for the elaboration of proposals, such as color of the walls, wood of the existing carpentry, moldings of plaster as well as possibilities of fixation of the elements.

CE2.4 Perform natural-scale templates by reproducing complicated shapes, details, and angles.

CE2.5 Drawing flat-scale drawings (floor, lump-sum, sections, details) required to define the space.

C3: Plan the installation, determine the processes, and define constructive solutions on the plane.

CE3.1 Prepare job streams (repose, team preparation, installation, tuning, and fixation operations) characterizing the process, relating them to the portable machines, tools, and useful employees.

CE3.2 In an installation planning scenario, from given conditions:

-Select the type of installation (kitchen, bathroom, home and custom cabinets, furniture for public spaces).

-Justify the proposed solution.

-Perform design and style.

-Determine the basic characteristics and qualities of the materials to be used.

-Determine the surface finish, installation system, and duration of the jobs.

CE3.3 Define the most appropriate installation system for the adopted solution.

CE3.4 Concrete optimal execution times and human resources required.

CE3.5 Define the hardware and add-ons according to the purpose, use, and aesthetics of the project.

C4: Analyze the collection of materials, making the cutting list that enables your manufacture or external supply.

CE4.1 Request material orders by setting delivery times.

CE4.2 Make cutting lists based on the family of products or by-products.

CE4.3 Select suppliers of materials to supply based on their quality, cataloging, valuation and after-sales service.

C5: Rate the necessary tools and accessories, specifying their characteristics.

CE5.1 In a scenario of selecting media to perform the installation, from given conditions:

-Select tools and tools, defining the sequence of use.

-Select security and control devices.

-Select machines, depending on the project.

-Set the relationship and sequence of parts to install and compose.

CE5.2 Set manual tools based on the type of installation.

CE5.3 Select auxiliary means (lighting devices, extensible for power outlets) based on the media.

CE5.4 Select electro-portable machines, tools, and tools depending on the different installation operations.

C6: Select the transport to work, taking into account the type of goods to be transported, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational hazards.

CE6.1 Recognize the means of handling loads, characteristics of 'pallets', types of forklifts, lifts, pallet trucks, based on the needs of loading and unloading and access to the place of installation.

CE6.2 Identify the means of transport of merchandise based on the product to be transported, frailty, volume, weight and distance.

CE6.3 In a practical case of transport of materials, on the basis of given conditions:

-Choose the load-fixing means, depending on the characteristics of the material (fragility, dimensions).

-Preview the use of transport with cranes or special lifts in the case of complicated access or no lifts.

-Download at the installation site, avoiding unnecessary displacements, whenever possible.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 with respect to CE2.3; C3 for CE3.2; C5 for CE5.1; C6 for CE6.3.

Other capabilities:

Maintain the work area with the degree of order and cleanliness required by the organization.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Take responsibility for the work that you develop.

Adapt to the organization, its organizational and technological changes, as well as new situations or contexts.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Technical drawing applied to the installation, mounting plans for defining the installation of furniture

Pieces and sets of furniture.

Representation and normalization. Acutation.

Mount planes.

Architectural plans for distribution and facilities of premises and spaces.

Furniture installation plans (kitchen, bathroom, home and custom cabinets, furniture for public spaces).

Electricity, gas and plumbing installations. Conventional signs and symbols.

Furniture installations. Facility types and features.

Installation location parameters and conditions.

Getting direct measures.

Complementary facilities to be aware of.

Space and facility distribution plans.

Interpretation of planes: scales and measures.

Specific Symbols and Complementary Facilities.

Drawings techniques for furniture installation.

Measurement Useful. Features. Application.

Representation systems (chivalry, among others).

Hand-raised drawing at the installation site, with the corresponding cotas.

Croquis of possible constructive solutions.

Representation of cuts, sections, and details.

Normalization applicable to furniture installation.

Drawing of simple drawings and furniture assembly templates. Drawing using computer tools.

Regulations applicable to the taking of data, measurements and drawings for the installation of furniture.

2. Preparation of templates, tools and materials for the installation of furniture

Furniture item templates. Types, features, and purpose.

Plot and cutting techniques. Equipment and useful.

Specific design and cutting software.

Equipment, tools and tools for mounting furniture installations. Types and features.

Usage and Maintenance.

Materials used in furniture manufacturing.

Wood. Properties and applications. Commercial presentations.

Fungible materials for assembling elements in furniture. Type, features, and applications.

3. Organization of the installation jobs

Assignment of tasks. Timing. Coordination.

Materials and products. Transport and handling.

Preparing the job. Measurement and marking. I repose on work.

Machines, tools, and tools used in installation.

Complementary facilities. Specific features of the installation site.

4. Transport of materials for the installation of furniture to the place of location

Transport used. Types and capacity to transport.

Features of the access to the installation site.

Characteristics of the products to be transported. Applicable municipal regulations.

Loading and unloading parts and items for furniture installation.

Packaging and protection of items that require it.

Machines and equipment used in the intermediate transport.

Fixing the load to the means of transport, according to fragility, balance of the masses and weights of materials and tools.

Applicable Labor Risk Prevention Regulations.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the planning of the installation, the collection of materials, machines and tools, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 5 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: FURNITURE INSTALLATIONS

Level: 2

Code: MF0164_2

UC Associate: Compose and Fix Furniture and Perform Complementary Facilities

Duration: 270 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Review the installation site, matching it with the project.

CE1.1 In a scenario of reviewing an installation, based on a given condition:

-Check the project and work data.

-Check that the architectural elements are reflected in the project.

-Check that complementary installations can be performed without major incidents.

-Review that the color of walls, wood of the existing carpentry, and element-fixing capabilities match the project and are compatible for the installation.

-Perform jobs by observing safety and health standards.

C2: Locate the furniture and auxiliary elements at the installation site, following the specifications of the project, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational risks.

CE2.1 In a convenient location of furniture location, from given conditions:

-Withdraw packaging and protections, checking the status of furniture and auxiliary elements, noting the incidents.

-Group packaging and protections, performing their classification for subsequent recycling and disposal.

-Make the positioning of the furniture components, placing them near the final installation site, respecting the architectural elements, installations and facilitating the subsequent tasks.

-Make the location of the pipes (electricity, water, air, telephone, data network, music thread), using the necessary devices, avoiding incidents when making the fixings.

C3: Make the composition, interpreting installation plans and material lists.

CE3.1 In a practical scenario of composition of carpentry elements, from given conditions:

-Make the composition based on the project, using the specified materials.

-Review that the installation plans indicate the exact location of the placement.

-Check that the materials correspond to the indicated without missing anything.

-Make the composition, considering the characteristics of the pieces (sense and shape of the vein, hardness, color).

-Check that the cleanup of the work corresponds to the required minimums and allows the start of the work.

C4: Set the composition according to project specifications.

CE4.1 In a practical scenario, from given conditions:

-Perform the fixing of the parts accurately and without causing damage, guiding them correctly and respecting the established aesthetic conditions.

-Select tools and useful considering their suitability for the job.

-Perform the installation and assembly of auxiliary elements according to the type of installation (kitchen, bathroom, home and custom cabinets, furniture for public spaces).

-Check that the fixings to be used are suitable for the type of base support on which they are installed (plaster, brick, tile, 'plasterboard plates'), and they can safely support the loads to which they are subjected.

-Make the fixings so that they allow modifications if necessary and as far as possible.

-Perform the installation of the linear elements (countertop, socket, copete, portaluz, cornisa) and the decorative elements (moldings, appliqués), adapting to the furniture and finishing level required in the project.

-Set security and occupational health measures to be adopted in the handling of elements, depending on the characteristics of the technical sheets.

C5: Perform the placement of hardware, add-ons, and determine operations.

CE5.1 In a scenario of placement of hardware, from given conditions:

-Check that the hardware and its mechanisms do not present any rust, or damage to its operation.

-Verify that the hardware is installed, following the instructions and specifications of the technical documentation.

-Make the selection of the tools used in the placement of fittings and add-ons according to the established requirements.

-Perform the setting of hardware, by means of the pressure, ensuring its correct operation and avoiding tears that merit the resistance of the elements.

C6: Perform the preparation of the furniture for the assembly of complementary elements and the collaboration in the installation of the same.

CE6.1 In a practical furniture preparation scenario, based on a given condition:

-Make the preparation the furniture that requires complementary facilities (countertops, linear elements, kitchen appliances, encastrables, tv equipment, video, sound, telephony), allowing ease of access for future reviews and repairs.

-Make the necessary collaboration that requires complementary facilities (countertops, linear elements, kitchen appliances, encastrables, tv equipment, video, sound, telephony), coordinating the teres, and times according to project requirements.

-Make the preparation of the furniture that requires complementary facilities, meeting the requirements of the project, and the current regulations.

C7: Perform complementary installations according to specifications.

CE7.1 In a scenario of complementary facilities, based on the following conditions:

-Check that the work's base work is performed according to specifications and allows the necessary modification or extension.

-Verify that the tuning materials are coupled to the base material without further security.

-Conditioning installations that are in place that do not affect security.

-Perform operations in compliance with applicable safety and occupational health regulations.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 full; C2 full; C3 full; C4 full; C5 complete; C6 complete; C7 complete.

Other capabilities:

Maintain the work area with the degree of order and cleanliness required by the organization.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Take responsibility for the work that you develop.

Adapt to the organization, its organizational and technological changes, as well as new situations or contexts.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Technical drawing applied to the installation of carpentry and furniture

Architectural plans for distribution and facilities of premises and spaces.

Carpentry and furniture installation plans.

Representation of furniture compositions.

Facilities symbology.

2. Repose of the installation of the furniture at the location site

Checking data at the installation site.

Data collection. Using instruments.

General floor and ceiling reference drops.

References and marks, complementary indications.

State of the place of furniture installation: humidity, electrical installations, location, among others.

Project characteristics.

Furniture installation conditions.

Parameters: dimensions, levelling, and verticality.

Repose to work.

Elements to be reposed.

3. Placement of furniture

Preparing the components of the furniture used in the installation.

Cleaning and preparing the installation site.

Placement of furniture elements on floors and walls.

School testing techniques, horizontality, verticality. Useful.

Interpretation of furniture assembly documentation and technical specifications related to placement of furniture.

Features of furniture pieces when making the composition: sense, shape of the vein, hardness, color, among others.

4. Installing the furniture in your location

Furniture fixing support.

Characteristics of hardness, strength, fixing of products that are part of the furniture support: 'pladur', bricks, tiles, plaster.

Conditions of leveling and verticality of walls and floors.

Features of fixing the furniture to the media.

In situ installation work of modular furniture and its complements: preparation of the work. Techniques and instruments.

Installing modular furniture: Nomenclature, characteristic types, functions, assembly.

Adhesives used in the assembly of modular furniture. Characteristics, types and uses. Quality control. Rules.

Different furniture bonding systems, depending on the base material (types of tacos, types of tortilings, among others).

Characteristics of the installation of modular furniture: Factors involved, quality assessment. Items to consider.

Assembly and adjustment systems in high, low, beds, bunk beds, lockers, tables. Perpendicularity, alignment, squads. Quality control.

5. Assembly and installation of remate elements in modular furniture

Holguras in the installation of modular furniture: location, redistribution, needs.

School testing techniques, horizontality and verticality. Useful.

Work-in-mount drilling: wall, floor, pliers, and on the furniture to be installed: marking of locations.

Graped, nailed, and bolted: description, uses, and application technology.

Glass assembly. Technique.

Tools used in the installation of furniture: types, description, operation and maintenance.

Manual and electro-portable machines used in the installation of furniture.

6. Collaboration in the assembly of complementary furniture installations

Checking the features of the complementary facilities.

Characteristics of complementary facilities (electricity, sound, ventilation and plumbing). Location, powers and capabilities.

Preparation of the furniture for the installation of the complementary facilities. Marking of locations.

Complementary facility attachment operations.

7. Placement of fittings and accessories in the furniture

Hardware and add-ons, features.

Fittings and attachment systems for installation in modular furniture.

Hardware types: Mobile and fixed units.

Description, uses, and application and tuning technology.

Systems work: assessment, load effort.

Documentation, catalogs.

Hardware placement: tools used in the placement of hardware and accessories.

Installation of hardware. Fastening of hardware.

Choosing and using the template in the hardware assembly.

8. Quality in the installation of carpentry and furniture

Quality of the installation. Factors involved.

Quality assessment. Items to consider.

9. Applicable rules on the prevention of labour risks applicable to furniture installations

Working conditions and security.

Prevention and protection measures. Risk factors.

First aid. Actions to take. Measures.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the composition and fixation of furniture and the carrying out of complementary facilities, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 5 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 3: FITTING AND FINISHING FURNITURE INSTALLATIONS

Level: 2

Code: MF0165_2

Associated with UC: Check operation and perform tuning and finishing operations

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Perform the tuning of the hardware according to project specifications.

CE1.1 In a scenario of setting up hardware, from given conditions:

-Adjust hardware according to technical documentation and loads to request.

-Check that the tolerances of the opening systems are made based on their moving conditions.

-Verify the set of installation hardware, noting that the aesthetics are achieved with the rest of the project.

C2: Check the operation of the hardware on the installed furniture.

CE2.1 In a practical scenario of checking the operation of hardware, based on a given condition:

-Review that the loads and weights to be supported are repaired by all fixing systems leaving the solid set of a part.

-Verify the operation of the moving elements by leaving it tight but warning the customer that once the furniture is loaded, a final adjustment may be necessary.

-Coding the technical information to the client for possible queries.

C3: Perform step-up, repair jobs, applying proprietary techniques for each case.

CE3.1 Specify how the repair of: hits, ralls, and imperfections would be performed.

CE3.2 Describe security conditions on potentially toxic finishes in the preparation and application operations.

CE3.3 Recognize the repass materials based on the finished finish.

C4: Check that the completed installation responds to the project specifications, performing the required incidents and documentation.

CE4.1 In a scenario of testing the installation, based on a given condition:

-Log the detected incidents, due to the transport and installation, indicating the solutions that have been proposed.

-Deliver the merchandise receipt and compliance note of the installation, to be signed by the client, checking the correspondence with the project.

-Deliver the customer satisfaction survey, for completion and submission to the company.

-Perform the cleaning of the installation (doors, crystals, interior of furniture) by checking that it is ready to be delivered to the client.

-Perform the cleanup of the installation site (floor and walls) by checking that it is ready to deliver to the client.

-Collect and separate the generated waste for recycling.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 full; C2 full; C4 complete.

Other capabilities:

Maintain the work area with the degree of order and cleanliness required by the organization.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Take responsibility for the work that you develop.

Adapt to the organization, its organizational and technological changes, as well as new situations or contexts.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Adjusting the assembled components in the furniture installation

Adjusting and assembling the furniture. Characteristics of the fitting and assembly of the furniture.

Assembly techniques.

Assembly parameters and conditions. Tolerances.

Fulfillment of the furniture set aesthetic.

Tools and media used in setting and assembling furniture. Types and features.

Manual and electro-portable tools. Measuring and leveling instruments (meter, gauge, level).

Materials used in the fitting and assembly of furniture. Types and characteristics. Glues, adhesives and silicones.

2. Checking the operation of the installed furniture

Checking the furniture assembly.

Mount end state check techniques. Flatness, perpendicularity, squalid, location, horizontality and verticality.

Checking for Herrage Adjustment.

End State of the Herrage Adjustment.

Adjustment of holguras and differences in the fittings. Techniques and equipment.

Checking the movable parts of the furniture.

Features of movable parts of furniture.

Mechanisms and functions. Closing, opening, adjusting and linearity, among others.

3. The finish in the furniture installation

Finishing the installation of furniture.

Preparing surfaces.

Repair of defects and marks. Techniques

Manual finishing in the installation of furniture.

Repair of surfaces. Techniques.

Sanding. Purpose. Techniques. Types of lijas and uses.

Masillado. Purpose. Application techniques.

Vacuuming and Cleaning.

4. Furniture installation finishing products and tools

Products used in the repast and finish in the furniture installation. Nomenclature.

Products for manual finishing. Varnishes, dyes, among others.

Preparing the furniture installation finishing products.

Retouching materials (putty, among others).

Cleaning products.

Useful and machinery used in finishing.

Manual and electro-portable tools for finishing the furniture installation. Use and maintenance.

5. Management documentation

Administrative documentation management (Delivery notes, installation compliance, satisfaction surveys.

Managing incident parts.

6. Applicable rules on the prevention of occupational risks related to the adjustment and finishing of furniture installations

Working conditions and security.

Environmental conditions for the application.

Risk factors. Prevention and protection measures.

First aid.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the verification of the operation and the performance of the adjustment and finishing operations, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 5 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX III

PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE FINISHING

Professional Family: Wood, Furniture and Corcho

Level: 2

Code: MAM060_2

General competition:

Perform finishing of carpentry and furniture elements, preparing supports, obtaining dyes and finishing products, applying them by manual or mechanical means and controlling the drying process, according to the established procedures, with the required quality and in terms of safety, occupational health and environmental protection.

Competition Units:

UC0166_2: Prepare support and point products and equipment for finishing application

UC0167_1: Carry out the application of surface finishing products with mechanical and mechanical means in carpentry and furniture

UC0168_2: Perform the tinting, special and decorative finishes

Professional Environment:

Professional Scope:

Develops its professional activity in the production department in close relation to the maintenance in wood, furniture and cork industries dedicated to the manufacture of furniture and carpentry elements the application of finishing products to entities of a private nature, large companies, medium-sized and small enterprises, whether employed or self-employed. It develops its activity, depending on its case, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. You may have staff in your position at times, for seasons or in a stable way. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors:

It is located in the furniture manufacturing sector, sub-sectors manufacturing and installation of carpentry and finishing of carpentry and furniture.

Relevant Occupations and Jobs:

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Finished section responsible:

Peons of the wood and cork industry

Wooden Furniture And/Or Craft Lacquers

Barnizers, dye applicators, bottoms and finishes, with manual and mechanical means (pistols, varnishing machines, electrostatic equipment)

Associated Training (480 hours)

Training Modules

MF0166_2: Preparing media and products for finishing (150 hours)

MF0167_1: Application of finished products in carpentry and furniture (90 hours)

MF0168_2: Tintados, special and decorative finishes (240 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: PREPARE SUPPORT AND POINT PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT FOR FINISHING APPLICATION

Level: 2

Code: UC0166_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Preparing equipment and finishing materials, conditioning machines and tools for the application of finished products in carpentry and furniture elements, complying with applicable safety regulations, occupational health, environmental and quality.

CR 1.1 The application of the finished products in carpentry and furniture elements is planned, using the production sheets, considering the requirements of the product to be obtained, the material and procedures to apply.

CR 1.2 Tools, machines and equipment, such as: mechanical barnizers, guns, brushes and check elements, among others, required in the application of finished products in carpentry and furniture elements select, depending on the material to be applied and the properties of the base media.

CR 1.3 The tools and equipment for the application of the finish are prepared, according to the material to be applied and the properties of the base support, such as: preparation and cleaning of brushes, programming of equipment application, placement of useful and adjustments, among others.

CR 1.4 The materials, determined for the application of finished products in carpentry and furniture elements (varnishes, lacquers, among others), are selected, using the technical production sheets, according to the material to be applied and base support properties.

CR 1.5 The job position is checked, verifying that it is free of objects that make it difficult to finish application work on carpentry and furniture items.

RP 2: Perform first-level maintenance operations, machines and finishing equipment, detecting possible breakdowns and carrying out the reglages, as indicated in the maintenance plan, for the application of products finishing on carpentry and furniture elements, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality regulations.

CR 2.1 The first level maintenance of the machines and equipment (reglages, oil changes, among others) of application of finished products in elements of carpentry and furniture, is carried out, in the form and periodicity indicated in the manual of use, provided by the manufacturer, following the guidelines marked on the maintenance record, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality regulations.

CR 2.2 Possible damaged or defective parts in equipment and machines for the application of finished products in carpentry and furniture elements, such as: airfoil, airless system, barnized robot, among others, are detected, acting according to equipment maintenance instructions.

CR 2.3 The replacement of parts or items specified as a first level, in machines and equipment for the application of finished products in carpentry and furniture elements (aerography gun, airless system, barnized robot, among others), it is done, acting according to instructions for the maintenance of equipment, complying with the applicable regulations.

CR 2.4 The operations referred to the first level maintenance on machines and equipment for the application of finished products in carpentry and furniture elements, carried out, is recorded, according to production process for the history of incidents.

RP 3: Remove stains or rugosities from surfaces in carpentry and furniture elements by sanding, massing for the application of finishing products.

CR 3.1 The absence or presence of stains or rugosities of the surfaces to be treated, are checked, reviewing the state of the surfaces, visually or to the touch, according to work requirements.

CR 3.2 Carpentry and furniture surfaces with small defects, are corrected by sanding, massing, after-fining of the putty, using the materials (lijas, putty, among others) and tools (spatula, between other), depending on the work to be carried out, according to the technical document.

CR 3.3 The previously sanded surfaces are checked, noting that the fineness and finish conforms to the established characteristics.

CR 3.4 The existing polluting products on surfaces to be treated (paint debris, among others) are removed, with application of degreasing products, complying with safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards. applicable.

RP 4: Obtain products, by means of mixtures for the application of the final finish on surfaces of elements of carpentry and furniture, complying with the applicable regulations of safety, occupational health, environmental and quality.

CR 4.1 The products to be applied in the surface finish, such as: dyes, bottoms, finishes, solvents and others, are selected, considering various aspects, such as: means and possibilities of application, preferences of the client, type of application surface: walls, ceilings and place of destination: interior or exterior, among others, complying with the regulations of each of the products.

CR 4.2 The products to be applied in the surface finish (dyes, bottoms, finishes, among others), are mixed considering the compatibility of the materials and the instructions of the manufacturer, adjusting to the requirements of job.

CR 4.3 The materials to be applied in the surface finish are prepared, obtaining the viscosity established by means of addition of solvents and verifying the conservation status, complying with the standards that the Hojas of Safety of each product, complying with applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

Professional context:

Production media:

Pieces to Barnize. Chemical products for varnishing. Application equipment (pistols, brushes, mechanical varnishes). Check elements (viscosimeter, gyrometer, stopwatch, scale, test pieces). Product safety and technical sheets.

Products and results:

Equipment and finishing materials, prepared. Operations carried out of first-level maintenance, of the finishing machines and equipment. Stains or rugosities of surfaces in elements of carpentry and furniture, eliminated. Mixtures of finished products prepared.

Information used or generated:

Technical and Product Safety Sheets. Technical specifications of the equipment. Sheets of manufacture. Safety, occupational health, environmental and quality regulations.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: CARRY OUT SURFACE FINISHING PRODUCTS WITH MECHANICAL AND MANUAL MEANS IN THE CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE

Level: 1

Code: UC0167_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Apply the finished products with gun and other hand tools, on carpentry surfaces and furniture to obtain the finished finish, complying with applicable safety regulations, occupational health, environmental and quality, following instructions.

CR 1.1 The finishing products: lacquers, varnishes, among others and auxiliary means of finishing of carpentry surfaces and auxiliary means: guns, brushes, rollers, among others, are prepared according to the finish to be applied and available means.

CR 1.2 The finishing products are applied with the established machines, equipment and tools, according to the type of product and finish to be applied, according to the technical specifications, complying with the applicable safety regulations, health work, environment and quality.

CR 1.3 The fluidity of the varnish product is controlled with viscosimeter, indicating, addition or not, of solvents in order to facilitate the application, according to the technical specifications.

CR 1.4 The application of the finishing product is performed by manual operations and handling of the tools and means, so that the result is obtained.

CR 1.5 The applicator and the pieces that constitute it are checked, verifying that they are in the ideal conditions to achieve the use of the material and to increase the quality of the application.

CR 1.6 The quality of the application of the finished product is achieved, guaranteeing the pressure and flow parameters, through the visual control of the application.

RP 2: Apply finishing products with continuous process automatic machines, on carpentry and furniture surfaces, to obtain the established finish, complying with applicable regulations, occupational safety and environmental, following instructions.

CR 2.1 The application machines for finishing products are regulated according to the parameters established, according to the characteristics of the support and the material to be used, controlling parameters of: speed of advancement and breakage of curtain, among others.

CR 2.2 The parts are placed on the finishing machines, checking that a uniform flow of the product is obtained, optimizing the process.

CR 2.3 The application of finishes with automatic continuous process machines is adjusted to the geometry of the parts and to the parameters set out in the production plan.

CR 2.4 The deviations detected in the process of application of finishes with automatic continuous process machines are communicated to the senior manager.

RP 3: Run control actions in the process of application of finished products with continuous process machines, in carpentry and furniture to achieve the established finish, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The parameters of the equipment used in the application of finished products with automatic continuous process machines, in carpentry and furniture are adjusted, depending on the product used, checking the evaporation of the solvents and the curing of the products.

CR 3.2 The constant flow of the products to be applied, is carried out, maintaining control of the levels, preventing interruptions in production.

CR 3.3 The finishing product is applied, controlling the environmental conditions of: temperature, renewal and air purity, proceeding to reset them in case of diversion of the same, complying with applicable regulations.

CR 3.4 Quality control throughout the application of finished products with continuous process automatic machines is performed according to established criteria.

CR 3.5 Equipment and accessories are cleaned upon completion of the finishing products application work, leaving them under conditions of use for later use.

RP 4: Separate the waste from the finished product of the machines and utensils used in the application of finishes, to carry out its handling and treatment as established, following instructions.

CR 4.1 The separation of the waste is carried out during the application process, at the end of the process and with the frequency established in the production plan, complying with the applicable regulations.

CR 4.2 Waste is stored in containers in previously established locations, complying with applicable regulations.

CR 4.3 Waste handling is carried out using the individual means of protection and protection in compliance with the applicable regulations.

Professional context:

Production media:

Handguns equipment: aerographic, airmix, airless, electrostatic, continuous machines: roller barnizers, curtain, application robots. Tunnels and chambers of convection or radiation drying (IR, UV). Application cabins with air refresh.

Products and results:

Finish products, applied with gun and other manual means. Finishing products applied with continuous process automatic machines. Control actions executed to perform the process of applying finishing products with continuous process automatic machines. Separate residues of the finished product.

Information used or generated:

Technical and Security Sheets. Technical sheets of the equipment. Quality control results sheets. Environmental parameters. Incident sheets. Regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks and quality, applicable. Work instructions.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: PERFORM THE TINTING, SPECIAL AND DECORATIVE FINISHES

Level: 2

Code: UC0168_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Apply the tinting of carpentry pieces and furniture, with manual or mechanical means to achieve uniformity, color constancy and differences between parts, complying with applicable safety regulations, occupational health, environmental and quality.

CR 1.1 The dye of the selected color is obtained from a color card or pattern piece, with the selected chemicals, measuring them according to the intended tonality, obtaining a homogenization of the same.

CR 1.2 The pieces or furniture are impregnated with the base according to the problem of the support (resins, tannins, among others), checking if with one hand it is sufficient, to obtain the final result, previewed, or on the contrary, is required, repeat the application.

CR 1.3 The pieces or furniture are impregnated with the specified dye, manually, with brushes, brushes, among others, ensuring that the color is uniform throughout the piece, without presenting spots and irregularities of tone, not There must be appreciable differences between the different pieces that make up a set or series of them and taking into account the sequence of application, achieving different finishes.

CR 1.4 The piece or piece of furniture is impregnated with the selected dye in an automated or mechanical manner, such as: varnishing robot, aerographic guns, among others, ensuring that the color is uniform throughout the piece or furniture, without to present stains and irregularities of tone, there must be no appreciable differences between the different pieces that make up a set or series of them and taking into account the sequence of application, achieving different finishes.

CR 1.5 The drying of the dye applied to the piece or piece of furniture is checked, checked and regulated, such as: temperature, time, speed and humidity of the air, among others, in order to produce as intended.

CR 1.6 The quality of the pieces or tinned furniture is controlled, verifying the uniformity, constancy of the color and differences between pieces, valuing a new application or retouching of some piece, in the presence of possible deviations, with respect to color uniformity.

RP 2: Apply the tinting of carpentry pieces and furniture, by means of special finishes to achieve uniformity, constancy of colour and differences between pieces, complying with the applicable regulations of safety, occupational health and environmental.

CR 2.1 Special finishing products are checked, verifying that the nature and color are required, before making the application on carpentry pieces and furniture.

CR 2.2 Electrostatic special finishes (dust paint, among others), are applied on carpentry and furniture parts, using automated means (electrostatic guns, among others), complying with the regulations of safety and environmental health.

CR 2.3 The drying of carpentry pieces and furniture that require special drying, such as: ultraviolet curing ovens, infrared, among others, is controlled, verifying parameters of drying, such as: temperature, time, air speed and humidity, inter alia, in such a way as to occur as intended.

RP 3: Apply decorative effects on carpentry pieces and furniture, controlling the drying process to achieve uniformity, color constancy and differences between parts, complying with applicable safety regulations, occupational health and the environment.

CR 3.1 The decorative finishing products are checked before the application is made, verifying that the nature and color are required, before the application is made.

CR 3.2 The finishes, decorative (aged, skating, golden, marmolized, pearly, among others), are applied manually (brushes, brushes, among others), obtaining that the color is uniform throughout the piece, without to present stains and irregularities of tone, there must be no appreciable differences between the different pieces that make up a set or series of them and taking into account the sequence of application to achieve different finishes, obtaining the requested termination.

CR 3.3 The finishes, decorative (aged, skating, golden, marmolized, pearly, among others), are applied in an automated or mechanical manner (barnized robot, aerographic guns, among others), obtaining that the color is uniform throughout the piece or piece of furniture, without any blemishes and irregularities of tone, there must be no appreciable differences between the different pieces that make up a set or series of them and taking into account the sequence of application for getting different finishes, obtaining the requested termination.

CR 3.4 The drying of decorative finishes on carpentry and furniture parts, which require special drying (ultraviolet, infrared, etc.), controls, checking and regulating drying parameters. (temperature, time, air speed and humidity, among others), so that it occurs as intended.

Professional context:

Production media:

Dyes and specific chemicals; application equipment and machinery: aerographic and electrostatic guns, roller tintners, varnishes, spatulas and 'reverse' for radiation products, curtain machines and robots of pistols, ultraviolet (UV), infrared (IR) and microwave curing tunnels.

Products and results:

Special finishes work area on carpentry and furniture surfaces for the dyeing, drying and curing of carpentry and furniture pieces. First-level maintenance operations, equipment and installations of tinting, curing and drying of carpentry and furniture pieces. Finishing of carpentry pieces and furniture. Tinting of carpentry and furniture pieces. Finishes applied, by means of application of decorative effects on carpentry and furniture pieces.

Information used or generated:

Technical and Product Safety Sheets. Specifications of the equipment. Applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards.

TRAINING MODULE 1: PREPARING MEDIA AND PRODUCTS FOR FINISHING

Level: 2

Code: MF0166_2

Associate to UC: Prepare support and point products and equipment for finishing application

Duration: 150 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Perform first-level cleaning, preparation and maintenance operations of machinery and equipment, used in the preparation of supports and products for the application of the finish.

CE1.1 Recognize the operation, constitution and safety devices of the machinery and equipment used in the preparation of supports and products for the application of the finish.

CE1.2 Identify the first-level maintenance operations of the teams and run them according to the appropriate instructions or manuals.

CE1.3 List the anomalies or main operating problems more frequently, during the use of the machines by identifying the correction indicated in each case.

CE1.4 In a practical scenario of first-level cleaning and maintenance operations of machinery and equipment, based on the following conditions:

-Perform the cleaning of machines, equipment and areas, achieving the required levels of preparation in the preparation of supports and products for the application of finishes.

-Admit the processing equipment to the requirements of the process to be executed.

-Perform the basic maintenance operations of the support and product preparation equipment for the application of the finish.

C2: Describe the preparation processes of the media and products for the application of the finish.

CE2.1 Relating the different phases of the media preparation processes.

CE2.2 Understand the properties that media should have based on the products to be applied.

CE2.3 Relate the various phases of the finishing application processes.

CE2.4 List the risks, inherent to the manipulation and derivatives of the manipulation, of products for the application of the finish.

C3: Prepare the surfaces for the application of the finish based on the material to be used and the expected result, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CE3.1 Describe the characteristics of the surfaces, depending on their nature and type of product to be applied.

CE3.2 In a practical scenario of surface finishing, from a given condition:

-Adecuate the surfaces for the application of the finished products: cleaning, sanding, massing, obtaining the ideal characteristics.

-Set the conditions that the surface must have for the application.

-Perform the operations that are required for the preparation of the surfaces, using the required tools, tools and machines.

C4: Obtain products according to the manufacturer's technical specifications, complying with applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CE4.1 Identify the different types of products and components used in the finish (lacquers, varnishes, solvents).

CE4.2 Describe the compatibilities and incompatibilities between the different products and finishing components and their combination possibilities or mixtures for the application.

CE4.3 In a scenario of obtaining products for final finishes, based on the following conditions:

-Make the mixture of the components, such as: lacquers, varnishes, diluents, among others, employed in the finishes, achieving the homogeneity, viscosity required, according to the technical specifications.

-Keep the equipment and supplies clean and in conditions of use, reviewing their status at the end of the media preparation work and before starting them, complying with the applicable safety, health and environmental regulations environment.

C5: Value the risks arising from surface and product preparation operations, complying with applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CE5.1 Identify the risks and level of danger posed by the manipulation of the various materials, products, tools and equipment used in the preparation of products for finishing.

CE5.2 Identify the safety and occupational health measures to be taken in the handling of finished products according to their characteristics, the technical safety sheets and the instructions given by the manufacturer.

CE5.3 Describe the required security conditions in the preparation and maintenance operations of equipment and installations.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 with respect to CE1.4; C3 with respect to CE3.2; C4 with respect to CE4.3.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the production rules set by the organization.

Prove a good professional.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Maintain the work area with the degree of order and cleanliness required by the organization.

Contents:

1. First-level maintenance of support and product preparation equipment for finishing application

Basic or usage maintenance: operations.

Maintenance instructions. Interpretation.

Deviations from deficiencies in the maintenance of machines.

2. Surface preparation methods for finishing

Application Surfaces.

Features for finishing.

Surface sanding for prior coating.

Removing and correcting defects and stains.

Masked.

Coated with previous coating.

Hardness/drying required prior to sanding.

Polishing of finished surfaces.

Machines and useful for sanding and polishing. Application. Operations. Regulation.

Finishes sanding abrasives.

Granulometry.

Determination of the type based on the surface.

3. Preparation techniques for finishing products

Products.

Main types and features.

Barnices and paintings.

Solvents and diluents.

Other products (pickling, waxes).

Measurement of components (volume, weight, viscosity).

Mix. Agitation/homogenization.

Compatibility of the components.

Gelling point. Time to live.

4. Quality control in the preparation of special finishes

Factors that influence the quality of materials, products, and the process of preparing media and products for finishing.

During preparation

Correcting defects.

Control of the preparation operations.

State of the surfaces.

Post-preparation control.

Verification of features.

Quality control techniques.

5. Applicable regulations on occupational safety and health in special finishes

Characteristic risks of the facilities and processes of finishes.

Fire, explosion, toxicity.

Precautions to be taken during handling and application of components and finishing products.

Security items. Personal. Machines. Installations.

6. Waste treatment

Waste generated in finishing operations.

Fetch, transport and storage of waste in the factory. Systems and media.

Treatment, use and discharge of waste.

Removal of sanding powder.

Waste of application cabins.

Remains of non-employee products.

Packaging.

Methods and means used. Regulations.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of the support and the tuning of the products and equipment for the application of the finish, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: APPLICATION OF SURFACE PRODUCTS FINISHING IN CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE

Level: 1

Code: MF0167_1

Associate with UC: Performing the application of surface finishing products with mechanical and manual means in the carpentry and furniture

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Explain the processes of tuning machines and equipment and the application of surface finishing products with manual-mechanical means.

CE1.1 Relate the different phases of product application processes to each other and within the process of part finishes.

CE1.2 Recognize the properties of the finishes according to the technical characteristics of their components and the surfaces to be applied.

CE1.3 Relate the machines and equipment for the application of products with the finishes to be applied and the desired types of finishes.

CE1.4 List the most common defects produced during the application process, its causes, and its correction.

CE1.5 List the risks involved in handling and handling application products, as applicable.

C2: Apply finishing products with handguns and other manual means, obtaining carpentry and furniture parts with the defined characteristics.

CE2.1 Specify the risks associated with the application of finishing products, as applicable.

CE2.2 In a scenario of applying finishing products, based on a given condition:

-Check that the machines, equipment and useful to be used in the application as well as the products to be applied, are those required for the type of work and material.

-Place the pieces in the workplace, allowing an application with minimal material waste, achieving the highest final quality.

-Select the means of application by considering different parameters (surface, material on which to apply and type of finish desired among others).

-Use individual protective equipment (EPIS), complying with applicable safety, health and environmental health regulations, so that the application is carried out with the minimum impact.

-Apply the finishing product, visually control the quality of the application and adapt parameters (pressure, viscosity and flow among others) to correct possible deviations, improving the quality of the application.

CE2.3 In an application scenario and depending on the product to be reached and its subsequent application:

-Determine the equipment and products to use in the application.

-Determine the optimal sequence of operations to perform.

-Perform the movement and placement of the parts.

-Position the applicator and parts.

C3: Apply the finish, operating with machines and automatic application equipment, getting parts with the defined features.

CE3.1 Describe the most common failures or defects that can occur during the application of the product.

CE3.2 Recognize the function of the various machine and equipment operating control devices and the risks involved in their mishandling.

CE3.3 In a scenario of finishing application, from given conditions:

-Dispose the materials properly in the feeders and equipment to obtain the required result.

-Maintain application parameters, by regulating devices (flow rate, curtain break, start rate among others).

-visually check product levels during application by removing them and preventing application stoppage or deficiencies in the application.

-Communicate defects detected during application to the top manager, interrupting the process if deemed necessary.

-Manipulate waste in compliance with applicable environmental regulations.

C4: Defer the results of finished work of parts and elements of carpentry and furniture, checking that the required characteristics are met.

CE4.1 Explain the risks arising from the finishing application operations, according to applicable regulations.

CE4.2 In a practical scenario of quality control of parts and elements of carpentry and furniture:

-Relate the possible defects that usually occur in parts during finishing jobs with the probable causes of them.

-Check the quality obtained with the expected specifications or results and in your case correct the deviations.

-Check the application equipment, verify its proper operation, and correct any deviations.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 with respect to CE2.2 and CE2.3; C3 with respect to CE3.3; C4 with respect to CE4.2.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the correct production rules.

Prove a good professional.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Contents:

1. Manual application of the finish

Procedures and operations in the manual application.

Products for manual finishing. Preparation. Mixtures.

Useful in manual application, pistols: types, preparation, operations, other useful manual application (brush, roller).

Media technology on which the finish is performed.

Defects in manual finishing.

Correcting defects.

Control application operations.

State of the surfaces and the product to be applied.

Conditions of the application. Post-application control.

2. Industrial application of the finish

Machines and application equipment. Features. Application. Regulation. Operations.

Industrial application techniques of finishing. Phases.

Facilities and complementary equipment for the application (curtains, cabins, ventilation, compressed air). Operation and regulation.

Media technology on which the finish is performed.

Handling and transport of parts during application and drying. Systems. Media. Precautions.

Organization and distribution of the job.

Work organization techniques.

Sequencing operations of the industrial application of the finish.

Defects in the industrial finish.

Correcting defects.

Control application operations.

State of the surfaces and the product to be applied. Conditions of the application. Post-application control.

3. Rules applicable to the finishing

Characteristic risks of the facilities and processes of finishes.

Fire. Explosion. Toxicity.

Precautions to be taken during handling and application of components and finishing products.

Security items. Personal. EPIS. Machines. Installations.

Treatments and disposal of waste generated by the finish. Removal of sanding powder. Waste from the application booths. Remains of non-employed products. Packaging. Documentation.

First aid.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the application of finished products with mechanical means in carpentry and furniture, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 3: TINTED, SPECIAL AND DECORATIVE FINISHES

Level: 2

Code: MF0168_2

Associate to UC: Perform the Taining, Special and Decorative Finishes

Duration: 240 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Describe product application processes and get mixtures.

CE1.1 Relate the different phases of the product preparation process and its application.

CE1.2 List the properties of special and decorative finishes according to the technical characteristics of their components.

CE1.3 Relate the machines and equipment needed for the application of products in special finishes.

CE1.4 Describe the spaces needed to get good quality in the special finishes.

CE1.5 List the risks inherent in the application of products in special finishes.

C2: Obtain mixtures or solutions of products for special finishes, according to specifications given by the manufacturer, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards.

CE2.1 Identify the different types of components and products used in the special finishes: Tintes, additives, bleaching and bleaching.

CE2.2 Describe the compatibilities and incompatibilities between the different components and products in special finishes.

CE2.3 In a practical scenario of obtaining mixtures for special finishes, on the basis of given conditions:

-Prepare products for special finishes from the components, according to the manufacturer's technical specifications.

-Prepare the dye.

-Apply it, checking the contrast that gives us the color required in a model-sample piece before making the application.

-Perform a sample and check it/contrast it with a master-piece pattern.

C3: Apply special and tinted finish products, determining required equipment and materials, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards.

CE3.1 Describe the types of equipment and their characteristics (parts that form and apply it), and the tools and tools used in the application of special finishes.

CE3.2 In a practical scenario of applying special finishing products, based on the following conditions:

-Point the machines and equipment for application and drying by the operations of: product loading, cleaning and assignment of parameters: material dosage, speed, temperature.

-Dispose the materials on the machines and equipment in order to obtain the required result.

-Correct the most frequent failures or alterations that can occur in the regular operation of machines and equipment.

C4: Apply products for decorative work, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards.

CE4.1 In a practical scenario of applying decorative finishes, based on a given condition:

-Select the products used in the application of decorative finishes.

-Get the product mixes used in the application of decorative finishes.

-Apply the decorative finishes with the means set for that purpose.

-Perform the decoration of special finishes (skating, gilets).

-Perform decorative finishes using the means of protection and environmental conditions.

C5: Apply quality criteria during phases of the process in order to achieve the required characteristics.

CE5.1 In a practical scenario of quality control in the application of products for decorative works, based on a given condition:

-Check the results obtained with the specifications, previous parts or patterns and in your case correct the deviations.

-Identify the defects produced in the parts during the finishing process, in order to correct the causes that originate them.

-Separate parts that have a finish that meets the required quality conditions.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 with respect to CE2.3; C3 with respect to CE3.2; full C4; C5 complete.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the correct production rules.

Prove a good professional.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Contents:

1. Manual finishing application techniques

Procedures and operations in manual application.

pistols. Types.

Preparation. Operations.

Other useful manual application: brush, roll.

Application of dyes, decorative and special finishes.

2. Industrial application techniques of finishing

Application techniques: phases.

Machines and application equipment: features, application, regulation, operations.

Environmental conditions required for application according to the technique used.

Complementary facilities and equipment for the application: curtains, cabins, ventilation, compressed air.

Operation and regulation.

Handling and transporting parts during application: systems, media, precautions.

Organizational techniques of the work itself, relating to the application of products for the finish.

Sequencing the different operations involved.

3. Methods of drying/curing the coatings

Drying procedure: no chemical reaction, by chemical reaction.

Drying parameters: air temperature, time, speed, and humidity.

Equipment and drying facilities: By convection, by radiation.

4. Quality control of the finish

Defects in the finish: of the product to be applied, during application, drying.

Correcting defects.

Control application operations.

The state of the surfaces and the product to be applied.

Application conditions.

Post-application control.

Verification of features.

5. Rules applicable to the dyeing and special finishes

Characteristic risks of the facilities and processes of finishes.

Fire. Explosion. Toxicity.

Precautions to be taken during the handling and application of the components and products of the finish.

Security items.

Personal. Machines. Installations.

Normalized symbology.

Treatments and disposal of waste generated by the finish.

Removal of sanding powder.

Waste of application cabins.

Remains of non-employee products.

Packaging.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the performance of the tinting, special and decorative finishes, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX IV

PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: WOOD SAWING

Professional Family: Wood, Furniture and Corcho

Level: 2

Code: MAM061_2

General competition:

Receiving roll wood and cutting wood, using tools, equipment and specific machines for sorting, decutting, tronting and sawing, in accordance with established procedures, with quality required, in conditions of safety, occupational health and environmental protection.

Competition Units:

UC0169_2: Make the receipt, classification and preparation of the roll wood

UC0170_2: Perform the cutting of the roll wood and sort the sawn wood

Professional Environment:

Professional Scope:

Develops its professional activity in the production department in connection with the maintenance in the area of industries of first transformations of wood, dedicated to sawing of the wood in roll, in entities of private nature, small and medium-sized enterprises, normally for hire or reward, both self-employed and self-employed. It develops its activity, depending on its case, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. You may have staff in your position at times, for seasons or in a stable way. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors:

It is located in the wood sawing production sector.

Relevant Occupations and Jobs:

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Wood sawers

Roll Wood Manipulators

Wood Tronzer Machines Operators

Wood-cutting machine operators

Serries operators, in general

Associated Training (390 hours)

Training Modules

MF0169_2: Receiving, sorting, and preparing the wood (150 hours)

MF0170_2: Aserrading and sorting the wood (240 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: CONDUCT THE RECEPTION, CLASSIFICATION AND PREPARATION OF THE ROLL

-WOOD

Level: 2

Code: UC0169_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Control the inputs and outputs of wood in the wood park, identifying those that present deviations to determine the quantity and quality of the various product lots, complying with the applicable regulations in prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 1.1 The roll wood is discharged without causing damage to the material and to the machinery set up for this purpose.

CR 1.2 The wood that is received in the wood park is checked for possible anomalies, contrasting with the input documentation, product input statistics, albarans, among others, separating the pieces that present some deviation, and report on possible defects in the quality of the roll-wood trots, such as 'non-compliant'.

CR 1.3 The characteristics of the material (types of wood, provenance, quality) are recorded in the existing documents for this purpose, archiving the information on supports and file systems established in the company.

CR 1.4 Wood inputs and outputs are made, complying with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

RP 2: Store the wood in roll, classifying them for stacking in homogeneous lots, taking into account physical characteristics and distributing them according to the established production plan, complying with the applicable regulations in the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 2.1 The roll wood is classified according to the company's work plans, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, considering the local, national or

CR 2.2 Wood stumps are stacked in homogeneous batches, using the trotous handling equipment, (measuring tools, graduated rules, ribbons, forciplies, scales, among others), according to the previous classification. set, based on parameters of: diameters, curvatures, presence of defects, among others.

CR 2.3 The lots stacked in the wooden park are distributed, using the handling equipment, ensuring their integrity and facilitating their identification and handling, according to classification criteria.

CR 2.4 Lots stacked in the roll wood park are protected with established means (waterings, shading, among others), using the protective gear, controlling the variables (temperature, humidity, etc.). relative, light and aeration), in accordance with conservation requirements and controlling storage time, according to the type of each commodity.

RP 3: Prepare the work area of wood cutting and throning, according to the established production plan, to ensure hygiene and safety, according to the production requirements.

CR 3.1 The productive process of decutting and tronking of the roll wood is planned in compliance with the production information sheet.

CR 3.2 The tools, tools, roll wood materials and the machines used in the cutting and cutting (decutting, tronder, chainsaw) are selected according to the process provided in the technical production.

CR 3.3 The work area is conditioned according to the procedures required in the technical tab of the uncut and ground of the wood, complying with the applicable standards.

RP 4: Prepare the wood-cutting and tronked machines, according to the production plan established to achieve the operation of the wood.

CR 4.1 Uncut and Tronked machines (descortezadora, tronder, chainsaw) are prepared, complying with the established production schedule (reglages, cleaning and tuning), complying with the applicable rules of prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 4.2 Uncut and tronked machines (decortezator, tronder, chainsaw), are regulated by adjusting the different parameters (sharpening, pressure of blades and speed of feeding), taking into account the technical information production.

CR 4.3 The parameters of the machines are readjusted, according to the results of the operations of the processes of decutting and throning of the wood, using the tools, tools and apparatus of measurement, in function of the operations intended and permitted tolerances.

CR 4.4 The operations for the preparation of wood cutting and cutting machines are carried out in compliance with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment. Environmental.

RP 5: Carry out the uncortezado and tronked operations of the roll wood according to the established production plan, eliminating the waste for obtaining sawing traces, complying with the applicable regulations.

CR 5.1 The uncortezado and tronked operations of the roll wood are carried out with the established equipment (descortezadora, tronder and chainsaws), according to the production plan and complying with the applicable regulations.

CR 5.2 The roll wood is subjected to the decutting and throning once, eliminated the defects in form and released the material of inlays (stones, metals), in order to avoid breakdowns in the machines, complying with the regulations applicable.

CR 5.3 Uncut and Tronked machines are continuously fed to avoid discontinuity in the flow of trotae, according to specifications of the technical tab.

Professional context:

Production media:

Transports for roll woods. Descortezadoras. Tronzadoras. Chainsaws. Measurement tools (graduated rules, tapes, forcidomes, scales, automatic cubicators).

Products and results:

Control of entrances and exits of wooden roll in the wooden park. Warehouse of wooden roars in roll. Area prepared for the work of decutting and tronking of wood. Machines prepared for the cutting and cutting of wood. Operations carried out from uncorked and tronked from the roll wood.

Information used or generated:

Production Orders. Product entry statistics, technical manuals, product exit statistics for cutting, crushing and selling, albarans and staging. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Documentation for the control of the operation of the equipment. Technical sheets. Technical documentation for the preparation of machines in wood cutting. Orders for the preparation of machines in wood cutting.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: PERFORM ROLL WOOD CUTTING AND SORT SAWWOOD

Level: 2

Code: UC0170_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Prepare the wood cutting work area, according to the established production plan, to ensure safety, according to the production requirements, in compliance with the applicable regulations, occupational risks and the environment.

CR 1.1 The wood cutting procedures (sawing, defolding, canting, sorting) are planned, in line with the provisions of the technical production sheet.

CR 1.2 The tools, machines and equipment required for the cutting of wood (main saw, debender, canter, wood sorting tools), are selected, using the production sheets.

CR 1.3 The tools, machines, equipment (main saw, debender, canter, wood sorting tools) and materials (wood trotae), required for wood cutting are prepared, for use, by: parameter settings, placement of useful, according to the production techniques.

CR 1.4 The position of the job is conditioned, according to the production information sheet, in compliance with the applicable regulations.

RP 2: Perform the first level maintenance of machines and equipment used in wood cutting, in order to achieve the operation thereof, in compliance with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks and environment.

CR 2.1 The state of the equipment and machines used in the cutting of wood (main saw, debender, canter, retorders, splinters, rastrels, classification tools) is checked, verifying the state, so as the setting of parameters (speed, and others) of the same, according to technical documentation and company instructions.

CR 2.2 The machines are cleaned, maintaining the required levels in the maintenance plan.

CR 2.3 The first-level maintenance operations on the cutting equipment are carried out, following the planned plans and recording the required data, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational risks and environment.

CR 2.4 The operation of the safety systems of the cutting auxiliary machines and equipment is checked, keeping them under the prescribed conditions.

CR 2.5 The elements specified as first level, are reviewed to detect possible operating failures, warning, if any, to the specialized service, if it escapes beyond its reach, following the plan of maintenance of the company.

CR 2.6 The parts or elements specified as first-level damaged or defective in the equipment and machines (main saw, debender, canter, retorders, splinters, rastrels, classification tools), replace them under the conditions set out.

CR 2.7 The report of detected anomalies that exceed their level of competence is transmitted to the responsible personnel.

RP 3: Aserrar trozas, with the main saws, following the production plan to obtain the cutting of the wood in roll, complying with the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational risks and environment.

CR 3.1 Wood stumps are enclosed, applying in the program, the technical specifications of the work order, adjusting required parameters of the main saws (cutting speed), depending on the characteristics of the material, complying with applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CR 3.2 The cutting is controlled, according to criteria of use, according to the characteristics of the material.

CR 3.3 The positioning and turning of the parts is performed according to the cutting program, adapting the production to the work plan.

CR 3.4 The sawing operations are performed, regulating the cutting speed in the saw, until obtaining the required one, taking into account the production of the cutting equipment.

CR 3.5 The flow of the material is maintained according to the various subsequent processes (defolding, rechallenging, canting, splicing).

CR 3.6 The sawing process is controlled, applying the quality system established by the required characteristics, sampling, sampling periodicity, and others.

RP 4: Perform unbending, singing and retelling operations of pieces from the trotae obtained with main saws to obtain the cutting of the wood in roll with the squats and lengths, according to the plan of production, complying with the applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CR 4.1 The wood is sung, regulating parameters in the canter (cutting speed, among others), according to the production plan.

CR 4.2 The wood is unfolded, regulating parameters in the debender, (cutting speed, among others) and controlling the flow of materials in the work chain, avoiding jams, and taking advantage of the material in each machine, the production plan, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 4.3 The wood retelling is controlled, regulating the flow of materials in the restate to the work chain, avoiding jams, taking advantage of the material in each machine, according to the production plan, obtaining a The use of the material is maximum in each machine according to the production plan, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CR 4.4 The flow of materials is controlled in the chain of work, avoiding jams and transporting the waste for its splinter and/or collection of by-products.

CR 4.5 Unfolding, canting and retailing are executed, respecting safety, occupational health and environmental standards, as well as using the necessary personal protective equipment.

RP 5: Classify wet and dry wood, following the rules used in the company, control the moisture of the classified lots to keep the wood piles classified until after sale or treatment, complying with the applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 5.1 The classification, grouping and rastling of wood is carried out by species, size and characteristics, in batteries for air circulation and for the transport of wet wood.

CR 5.2 The grouping, marking and packaging of parts is carried out, taking into account technical characteristics and are issued in the case of dry and treated wood.

CR 5.3 The placement of the wood stacks is carried out with the security fixings and are located for subsequent treatments or expedition.

CR 5.4 The classification of schools is carried out in compliance with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

Professional context:

Production media:

Major Sierras, debender, canter, retorders, splinters, rastrels, sorting tools, dryers. Assertions of sawing, sawing and classified wood, by-products (coastal, tips, chips, sawdust, sawdust), for the crushing industry, for cogeneration and others.

Products and results:

Preparing the wood cutting work area. First level maintenance carried out on machinery and equipment used in wood cutting. Tatters sawn with the main saws. Operations made of defolding, canting, parts and splinter. Wet and dry wood, classified.

Information used or generated:

Production orders, technical manuals, classification manuals, product exit statistics for treatment, drying and sales. Trozas, sawing with the main saws. Trozas, with the main saws, executed. Wet and dry wood, classified. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

TRAINING MODULE 1: RECEPTION, CLASSIFICATION AND PREPARATION OF WOOD

Level: 2

Code: MF0169_2

Associate to UC: Perform the reception, classification, and preparation of the roll wood

Duration: 150 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Describe the processes of wood preparation in the park, taking care of the production process.

CE1.1 Relate the various phases of the process of receiving, classifying, and preparing the roll wood.

CE1.2 Describe the spaces necessary for the storage and handling of the rolls.

CE1.3 Relate the machines, tools, and instruments needed to prepare and classify the roll (rules, forcidomes, hygrometers, scales).

CE1.4 Relating machines, tools, and tools: uncorked and tronked (types, features and applications, measuring and control devices).

CE1.5 Recognize the risks involved in handling and storing the material.

C2: Explain the location of the wooden roll in the wooden park, catering to criteria of species, cubicage and quality.

CE2.1 Describe the equipment for downloading and transporting the materials, relating them to their applications.

CE2.2 Identify the basic documents used in the control of roll-wood entries, associating them with their purpose.

CE2.3 Recognizes the risks of materials, products and waste, their toxicity, degree of comerability and flammability, regulatory regulations, and related to different prevention and extinction systems.

C3: Apply the process of preparing the machines for the cutting and throning of the roll wood, according to a production schedule.

CE3.1 Describe the technical equipment for the preparation of the cutting and cutting machines (types and characteristics, applications, preparation of machines and equipment, arrangement of operating elements, changes and replacements, readjustment of parameters, tolerances, tuning, testing, and tuning of operational elements.)

CE3.2 Identify the most common abnormalities and symptoms in the uncorked and tronked pieces of the roll wood.

CE3.3 Describe the cleaning operations of equipment, transport systems, and periodic replacement of items.

C4: Classify roll wood, taking into account applicable regulations.

CE4.1 Describe the criteria that are involved in the classification of the traces (species, origin, length, diameters, defects).

CE4.2 Describe existing risks in the classification activities of roll wood. Systems for the prevention and extinction of fires. Risks of materials, products and waste. Toxicity. Degree of flammability and flammability.

CE4.3 In a practical scenario of roll-wood classification, given the given conditions:

-Prepare the equipment according to the production schedule, calibrating and verifying the operation of the production equipment and transport systems.

-Cubing wood in roll, determining its weight by scales, and its volume measuring its dimensions with rules and forcipolas, using cubication tables.

-Classify the stumps according to the established rules.

-Arpilar dies without causing damage to the movement equipment (forklifts, cranes), according to the established rules.

-Distribute rolls in the park depending on the species, origin, size, quality, moisture content, color, vetoing, and protect from possible deformations and atmospheric agents, maintaining the traceability of the material.

C5: Prepare roll wood, considering the production process for the assertiveness.

CE5.1 Describe the equipment that is used for the detection and removal of metal inlays and their corresponding maintenance operations.

CE5.2 Describe the risks in the uncortezado and tronked activities of the roll wood by specifying the means of prevention to be taken into account according to the applicable regulations.

CE5.3 In a practical scenario of preparing a roll wood, under established conditions:

-Apply the descortezado process indicating its purpose and specifying the most suitable equipment for each type of wood depending on its characteristics (diameter, hardness).

-Apply the tronked process indicating its purpose and specifying the required equipment for each roll of wood, depending on its characteristics (diameter, length, hardness).

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C4 with respect to CE4.3; C5 with respect to CE5.3.

Other capabilities:

Comply with the production rules set by the organization.

Maintain the work area with the degree of order and cleanliness required by the organization.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Adapt to the organization, its organizational and technological changes, as well as new situations or contexts.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Collection of wood materials and products in the stacking yard

Characterization of the roll wood. Recognition of species. Recognition and assessment of defects and alterations.

Receiving in store. Procedures. Functions.

Merchandise marking received.

Receipt compliance. Cases of non-compliance and actions.

Classification of materials and products at reception. Criteria (quality of wood, hazard of products, destination, size).

Coding and marking of the materials and products received. Systems.

Transport systems and handling of roll-wood trotches.

Stacked wood on roll.

Applicable regulations in the wooden park.

More frequent risks in operations.

Protective measures: of equipment, personal.

Risks to people. Product toxicity according to applicable regulations.

Applicable Safety and Health Care Regulations.

2. Decortezado, wood tronked, work area preparation and machines

Removal of metal particles. Purpose and techniques.

Uncut from wood. Techniques. Descortezators: types, description, operation and maintenance.

Chipped, vitriated, and defibrated. Features of the splinters, shavings. Teams.

Tronzators: types, description, operation, and maintenance.

Equipment and auxiliary media. Storage silos.

Transport systems: types. Features. Function in the sawmills.

Preparing machines and equipment. Arrangement of operational elements. Changes and substitutions. Parameter Readjustment. Permitted tolerances. Tuning, testing, and tuning of operational elements.

Process of preparing the production equipment of the cutting and cutting machines. Interpretation of equipment usage manuals.

Failures and their most common symptoms while using equipment.

Calibrating the process receive parameter control equipment. Verification of the operation of production equipment and transport systems.

Selection of production equipment.

Preparation of production equipment according to the production schedule. Operation, use, handling and regulation of machines and tools.

Cleaning equipment and transportation systems. Periodic replacement of items.

Basic maintenance of load, unload, and internal transport equipment.

3. Storage of wood

Spaces and locales for storage.

Handling and internal transportation of materials and products. Systems and equipment. Applicable rules.

Organization of the warehouse. Distribution and location. Stacked.

Storage costs.

Damage and defects in materials and products derived from storage. Causes. Consequences. Corrections.

Techniques and coding means used in the storage of wood.

Transfer procedures and equipment in the storage of wood.

Move Equipment Types: forklifts, elevators.

Wood loading and unloading methods.

Internal itineraries in storage.

Systems of transport and internal handling of wooden shreds.

Location of the stored pieces of wood. Placement methods, space limitations, incompatibilities. Optimal utilization of the spaces in the warehouse.

Signaling of stored wood trots.

General product conservation conditions: store parameter control: temperature, humidity.

Storage documentation. Internal documentation. Input and output records. Receipt tokens.

Claim and Return documentation. Orders for departure and dispatch. Albaranes.

Inventories. Types and purpose of each of them.

Store management: internal documentation for the warehouse.

Stock control, security stocks, minimum storage, rotations.

Computer applications to warehouse control. Database handling. High, low, and modifications to product, supplier and customer files. Spreadsheet handling. File and print of the warehouse control documents.

4. Documentation and management of wood cutting and cutting

Documentation. Types. Interpretation. Applications.

Roll-wood cubication. Techniques, equipment (scales, forcidomes, tape metrics).

Fulfillment and completed administrative procedures. Applications.

File techniques of the documentation concerning raw material and the means of transport. Database handling. Spreadsheet handling.

Target of the warehouse documents.

5. Quality control of waste products and treatment

Defects of the roll wood. Classification.

The quality of the assertiveness. Impact.

Features and parameters to control.

Trunk defects. Causes.

Control operations. Measurements.

Quality standards for wood preparation.

Control of the final product. Parameters to be controlled. Procedures and means.

Waste generated in the sawmills.

Fetch, transport and storage of waste at the factory.

Systems and media.

Treatment, use and discharge of waste.

Methods and means used. Applicable rules.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the reception, classification and preparation of the roll wood, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of three years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: SAWING AND SORTING OF WOOD

Level: 2

Code: MF0170_2

Associate to UC: Perform the cutting of roll wood and sort sawwood

Duration: 240 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Describe the sawing and resawing processes of the roll wood, relating to the use thereof.

CE1.1 Relate the different phases involved in sawing and resawing processes.

CE1.2 Recognize the properties of the wooden rolls according to their exterior characteristics.

CE1.3 Relate the machines, tools, and auxiliary media that make up a sawing line.

CE1.4 Describe the risks inherent in the manipulation of the rolls.

CE1.5 Relate the various sawing processes with the use of wood, depending on the performance of the wood.

C2: Prepare the work area for rolling wood sawing, performing the first-level maintenance operations of the machines and equipment used in wood cutting.

CE2.1 Describe the process of conditioning of the job, according to the procedures required in the technical information sheet for the cutting of the wood, according to the requirements laid down by the instructions and the applicable rules.

CE2.2 In a scenario of preparing the sawing work area, under established conditions:

-Check the operation of the equipment and machines used in the cutting of wood (main sierra, debender, canter, retorders, splinters, rastrels, classification tools), as well as the adjustment of the parameters (speed), following the technical documentation and instructions.

-Perform the cleaning of the machines and the first level maintenance of the cutting equipment, following the planned plans and recording the required data.

-Detect possible worn or damaged items, replacing broken or defective parts or elements in equipment and machines used in wood cutting.

C3: Aserrar dies in the head saw, preparing the machines.

CE3.1 Explain the review, entry to point, and basic maintenance of the main saws.

CE3.2 Describe the means that are used for the transport of parts from sawing.

CE3.3 Describe existing risks in roll wood sawing activities (specifying means of prevention) taking into account safety and occupational health standards.

CE3.4 In a scenario of sawing, based on established conditions:

-Select the park pieces and develop a cutting plan based on the characteristics of the part and the manufacturing program.

-Aserrar wood logs, obtaining the maximum performance of sawn wood, selecting the saw, positioning the troza to perform the chosen cutting and adjusting the corresponding cutting parameters.

C4: Perform unbending, chanting, reorder of saw parts, and splinter of by-products, selecting the equipment for that purpose.

CE4.1 Describe the various cutting times, indicating the types of machines required to perform them, and the products and by-products that are obtained.

CE4.2 Specify possible resulting products, options, and machining phases.

CE4.3 In a practical scenario in which you are part of a roll of certain characteristics (kind of wood, dimension, structural characteristics:

-Select the cutting parameters (speed of the saw and power, angle of attack, type of tooth) of the machines used according to the characteristics and properties of the wood.

-Select the cutting tools that meet the conditions of sharpening and conservation status, and place them on the machines by means of the necessary tools and equipment applying the safety and health standards.

-Operate with machines and equipment with dexterity, obtaining parts with the characteristics and quality required in compliance with safety and health standards.

C5: Classify pieces of wood according to their use, applying applicable regulations.

CE5.1 Recognize the criteria of classification, grouping, rastling and tying of sawn wood for further stacking.

CE5.2 Describe existing risks in sawwood sorting activities, specifying the means of prevention to be taken into account in accordance with applicable regulations.

CE5.3 In a practical scenario of classification of wooden pieces, based on a given condition:

-Indicate equipment and means used for the transport and movement of sawwood, describing its operation and maintenance.

-Perform the operations of: marking, stacking and packaging of the wood, using the required means, depending on the place of destination and client.

-Appillar pieces of sawn wood, taking into account the species, thickness, quality and the destination (outdoor drying, treatments, expedition).

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 with respect to CE2.2; C3 with respect to CE3.4; C4 with respect to CE4.3; C5 with respect to CE5.3.

Other capabilities:

Comply with the production rules set by the organization.

Maintain the work area with the degree of order and cleanliness required by the organization.

Recognize the organization's productive process.

Adapt to the organization, its organizational and technological changes, as well as new situations or contexts.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Sawing of wood

sawmills. Features. Installations.

Cut by sawing technology. Characteristics of the cutting tools. The tooth. Speeds. Efforts. Performance. Orientation of the material for sawing. Characteristics of the cut surfaces.

Useful and machinery for wood cutting and sawing.

Assessment parameters of the state of the main saw (sharpening and wear of the cutting teeth, cracking, twisting, among others). Defects produced in wood cutting.

Adjustment parameters in the placement of the main saw cutting elements (tensioning, alignment of the flyers, among others).

Adjustment parameters for sawing processing (tensioning, cutting speed, cut element type, among others) based on the criteria set.

Types of species according to the characteristics of the dies and the product. Types of pieces obtained.

Equipment and auxiliary facilities. Operation. Preparation and regulation. Applications.

sawing operations. Sequences. Power. Checks.

Technical documentation applicable to the sawing process. Technical production sheets. Work order. Operational and travel process diagrams.

Operating process of sawing, job stream. Types, features, capabilities, and applications. Elements of movement and transport of material. Obtaining by-products, coastal, tips, chips, chip, sawdust.

Most common risks in sawing operations. Protective measures: of equipment, personal. Risks to people. Toxicity of the products.

Applicable regulations.

2. Operations after sawing (sung, unfolded, and reworked), controlling the flow of materials based on the production plan

Wood's Chanting. Operation of the quarry. Features. Types of pieces obtained. Tuning parameters in the canting operations. Flowchart in the canting operations. Automatic singing equipment. Singing placers. Composition, operation and handling of machines.

Unfolded from the wood. Defolding operation. Features. Types of pieces obtained. Tuning parameters in the defolding operations. Flowchart in the defolding operations. Defolding equipment. Debending machines. Composition, operation and handling of machines.

Retain the wood. RetStatus operation. Features. Types of pieces obtained. Tuning parameters in the restate operations. Flowchart in the restate operations. Defolding equipment. Retesters. Composition, operation and handling of machines.

Most common risks in operations after sawing. Protective measures: of equipment, personal. Risks to people. Toxicity of the products.

Conditioning the sawing job. Features.

Applicable regulations.

3. Simple maintenance of sawing machines and tools

Technical documentation of the maintenance of the machines and equipment required in the cutting of the wood. Technical data sheets for machine preparation. Manuals for the operation and maintenance of machines and equipment. Company maintenance manual. History of the state of the machines and tools. Report on the preservation and maintenance of machines. Review or maintenance needs reports.

Top-level maintenance. Preventive and corrective maintenance. Applicable procedures and techniques. Assembly and disassembly operations. Lubrication and cleaning; regulation, adjustment and programming. First-level preparation and maintenance operations. Cleaning and greasing of wood cutting equipment. Team-up.

Maintenance instructions. Interpretation.

Aspects and elements of machines that require maintenance.

Maintenance of the cutting tools. Sharp. Features.

Equipment, machines, tools and accessories for the maintenance of machines and equipment required in the sawing of wood. Types and characteristics. Applications. Tools and tools of conservation and maintenance. Equipment for use in assembly and disassembly. Measurement and parameter control equipment.

Record maintenance and change of saw.

4. Control of the moisture from sawwood for dispatch

Applicable technical documentation. Work order. Order Order. Orders for departure and dispatch. Albaranes. Internal procedures. Spanish classification regulations. Internal classification procedures and rules.

Classification of wood. Classification types, methods. Types of identification of commercial wood species. Singularities and defects of wood. Measurement of singularities and defects of wood.

Oreado of the wood. Features. Conditions for the oreo of the wood. Stacking systems for the oreo of wood.

Straster techniques and battery formation.

Methods of battery protection. Characteristics of the material that influence the duration and the process of the process. Measuring the final humidity.

Material handling and transport operations.

Means of handling and transport of wood batteries and packages. Operation and handling of equipment. Basic maintenance of handling and transport equipment.

Distribution and orientation of stacks in the stacking yard.

Grouping, marking, and packaging operations.

Marking and packaging of batteries. Storage of the packages ready for dispatch. Distribution of the batteries for further treatment.

5. Dispatch of materials and products

Expedition in sawmills. Function. Procedures.

Organization of the expedition. Sequencing. Timing.

Sorting and coding of materials and products on dispatch.

Marked. Labelling. Types.

6. Quality control of sawwood

The quality of the wood sawn. Impact.

Features and parameters to control. Sawing defects. Causes.

Control operations. Measurements.

Applicable standards for decorative and structural wood quality.

Control of the final product. Parameters to be controlled. Procedures and means.

7. Waste treatment

Types of waste. Tips, chips, sawdust.

Waste generated in the sawmills.

Fetch, transport and storage of waste in the factory. Systems and media.

Treatment, use and discharge of waste.

Methods and means used. Regulations.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the performance of the cutting of wood on roll and the classification of sawn wood, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of three years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX V

PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: MOUNTING FURNITURE AND CARPENTRY ELEMENTS

Professional Family: Wood, Furniture and Corcho

Level: 2

Code: MAM062_2

General competition:

Assemble furniture and carpentry elements, using tools, equipment and machines specific to the performance of the preparation of components and accessories, for assembly and fixing, as well as for the final assembly, adjustment and packaging of products, in accordance with established procedures, with the required quality, in conditions of safety, occupational health and environmental protection.

Competition Units:

UC0171_2: Control and organize carpentry and furniture components and accessories

UC0172_2: Mounting furniture and carpentry items

UC0173_1: Adjust and pack carpentry and furniture products and items

Professional Environment:

Professional Scope:

Develops its professional activity in the department of production in wood, furniture and cork, in the area of carpentry and furniture, dedicated to the manufacture of furniture and elements of carpentry, in entities of nature private, in large, medium and small enterprises, as an employed or self-employed person. It develops its activity, depending on its case, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. You may have staff in your position at times, for seasons or in a stable way. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors:

It is located in the productive sector of wood and furniture, in the manufacture of furniture manufacturing of carpentry elements and, occasionally, in the subsector of the installation of furniture and elements of joinery.

Relevant Occupations and Jobs:

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Bank-ship-owners

Carpentry element assemblers-assemblers

Wood and/or ebanisteria products, in general

Carpenters in general

Associated Training (480 hours)

Training Modules

MF0171_2: Receive control, components, and accessories (120 hours)

MF0172_2: Furniture and carpentry elements (270 hours)

MF0173_1: Tuning and wrapping furniture and carpentry items (90 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: CONTROL AND ORGANIZE CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

Level: 2

Code: UC0171_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Organize the work area of reception and storage of carpentry and furniture components and accessories, preparing the required tools and conditioning the work area, to start the assembly process, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational, environmental and quality risks.

CR 1.1 The information required about the products, the planning of the procedures in the reception of the components and accessories of carpentry and furniture, is obtained from the technical sheets of production.

CR 1.2 Tools, machines, and equipment used in the reception of carpentry and furniture components and accessories (elements of movement and transport of material, shelves, pallets among others), are selected from of the production data sheets.

CR 1.3 The tools, machines, and equipment required in the reception of the carpentry and furniture components and accessories, (elements of movement and transport of material, shelves, pallets among others), are prepared, regulated the operator elements of the same, where applicable, for the execution of the operations for the reception and storage of carpentry elements.

CR 1.4 The job of receiving the components and accessories of carpentry and furniture, is conditioned according to the production sheet of production, in a way that the sanitary and sanitary conditions of the installations and the machinery are maintained, as set out in the working instructions and regulations in force.

RP 2: Perform first-level maintenance operations, machines and equipment used in the reception and storage of carpentry and furniture components and accessories, to avoid interruptions to the activity, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational, environmental and quality risks.

CR 2.1 The operation of the equipment and auxiliary means required in the reception and storage of carpentry and furniture components and accessories is checked, following the guidelines set out in the instructions maintenance of equipment.

CR 2.2 Possible operating anomalies in equipment used in the reception and storage of carpentry and furniture components and accessories (forklift, pallet truck, manual trolleys, etc.) detect, acting according to equipment maintenance instructions.

CR 2.3 Possible simple anomalies detected affecting the operation of equipment used in the reception and storage of carpentry and furniture components and accessories are corrected, following instructions from maintenance.

CR 2.4 Parts specified as first level are replaced in the equipment used in the reception and storage of carpentry and furniture components and accessories (forklift, pallet truck, manual trolleys, etc.). among others), according to the applicable maintenance plan.

CR 2.5 The documentation related to the maintenance carried out is completed according to the production process.

RP 3: Make the collection of carpentry and furniture components and accessories, controlling their quality and correspondence with the requested, through the documentation of reception to start the process of mounting furniture, complying with the applicable rules on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 3.1 The carpentry and furniture components and accessories are received and located in order to make the reception.

CR 3.2 The receiving instructions and control elements are selected and prepared according to the components to be inspected.

CR 3.3 The received elements are controlled, based on the technical specifications, and those that do not conform are identified and separated.

CR 3.4 The control records are completed on the basis of the results of the inspection, and are given to the person responsible for taking the corrective actions as appropriate.

RP 4: Store the carpentry and furniture components and accessories, classifying them for availability and are easily identified.

CR 4.1 The accepted elements at reception are identified and stored in an orderly and accessible manner.

CR 4.2 The data relating to the components and accessories received are reflected in the relevant stock control documents, so that the existing stock and its state of use can be known.

CR 4.3 Available stocks are controlled and replenished, following established communication circuits, and the minimum and maximum levels are maintained, preventing assembly units from being without components or accessories.

RP 5: Move carpentry and furniture components and accessories to the assembly section for assembly, complying with applicable rules.

CR 5.1 The carpentry and furniture components and accessories are transported with the available means to the mounting units, in the amount specified in the assembly order or any other document indicative of the needs of the assembly. material.

CR 5.2 The detected incidents are reported in the relevant product control documents in progress, considering the state of use of the components and the matching of available and necessary quantities.

CR 5.3 The means of transport used are maintained as indicated in the maintenance instructions, so that they are in perfect state of use and operation.

Professional context:

Production media:

Elements of movement and transport of material (forklift, pallet truck, manual carts). Shelves, pallets and other storage supports. Computer equipment. Bar code readers. Printer. Flexometer. Squad. Caliber. Radio frequency equipment. TAGS and identification elements.

Products and results:

Organization of the receiving and storage work area. First-level maintenance operations, machines and equipment. Classification and storage of carpentry and furniture components and accessories. Transport of carpentry and furniture components and accessories to the assembly area.

Information used or generated:

Receive Control Reports. Identifying tags. Reports of non-compliance. Warehouse movement reports. Inventory update reports. Regulations on the prevention of occupational, environmental and quality risks, applicable. Technical production sheets. Mounting orders. Manuals for the use and maintenance of machinery and equipment.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: MOUNT FURNITURE AND CARPENTRY ITEMS

Level: 2

Code: UC0172_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Organize the furniture assembly and carpentry elements, preparing the required tools and conditioning the work area, to carry out the assembly process, complying with the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 1.1 The information required about the products, the planning of the procedures for assembling furniture and carpentry elements is obtained from the production sheets.

CR 1.2 The tools, machines, and equipment to be used, in the reception of the components and accessories of carpentry and furniture (useful of sizing, press of type assembly: pneumatic, hydraulic or manual, bench of assembly, among others), they are selected from the production technical sheets.

CR 1.3 The tools, machines and equipment required in the assembly of furniture and carpentry elements (pneumatic, hydraulic or manual, bench, among others), are prepared, regulating the elements operators of the same, preparing to regulate the required parameters.

CR 1.4 The position of assembly of furniture and elements of carpentry and furniture, is conditioned according to the production sheet of production, so that the hygienic and sanitary conditions of the installations and the machinery maintain, as set out in the working instructions and regulations in force.

CR 1.5 The components that form the subset to be mounted and the fixing elements, such as: cookies, slats, staples, screws, nails, and adhesive, among others, are selected and prepared according to the mounting orders.

RP 2: Perform first-level maintenance operations, machines and equipment used in the assembly of furniture and carpentry elements, to avoid interruptions of the activity, complying with the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 2.1 The operation of the equipment and auxiliary means required in the assembly of furniture and carpentry elements is checked, following the guidelines set out in the equipment maintenance instructions.

CR 2.2 Possible operating anomalies in equipment used in the assembly of furniture and carpentry elements, such as: gluing tools, type-assembly press: pneumatic, hydraulic or manual, arm bench, Among others, they are detected, acting according to equipment maintenance instructions.

CR 2.3 Possible simple anomalies detected affecting the operation of equipment in the assembly of furniture and carpentry elements are corrected, following maintenance instructions, complying with applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 2.4 Pre-assembly equipment used in the assembly of furniture and carpentry elements is maintained according to instructions for maintenance instructions, so that they are in a state of use and operation.

CR 2.5 The hardware insertion equipment used is maintained, as instructed by the maintenance instructions, to be kept in use and operation.

CR 2.6 The mounting equipment used is maintained as an indication of the maintenance instructions, so that they are in perfect state of use and operation.

CR 2.7 Parts specified as first level are replaced in the equipment used in the assembly of furniture and carpentry elements, such as: gluing tools, type-assembly press: pneumatic, hydraulic or manual, bench, among others, according to the applicable maintenance plan.

CR 2.8 The documentation related to the maintenance carried out is completed according to the production process.

RP 3: Perform the pre-assembly of parts that make up carpentry elements, using fixing materials for assembly according to the assembly orders, not being the final element, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 3.1 The parts pre-assembly adhesive is prepared, following the manufacturer's instructions, in compliance with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CR 3.2 Type-pressing equipment: pneumatic or hydraulic, inter alia, used in the pre-assembly are adjusted according to the pressure and pressing time specifications, depending on the type of adhesive and environmental factors (temperature and humidity).

CR 3.3 The holes and joints of the parts that require adhesive, are applied, using the elements of application, such as: pistol, brush, dispenser, among others, so that the quantity of the same, reach all the surfaces to be joined and avoided, using individual protective equipment according to current regulations.

CR 3.4 The different cast pieces that make up the subassemblies are assembled, following the directions of the descriptive plans or documents, respecting their position.

CR 3.5 The assembled parts are pressed in the pre-assembly presses or arm banks, checking that the adhesive is slightly reloaded into the union, cleaning the excess thereof, verifying the dimensions, squats and holgures, in function of the specifications of the technical documentation, and recording the non-conformities, using the personal protective equipment according to the current regulations, complying with the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational risks and environmental.

CR 3.6 The elements that make up the subassemblies and which do not require adhesive are assembled by means of staples, screws or other attachment systems, specified in the technical drawings or documents, verifying the dimensions, and holguras according to the specifications of the technical documentation, recording the non-conformities, using the personal protective equipment according to the current regulations.

CR 3.7 The surface defects of the obtained subset are hidden, repairing by the application of color putty, making it not overflow and sanding with machine tool, portable or manually, until a smooth surface, using the individual protective equipment in accordance with the rules in force.

CR 3.8 The repaired surfaces are lijan with automated, portable, or manual machinery until a smooth surface is achieved.

RP 4: Placing fittings and other accessories by means of automatic machines or hand tools to complete the assembly of carpentry elements, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks and environmental.

CR 4.1 The parts, subsets, and fittings to be inserted are selected based on the process and technical documentation of the assembly.

CR 4.2 The heads of the hardware insertion machines (runners, hinges) are loaded with the specified hardware.

CR 4.3 The position of the heads and stops of the machines is adjusted according to the indications of plans or technical documents, feeding the machine with the elements to be processed, complying with the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 4.4 Manual-positioned hardware is inserted in the specified places, being fixed by the portable tools depending on the type of hardware.

RP 5: Perform the final assembly of components and subassemblies, using automatic machines or hand tools to form final carpentry and furniture elements, complying with applicable risk prevention regulations labor and environmental.

CR 5.1 The components and subassemblies to be mounted and the means of attachment, such as: biscuits, slats, staples, screws, nails, fittings and adhesive, among others, are selected and prepared according to the mounting orders, verifying the status, before use.

CR 5.2 The adhesive used for the final assembly of components and subassemblies is prepared, following the manufacturer's instructions, using the individual protective equipment according to the current regulations.

CR 5.3 The pneumatic or hydraulic mounting presses are adjusted according to the pressure and pressing time specifications, depending on the type of adhesive and environmental factors (temperature and humidity).

CR 5.4 The adhesive used in the holes and joints of the components and subassemblies that require it, is applied, using the application elements (pistol, brush, dispenser), so that the applied quantity reaches all surfaces to be joined together and to avoid overlying, using protective equipment, in compliance with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 5.5 The different cast subassemblies that make up the furniture or carpentry element are assembled, following the directions of the descriptive plans or documents, respecting their position.

CR 5.6 The assembled pieces are pressed in the assembly presses or the arm banks, it is checked that the adhesive is slightly reined in the union, the excess of the adhesive is cleaned and the dimensions of the product are verified with those specified in the technical documentation, complying with the applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CR 5.7 Subassemblies that do not require adhesive are assembled, by means of staples, screws or other binding systems specified in the technical drawings or documents, by verifying the dimensions, squats and holgures, depending on the specifications in technical documentation, recording non-conformities, using the individual protective equipment, complying with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CR 5.8 The surface defects of the product obtained are repaired, hiding by the application of color putty, making it unbroken, using individual protective equipment according to the current regulations.

CR 5.9 The repaired surfaces are lijan with a portable tool or manually until a smooth surface is achieved.

Professional context:

Production media:

Sizing tools (pistol, dosimers or brushes). Bank of arming. Assembly presses (pneumatic, hydraulic or manual). Pneumatic stapler. Pneumatic screwdriver. Manual drill. Manual belt sanding. Orbital lijadora. Sierra ingletadora. Manual milling machine. Manual brushing-scrubbing. Pin (manual or automatic). Electro-esmeril. Herrage inserter. Hammer. Tongs. Pliers. Screwdriver. Measuring equipment (flexometer, squad, gauge, level). Color putty and adhesives.

Products and results:

Organization of furniture assembly area and carpentry elements. First level maintenance, of the machines and equipment used in the furniture assembly. Parts that make up elements, as well as components and subsets are assembled.

Information used or generated:

Production and security tabs. Reports of non-compliance. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational, environmental and quality risks. Mounting orders. Manuals for the use and maintenance of machinery and equipment. Instructions and recommendations in materials (according to manufacturers).

COMPETITION UNIT 3: ADJUST AND PACK CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE PRODUCTS AND ELEMENTS

Level: 1

Code: UC0173_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Adjust parts, accessories, and mechanisms of carpentry and furniture for the composition of the product, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, following instructions.

CR 1.1 Product junctions are repassed and fitted with portable tools until they are scratched.

CR 1.2 Mobile elements are fitted with portable tools until they slide and/or fit gently, complying with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CR 1.3 The different components of the product are disassembled and, if required, their position is numbered so that the different parts can be reassembled in the required position.

CR 1.4 The adjustment equipment used is maintained according to maintenance instructions, keeping them in state of use and operation.

RP 2: Control the quality of the finished carpentry and furniture product, in accordance with established specifications, following instructions.

CR 2.1 Finished carpentry and furniture products are selected according to indications and located at the place of quality control.

CR 2.2 Controlled finished products that present non-conformities are identified and separated.

CR 2.3 Control records are completed at their level based on the results of the inspection.

CR 2.4 The completed control records are delivered to the controller to take corrective action as appropriate.

RP 3: Embaling finished products, for marketing purposes, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The parameters of the thermosettable plastic baler are adjusted according to the products to be packed, considering the parameters of: plastic roll size, mat speed and oven temperature, among others.

CR 3.2 The products to be packaged with termoretractile plastic are protected with the materials specified in the packaging instructions prior to their entry into the tunnel.

CR 3.3 The packaged parts are checked by checking that they are fully covered and with the protections set at the indicated location, and are set aside for reprocess in case they do not conform.

CR 3.4 Manual packaging or with machines that do not apply heat is performed with the packaging materials specified in the packaging instructions, and it is proven that the products are subject to and with the protection laid down in the packaging. indicated place, in compliance with the applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules.

CR 3.5 The packaged products are identified with the tags or other specified media.

CR 3.6 The packaging equipment used is maintained as instructed in the maintenance instructions, to be kept in perfect state of use and operation.

Professional context:

Production media:

Retractable Baler. Flejadora. Packer. Measuring instruments (flexometer, squad, gauge, level). Computer equipment. Bar code readers. Radio frequency equipment. Electronic tags or tags and identification elements.

Products and results:

Adjustments of components and accessories of carpentry and furniture. Quality control of the finished carpentry and furniture product. Packaging of finished wood and furniture products.

Information used or generated:

Package orders reviewed. Reports of non-compliance. Regulations on the prevention of occupational, environmental and quality risks, applicable. Manuals for the use and maintenance of machinery and packaging equipment.

TRAINING MODULE 1: RECEIVE CONTROL, COMPONENTS, AND ACCESSORIES

Level: 2

Code: MF0171_2

Associate with UC: Control and organize carpentry and furniture components and accessories

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Perform the operations of cleaning, preparation and maintenance of the first level of the machinery and equipment, used in the reception and storage of components and accessories of carpentry and furniture, complying with the regulations Applicable to the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CE1.1 Specify the operation, constitution and safety devices of machinery and equipment used in the reception and storage of carpentry and furniture components and accessories.

CE1.2 Refer to the anomalies or main operating problems more frequently, during the use of the machines by identifying the correction indicated in each case.

CE1.3 In a scenario of preparation and maintenance of equipment, used in the reception and storage of carpentry and furniture components and accessories, based on the following conditions:

-Identify the first-level maintenance operations of the teams and run them according to the appropriate instructions or manuals.

-Carry out the cleaning of machines, equipment and areas, achieving the levels required by the production, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

-Admit the processing equipment to the requirements of the process to be executed.

C2: Describe the operations required for the supply of carpentry and furniture items and accessories.

CE2.1 Recognize the process of supplying material to the mounting stage, indicating the documentation used and generated for the collection and control of these materials.

CE2.2 Recognize the main materials, hardware, and add-ons used in the assembly, grouping them by family-affinity.

CE2.3 List the most common supply problems for communication, information, and organization regarding the assembly of carpentry and furniture items.

C3: Transporting elements of carpentry and furniture, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational health and maintaining its characteristics for the assembly, complying with the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational risks and environmental.

CE3.1 Recognize the main risks arising from the handling of parts and accessories.

CE3.2 Recognize the major damage that can be caused by manipulation on parts and components.

CE3.3 In a practical transport case of a piece of furniture or carpentry, from a given condition:

-Select the means of transport for moving the components.

-Transport parts and components with the available means, complying with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention standards.

-Select the number of items and accessories to be transported based on the process sheet.

-Dispose the elements and accessories to perform the assembly as effectively as possible, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

C4: Organize the components and accessories used in the carpentry and furniture assembly.

CE4.1 In a practical scenario of mounting a piece of furniture or carpentry, from a given condition:

-Organize by types (components, hardware, accessories) and groups according to their characteristics and applications.

-Maintain the optimal level of mounting items, placing the order at the warehouse at the specified time and quality, according to conditions.

-Keep the control documentation sorted, allowing at any time to know the status of the supplies.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 with respect to CE1.3; C3 with respect to CE3.3; full C4.

Other capabilities:

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment.

Respect the channels set in the organization.

Take responsibility for the work that you develop.

Adapt to the organization, its organizational and technological changes, as well as new situations or contexts.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. First-level maintenance of equipment for the reception and storage of carpentry and furniture components and accessories

Technical documentation for the maintenance of equipment and machines.

Technical Tabs.

Maintenance types machines, utensils, and equipment.

Preventive and corrective maintenance.

Applicable procedures and techniques.

Mount and dismount operations.

Lubrication and cleaning; regulation, adjustment, and programming.

Start-up procedures.

Regulation of equipment for the reception and storage of carpentry and furniture components and accessories.

Equipment handling and stopping. Fundamentals and features.

Composition, regulation, management, influence on the characteristics of the final product.

2. Materials used in the furniture assembly

Types. Classification.

Materials used in the assembly of carpentry and furniture elements: types (seats, backs, lids, legs, gams, tapajuntas, doors, helmets, drawers, countertops, fittings, among others).

Technical characteristics of the material.

Manipulation. Risks.

3. Reception of materials and products of carpentry and furniture, storage of components and accessories, documentation used

Receipt compliance. Cases of non-compliance. Performances.

Classification of materials and products at reception. Criteria (target, size, dangerousness).

Coding and marking of the materials and products received. Systems.

Product Location: For its frequency of use. By weight. By volume.

Albarans, order sheets, among others.

Performances.

Elaboration of Receive Control Reports.

Store management.

Coding and marking of the materials and products received: working techniques, computer systems, bar readers and/or radio frequency equipment, program managers and databases.

Marking of carpentry and furniture goods: barcodes, electronic tags or tags and other identifiers.

Stock control.

Techniques and encoding media used in product storage.

Marking of carpentry and furniture goods.

Inventories. Types and purpose of each of them.

4. Methods for loading and unloading carpentry and furniture components and accessories at internal level

Types and applications. Features. Stacking and placing the loads.

Transport and internal handling systems.

Internal transport media.

Composition, operation, and handling of storage equipment.

Use of forklift truck.

Transpalette usage.

Using and handling manual carts, among others.

Itineraries to follow in internal transport.

5. Regulations applicable to the reception of carpentry and furniture components and accessories

Risk of materials and supplements. Toxicity.

Degree of flammability and flammability.

Physical hazards in the reception and handling of materials.

Prevention systems.

Extinction systems.

Most common risks in the reception and storage of materials.

Types of risks: safety, physical, chemical, ergonomic. Protection and prevention measures, individual and collective.

Workplace: security signs (typology).

Materials and Labelling: pictograms (degrees of futility in wood, thermofuses and others). Safety and hygiene tabs.

Machinery: safety devices; use and maintenance. Maintenance tabs.

Personal protective equipment (PPE ' s). Fire extinguishing measures.

Application of environmental standards (toxic, waste: transport, storage and recycling).

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the control and organisation of carpentry and furniture components and accessories, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: MOUNTING FURNITURE AND CARPENTRY ELEMENTS

Level: 2

Code: MF0172_2

Associate to UC: Mounting furniture and carpentry items

Duration: 270 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Apply first-level cleaning, preparation and maintenance techniques for machinery and equipment used in the assembly of furniture and furniture and furniture.

CE1.1 Recognize the operation, constitution and safety devices of machinery and equipment used in the reception and storage of carpentry and furniture components and accessories.

CE1.2 Identify the first-level maintenance operations of the teams and run them according to the appropriate instructions or manuals.

CE1.3 Explain the anomalies or main operating problems more frequently, during the use of the equipment used in the reception and storage of components and accessories of carpentry and furniture, identifying the correction indicated in each case.

CE1.4 In a practical case of cleaning and maintenance of equipment used in the assembly of furniture and elements of carpentry and furniture, from a given condition:

-Perform the cleaning of machines, equipment and areas, achieving the required levels in the assembly of furniture and elements of carpentry and furniture.

-Admit the processing equipment to the requirements of the process to be executed.

-Perform the basic maintenance operations of the wood movement and transport equipment.

C2: Describe the process of mounting furniture and carpentry elements.

CE2.1 List the processes involved in the preassembly (pin, pressing, assembly, sanding), indicating its purpose.

CE2.2 Describe the different subsets that can be mounted (drawers, doors, bodies, frames), specifying the mounting processes that have intervened and the components and accessories used for this.

CE2.3 Indicating the equipment used for the assembly of subassemblies (plug-pins, presses, arm banks, portable tools), describing their operation, as well as the operations they require for their maintenance and conservation.

CE2.4 List the main adhesives used in the assembly of furniture and carpentry elements, relating them to the application technology and indicating the main parameters of use and applications.

CE2.5 Recognize the definitive bonding systems between pieces of furniture and carpentry elements, by pin and stapling/bolting, indicating their main applications and technology.

CE2.6 The importance of the time spent between the application of the adhesive and its pressure submission, as well as the climatic conditions affecting the setting of the adhesive, in the assembly of parts.

C3: Interpret drawings and instructions for mounting carpentry and furniture, indicating tolerances and dimensions.

CE3.1 Determine what a mounting plane is, indicating its usefulness.

CE3.2 Detect the elements and components that make up a concrete element of carpentry or furniture and the order to follow in the assembly according to the drawings and instructions given.

CE3.3 Recognize the symbology used in the mounting planes, indicating its meaning.

CE3.4 Determine, from mounting planes, the dimensions and tolerances of the specified pieces and assemblies.

CE3.5 Determine, from drawings and assembly instructions, the machines, tools, and accessories required for mounting.

C4: Apply sub-set pre-mount techniques, using the specific media

CE4.1 List the parameters to be taken into account in the assembly and pressing of parts, specifying depending on which variables are regulated.

CE4.2 List the parameters to consider in the unqueued parts assembly, specifying depending on which variables are adjusted.

CE4.3 List the parameters to be considered in the subassembly sanding and sanding, specifying depending on which variables are regulated.

CE4.4 In a scenario of pre-mounting subsets, from given conditions:

-Assemble and press subsets, using manual or automatic presses, prior to setting parameters.

-Insert any parts that require it manually and using automatic machines, prior to setting parameters and loading.

-Assemble subassemblies using staples, screws, or other attachment elements, prior to setting parameters for the stapling, screwing, and loading of these tools.

-Select abrasives whose grain is suitable for making the scraping and adjustment of subsets, depending on the characteristics of the material and type of machine used.

-Carry out the putty and sanding of subassemblies, using the hand-pin and hand-sanding, prior adjustment of parameters and placement of the appropriate lijas.

-Perform the basic maintenance operations of the machines used.

C5: Apply furniture assembly techniques and carpentry elements, placing on-order hardware and fittings.

CE5.1 Describe the process of mounting furniture and carpentry elements, indicating their purpose.

CE5.2 Enunciate the different furniture and carpentry elements that can be mounted (cabinets, tables, boxes, chairs), specifying the mounting processes involved and the subassemblies, components and accessories used for this.

CE5.3 Recognize the main hardware to be used in furniture and carpentry elements for non-moving joints (screws, tilts), relating them to the machining technology of the housings. the assembly technology required by each of them, as well as their main applications.

CE5.4 Identify the main fittings to be used in furniture and carpentry elements for mobile joints (hinges and guides), relating them to the machining technology of the housings of the same, the technology of assembly that requires each of them, as well as their core applications.

CE5.5 Indicate the equipment used for the assembly of furniture and carpentry elements (hinges, portable tools), describing their operation, as well as the operations they require for their maintenance and conservation.

CE5.6 List the parameters to be taken into account in the insertion of hardware with automatic machines, specifying depending on which variables are adjusted.

CE5.7 List the factors to consider in the assembly.

CE5.8 In a practical scenario of mounting furniture and carpentry elements, from a given condition:

-Place hinges and slides in the indicated positions, manually and using the specific automatic machine, prior to setting parameters and loading the same.

-Mounting furniture and carpentry elements, using the necessary binding elements and hand tools, prior to setting parameters and loading them, later removing them if required for packaging.

-Perform the basic maintenance operations of the equipment used.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C4 with respect to CE4.4; C5 with respect to CE5.8.

Other capabilities:

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Take responsibility for the work that you develop.

Adapt to the organization, its organizational and technological changes, as well as new situations or contexts.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. First level maintenance of furniture assembly equipment and carpentry elements

Technical documentation for the maintenance of equipment and machines.

Technical Tabs.

Process of replacing parts or items specified as top-level, broken, or defective in the carpentry and furniture assembly equipment.

Maintenance types machines, utensils, and equipment.

Preventive and corrective maintenance.

Applicable procedures and techniques.

Mount and dismount operations.

Lubrication and cleaning; regulation, adjustment, and programming.

Start-up procedures.

Regulation of furniture assembly equipment and carpentry elements.

Equipment handling and stopping. Fundamentals and features.

Composition, regulation, management, influence on the characteristics of the final product.

2. Assembly of furniture subassemblies and carpentry elements

Components and subassemblies used in the assembly of carpentry and furniture elements: types (lids, legs, cornices, backs, sides, drawers, among others).

Technical characteristics of components and subassemblies (solid wood, composite wood: agglomerates, enlistments, MDF, among others).

Manipulation of carpentry and furniture components and subsets.

Assembly of the components of the carpentry and furniture subassemblies: types of assemblies (a box and pin, a milane tail, eccentric, among others).

Types of fixing elements (adhesives, pegs, screws, among others).

Characteristics and properties of the fixing elements.

adhesive application elements: pistols, brush, dispenser.

3. Hardware used in carpentry and furniture, tools for the assembly of elements

Classes and features.

Applications.

Placing of hardware and its risks.

Techniques.

Machines. Applications. Handling. Maintenance. Occupational health.

Manual placement. Risks. Parameters to be controlled. Marking.

Classes. Features. Applications.

Handling. Loading. Safety and occupational health.

4. Mounting planes

Features and properties.

Interpretation. Symbology. Tolerances.

5. Adhesives, joinery and furniture joints

Types. Features and properties.

Manipulation. Applications.

Concept. Features.

Types (wrapped, stapled, bolted, with junction fittings).

6. Pressing, sanding and massing

Types. Parameters to be controlled.

presses. Description. Preparation. Operation and maintenance.

Pressing parameters (pressure and temperature).

abrasives. Types. Features. Applications. Conservation. Parameters to be controlled.

Sanding Techniques. Applications.

Landing tools and machines. Description. Preparation. Operation. Maintenance.

7. Mounting and adjusting furniture and carpentry elements

Purpose. Techniques. Features. Applications.

Conservation. Parameters to be controlled.

Manual tools. Description. Applications. Preparation. Operation. Quality control. Influencing factors.

8. Rules applicable to the assembly of furniture and carpentry elements

Risk types.

Protection and prevention methods.

Personal protection tools and security devices on machines.

Inherent risks.

Generated waste. Use and disposal. Methods and means.

Transportation. Separation. Storage.

More common risks in the assembly of furniture and carpentry elements. Types of risks.

Protection and prevention measures, individual and collective.

Place of work: security signs in the assembly workshop.

Materials and Labelling: pictograms. Safety and hygiene sheets. Machinery: safety devices and maintenance records. Personal protective equipment (PPE ' s).

First aid: introduction.

Action protocols in occupational accidents/emergencies.

Introduction to legislation in occupational accidents/occupational diseases: rights and obligations.

Application of environmental standards (waste, transport and recycling).

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the assembly of furniture and carpentry elements, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 3: FITTING AND PACKAGING FURNITURE AND CARPENTRY ELEMENTS

Level: 1

Code: MF0173_1

Associate to UC: Adjust and pack products and items of carpentry and furniture

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Classify the different furniture adjustment systems and carpentry elements according to their applications, features and machines and equipment involved.

CE1.1 Explain the process of adjusting furniture and carpentry elements, indicating their purpose.

CE1.2 Describe the different settings that can be made in furniture and carpentry elements (cabinets, tables, boxes, chairs), specifying the mounting processes involved and the subassemblies, components, and ancillary accessories.

CE1.3 Identify the main fittings to be used in furniture and carpentry elements for junctions that do not require movement, relating them to the machining and adjustment technology each of them requires, as well as its core applications.

CE1.4 Indicate the equipment that is used for the adjustment of furniture and carpentry elements, describing their implementation and operation, as well as the operations they require for their maintenance and preservation.

CE1.5 List the parameters to consider in the insertion of hardware with automatic machines, and specify which variables are adjusted.

CE1.6 List the factors to be aware of in the subset setting.

C2: Run the tuning operations of the carpentry and furniture components and accessories, obtaining mounted products, according to the specifications set.

CE2.1 In a practical, component and accessory setting scenario:

-Select the machines and tools to use based on the type of tuning to be performed, setting them to the point for later use.

-Make up the joints between the pieces that make up each product, repassing them, and adjusting them with tools or portable machines.

-Perform the adjustment of the mobile elements, accessories and their mechanisms with tools or portable machines, in conditions of safety and occupational health.

-Unmount, after checking the adjustment and operation, the different components of the product, numbing its position so that the different parts can be reassembled.

-Perform cleanup operations, first-level maintenance, and replacement of tools or tools following the existing maintenance plan.

C3: Analyze the quality control processes of the final product, leaving it in a condition to be packed.

CE3.1 Explain the process of final quality control of furniture and carpentry elements, indicating the minimum control to be performed on each unit, specifying rejection criteria.

CE3.2 Locate defective furniture and carpentry elements, indicating the severity of each defect, how to sub- heal it, and fill in the appropriate documentation.

C4: Characterize techniques for packing carpentry and furniture items, obtaining protected items according to specifications.

CE4.1 Indicate the different types of materials used to pack furniture and carpentry elements (cardboard, bubble plastic, expanded polyurethane, among others), detailing the characteristics, applications and degree of protection of the same.

CE4.2 Explain the packaging process, indicating the different existing systems, relating them to the packaging materials, protection of the element to be packed and total cost.

CE4.3 In a practical case, properly characterized with packaging of furniture products or carpentry elements:

-Indicate the equipment used, describing its operation and the operations it requires for its maintenance and preservation.

-List the machine parameters to be adjusted by specifying depending on which variables are regulated.

-Embaling furniture and carpentry elements, manually and using the automatic baler, prior to the preparation of materials, adjustment of parameters and load of the machine.

-Perform the basic maintenance operations of the machines used.

-Specify prevention measures and security items to use.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 complete; C4 with respect to CE4.3.

Other capabilities:

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Take responsibility for the work that you develop.

Adapt to the organization, its organizational and technological changes, as well as new situations or contexts.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Inspection of finished products

Purpose. Techniques.

Acceptance and rejection criteria. Sampling.

Inspection instructions.

2. Packaging of furniture and carpentry elements

Concept. Material. Types (cardboard, bubble plastic, retractable, expanded polyurethane).

Features and properties. Baling parameters (gage, temperature). Levels of protection.

Regular applications.

Automatic balers: description, preparation and tuning of parameters, operation and maintenance.

Quality control. Influencing factors. Purpose. Techniques.

3. Finished product store

Concept. Purpose. Techniques.

Documentation used.

Storage conditions.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the adjustment and packaging of products and elements of carpentry and furniture, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 5 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX VI

PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE PROJECTS

Professional Family: Wood, Furniture and Corcho

Level: 3

Code: MAM063_3

General competition:

Define carpentry and furniture products and control the development of prototypes, developing the technical documentation, applying the established quality procedures.

Competition Units:

UC0174_3: Define and develop carpentry and furniture products

UC0175_3: Develop and adjust the technical documentation

UC0176_3: Control and direct the realization of carpentry and furniture prototypes

Professional Environment:

Professional Scope:

Develops its professional activity in the area of technical office and prototypes, in carpentry and furniture, in entities of a private nature, in large, medium and small companies, for hire or self. It develops its activity, depending on its case, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. You may have staff in your position at times, for seasons or in a stable way. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors:

It is located in the productive sector of: furniture manufacturing, subsector, manufacturing of carpentry elements.

Relevant Occupations and Jobs:

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Furniture Designers

Technicians in the development of carpentry and furniture products

Joinery and furniture designers

Associated Training (540 hours)

Training Modules

MF0174_3: Defining and developing carpentry and furniture products (210 hours)

MF0175_3: Development of technical documentation on carpentry and furniture projects (210 hours)

MF0176_3: Control and direction of making carpentry and furniture prototypes (120 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: DEFINE AND DEVELOP CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE PRODUCTS

Level: 3

Code: UC0174_3

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Define the characteristics and specifications of new products, based on the information obtained from the available sources, considering the productive and commercial data of the company for its development, manufacturing and incorporation into the company catalog.

CR 1.1 The search for prior information to define the features and specifications of new products is done by consulting the available sources.

CR 1.2 The information obtained is used together with the company's productive and commercial data and market studies, obtaining the data that enables the identification of needs in the product offering.

CR 1.3 The information obtained is adapted to the degree of definition that allows decision-making, by those responsible for the convenience of designing and developing new products.

CR 1.4 The new products are defined on the basis of the analysis carried out, taking into account the cost of the materials and the manufacturing specifications.

CR 1.5 The characteristics and specifications of the new products are reflected in the specification, for execution by the person in charge of the design.

RP 2: Carry out design and construction solutions for new products, according to the needs established to enable them to be developed.

CR 2.1 The design development criteria that constitute the needs guidelines for the new product and appear in the brief or specifications are provided to the designer.

CR 2.2 The proposals on new products are elaborated with a sufficient level of detail and the necessary documentation is provided from the point of view of the technical characteristics.

CR 2.3 The formal and technical characteristics of the proposed products are first checked at the beginning of the development.

CR 2.4 The data and solutions provided for the development of new products are valued by those responsible for designing the products in order to make decisions for their approval and development.

RP 3: Define the systems, subsystems, parts and components of the carpentry and furniture products, from sketches and sketches developed to schedule the realization of the production plans and specifications.

CR 3.1 The set sketches and sketches and each of the parts of the carpentry and furniture models are developed for further manufacture after their assessment and approval.

CR 3.2 The grouping and relationship of the sketches of each of the views, sections and details is determined according to the manufacturing processes and the economic valuation of the company.

CR 3.3 The specifications and arrangement of components and assemblies are elaborated according to the company's criteria, market trends and pre-product development.

CR 3.4 The determination of the materials to be used is adopted according to the design of the product, taking into account the quality standards required.

CR 3.5 The determination of the production process for manufacturing is performed for each element, considering the technical possibilities of the company.

Professional context:

Production media:

Machines and Equipment: Measurement and marking tools. Conventional drawing tools and instruments. Drawing materials and for templates. Software and software for drawing, image editing and presentation of proposals.

Products and results:

Features and specifications defined, for new products. Solutions provided in the design and construction of new products. Definitions of systems, subsystems, parts and components of the carpentry and furniture products to be developed.

Information used or generated:

Measurements, data and sketches for construction and installation. Sketches and sketches of the elements to be developed (aesthetic, dimensional, functional characteristics). Listings of materials and products. Parts listings.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: DEVELOP AND ADJUST THE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION

Level: 3

Code: UC0175_3

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Develop the manufacturing and assembly plans of new carpentry and furniture products, applying the rules of representation and defining the components for their manufacture.

CR 1.1 The specification and definition of the carpentry and furniture model is achieved by preparing the views, sections and details according to the regulations.

CR 1.2 The layout of the product plans to be drawn up is carried out at scale, according to the specifications, manually or using the computer-aided design technique in two and three dimensions.

CR 1.3 The cutting planes are made by incorporating the necessary information for the understanding of the model and indicating the sufficient cotes for their subsequent manufacture.

CR 1.4 The coding in the plane of the different parts (scales, materials, finishing level), is carried out, to ensure the objectives of manufacture of the product (aesthetic, functional and technically).

CR 1.5 The graphical representation of the product is performed, taking into account the company's internal conventions and application drawing rules.

CR 1.6 The adjustments and tolerances are set, depending on the function of the parts and the type of manufacturing envisaged.

CR 1.7 The components (tornileries, fittings) that are involved in a piece of furniture or carpentry construction are detailed and performed in the respective planes, and the technical characteristics for their collection and valuation are specified.

RP 2: Select the materials and processes of the carpentry and furniture product to be manufactured, based on the aesthetic specifications of the design for the calculation of costs and the monitoring of the stages of production.

CR 2.1 The selection of materials (woods, sheets, fittings) is defined from the aesthetic and formal specifications defined in the design.

CR 2.2 The selection of the machining and assembly processes is performed, by means of the interpretation of the plans, defining the organization and execution of the work.

CR 2.3 Manufacturing operations are simplified and optimized by the use of constructive forms adjusted to the product type (sills, screws).

CR 2.4 Manufacturing costs are calculated based on the price of materials and components, manufacturing times, and fixed and variable costs, considering the profitability of the new product to be manufactured.

CR 2.5 The product development controls and self-controls with the stipulated quality level are described in the technical specifications.

CR 2.6 The control guidelines (code verification and self-control certificate), are identified and elaborated, following the criteria marked by the company's quality plan, incorporating the technical documentation to ensure the quality of the product.

CR 2.7 The operations to be carried out in the manufacture of the furniture (process sheet, manufacturing bulletins, scandalous) are described in the technical documentation that goes into production.

CR 2.8 The technical means required in the manufacture of the product are related and describe with the required level of concreteness, transmitting to the persons in charge of their production.

RP 3: Keep the technical documentation of carpentry and furniture products updated and organized, periodically to facilitate the consultation of the different departments of the company that requires it.

CR 3.1 The updating of the technical documentation of the carpentry and furniture projects (specifications, plans, scandalous, catalogues), is carried out periodically, informing the departments of the company that require.

CR 3.2 The procedures set for change control are defined, following common criteria, by informing all departments that are dependent on this documentation.

CR 3.3 Access to technical documentation is done in an organized way, following criteria of speed and ease based on an information coding system.

CR 3.4 Product development information is transmitted to the various departments of the company to inform both their existence and availability.

Professional context:

Production media:

Machines and equipment: Drawing instruments and equipment, standards. Office material. Drawing and design computer equipment (drawing, plotter, printer). Photocopier. Reproduction of plans. Flat cutter.

Products and results:

Manufacturing and assembly plans for new carpentry and furniture products. Selection of materials and processes of the carpentry and furniture product to be manufactured. Updates to the technical documentation of the carpentry and furniture products.

Information used or generated:

Views and drawings of new products. Reports on products of interest to manufacture. Dossier of information and materials for catalogues. Technical documentation file.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: CONTROL AND DIRECT THE REALIZATION OF CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE PROTOTYPES

Level: 3

Code: UC0176_3

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Control the prototyping, depending on the technical and formal specifications in the plans to adapt them to the approved proposals.

CR 1.1 The selection of materials (wood, veneers, fittings) is carried out, according to the aesthetic and formal specifications, according to the product plan to be developed and to the extent possible that they are identical. to those used in the production.

CR 1.2 The modification or removal of parts occurs due to the lack of adaptation to the technical specifications of cost and technological availability of the company.

CR 1.3 The development and analysis of the prototype is done according to the technical specifications.

CR 1.4 The machining is developed with the established machines and following occupational health criteria.

RP 2: Rate the prototypes, based on the technical and formal specifications in the documentation to match the characteristics of the company and the market.

CR 2.1 The technical, formal and ergonomic specifications of the prototypes are checked against the specifications of the product specification and market regulations.

CR 2.2 The application of the finishes is performed according to aesthetic variables, price and technical specifications provided by the company.

CR 2.3 The assessment of the prototype is carried out, comparing the technical compatibility of the prototype with the technological availability of the company, according to its own processes and subcontracting.

RP 3: Rate the behavior of the prototypes in specialized technical laboratories (efforts, compression, torsion), to adapt them to the requirements of the product and market, according to the applicable regulations.

CR 3.1 The measurement of the behavior of the prototypes is carried out after it has been sent to the technical laboratories for the analysis of characteristics relative to: efforts, compression, torsion, among others.

CR 3.2 The results obtained from the analysis performed by the technical laboratories are valued, adopting the constructive techniques prior to the serial manufacturing process.

CR 3.3 Possible changes to the prototype after valuation are included, considering product and market requirements according to applicable regulations.

Professional context:

Production media:

Machines and equipment: machinery and equipment for the manufacture of furniture. Materials: manufacturing and cutting planes.

Products and results:

Elaboration and measurement of prototypes, according to the technical and formal specifications. Behavior assessments in prototype technical laboratories.

Information used or generated:

Planes for manufacturing and construction. Listings of materials and products. Parts listings. Characteristics of the machines and processes to be used for the realization of the prototype.

TRAINING MODULE 1: DEFINITION AND DEVELOPMENT OF CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE PRODUCTS

Level: 3

Code: MF0174_3

Associate with UC: Define and develop carpentry and furniture products

Duration: 210 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Describe the processes of research, definition and development of new carpentry and furniture products.

CE1.1 Describe the functions and features of a technical office.

CE1.2 Relate the functions and organization of the technical office with other departments of the company.

CE1.3 Recognize information that is required and handled in a technical office.

C2: Rate the prior information used for the definition of the new product in carpentry and furniture in order to determine the current situation, trend and distribution of the demand for new products.

CE2.1 In a practical information assessment scenario for the definition of the new product in carpentry and furniture from a given condition:

-Interpret information prior to product definition (market studies, catalogues, journals, fairs, exhibitions and offers from manufacturers) in order to know the market situation and obtain the necessary information for the definition of the new product.

-Develop statistics and graphs from the company's productive and commercial data and market studies information to deduce the characteristics of the new products to be manufactured.

-Define the basic features and characteristics of the new products in the brief or specifications, considering with: the product line, market segment to which it is directed, quality/cost level waiting for the product, schedule of times and tasks, expected response of the market.

C3: Propose constructive solutions for carpentry and furniture elements, combining the formal and functional requirements specified in the product preview.

CE3.1 In a practical scenario of Proposing solutions for carpentry elements, based on a given condition:

-Interpret and analyze the specification, in order to propose solutions and ideas of new products obtaining the following initial data: form, general dimensions, distribution of elements, details, decorative (moldings and carvings) and surface finish.

-Analyze possible constructive solutions (assembly, assembly or joint), comparing, in order to select the most appropriate, reasoning and justifying the solution adopted, taking into account the following aspects: type of materials, function, efforts, aesthetic pretensions and solutions and components available on the market.

CE3.2 In a practical scenario of defining proposals for new carpentry and furniture products, based on the technical information of a chosen product and with specific requirements:

-Make sketches and sketches that, by properly combining the starting requirements, define at least two possible constructive solutions.

-Perform the sketches that complete the various possible constructive solutions of the furniture or carpentry elements with a level of detail that allows their determination, analysis and selection.

-Make the perspectives of the different solutions proposed, to facilitate their understanding and presentation.

-conveniently feature the solution adopted, determining and sizing the parts and components required by detailed drawings in which it will be considered: the functionality of the solution in relation to the intended use and the use of materials, the quality, proportionality, definition and detail of the sketch, the size of the solution from the point of view of its resistance and the adequacy of the space requirements, the suitability of the chosen materials, the feasibility of manufacturing and/or installation, the economy of the adopted solution.

C4: Define the aesthetic-functional aspects, systems, subsystems, parts and components of new carpentry and furniture products, from actual models, photographs or sketches of the designer, applying a methodology of design and rendering techniques.

CE4.1 In a practical scenario of defining aesthetic-functional aspects, from a given condition:

-Elaborate sketches, sketches and drawings (plants, hoes, sections, details and perspectives in pencil and color), using manual or computer-aided drawing, containing the versions, adaptations and modifications of the base model, developed with a level of definition that allows for its assessment, study and subsequent development and manufacturing.

-Interpret information collected from catalogs and technical data from materials and products to obtain information applicable to the design and definition of new products.

CE4.2 In a scenario of modifying a product, based on a given condition:

-Set the main shape and dimensions of the product.

-Apply to product definition, functionality criteria, aesthetics, sustainability, ergonomics, durability and economics.

-Adapt the product's aesthetics and definition to certain productive possibilities.

-Preselect materials that meet established aesthetic-functional requirements.

-Perform the drawings and drawings of the modified version, applying conventional graphical representation methods.

-Set the appropriate packaging for the protection of the product, depending on the type of product (quality, fragility, shape and price), considering information to be incorporated in the packaging, costs, ease of assembly, protection, storage, transport, and destination.

C5: Analyze and evaluate the manufacturing possibilities of carpentry and furniture products, considering the systems, processes, phases, procedures and means necessary for the production of their components.

CE5.1 Describe the main manufacturing processes involved in the manufacture of a given product.

CE5.2 List the main machines, equipment, and tools that are necessary to perform the manufacturing processes of a given product, taking into account the following product characteristics:

-Materials that compose it.

-Parts and set dimensions.

-Shape of parts.

-Constructive solutions adopted.

-Mount system to apply.

-Number of parts to be manufactured.

CE5.3 In a practical scenario of an industry of which its means of manufacturing is known, based on conditions established by the most relevant technical information:

-Identify and describe the required manufacturing processes.

-Determine which elements or stages of manufacture cannot be made with the available means indicating which ones should be added so that the manufacturing of the product is feasible.

-Develop alternative solutions to the adopted construction and assembly system, which involve simplification in manufacturing processes, maintaining or improving the expected results of the product in order to manufacture the product product with the available media.

C6: Organize and keep updated the documentation used and generated in the definition of carpentry and furniture products.

CE6.1 Describe the characteristics and information they provide for the definition of carpentry products and furniture the different documents that are generally used and generated (studies and analysis of markets, sketches and Drawings, design plans, definition plans, models, samples of materials and implementing rules).

CE6.2 Explain the different organizational systems to classify the technical documentation that allow easy identification and handling.

CE6.3 Collect and organize the necessary information and technical documents for the definition of an alleged product.

CE6.4 Classify the different documents, based on their content and the degree of usefulness.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 complete; C3 complete; full C4; C5 with respect to CE5.2 and CE5.3.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the correct production rules.

Prove a good professional.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Contents:

1. Design and technical office

Operating and types of companies. Organic structure and organization chart.

Design and technical office functions within the company's scope for new product development.

Documentation and phases in new product development projects.

2. Market information analysis

Types of studies and market reports and their usefulness: Selective emptying of specialized journals and information of sector news, market studies, trade fair reports, trend reports, consumer reports.

Sources, agencies, and companies doing market research.

Selecting and analyzing relevant information.

Application of results to the product and manufacturing definition.

3. Materials used in carpentry and furniture

Classification of the main types of woods.

General behavior and usage characteristics.

Main species used in Spain: Coniferas. Broadleaves and certified Maderas.

Types of boards derived from wood.

Technical characteristics and uses: of particles, of fibers, enlistment, plywood, lightening, other materials used in carpentry and furniture, plastics, metal, glass and textiles.

Main junctions, fittings, queues, accessories and accessories used in carpentry and furniture.

Products for the coating of surfaces and finishing of furniture: varnishes, lacquers and solvents, plates, decorative laminates, plastics and paper.

4. Industrial design applied to carpentry and furniture

Importance and impact of design on the production of carpentry and furniture elements.

Project and definition planning through the brief and specifications.

Drawing methods. Tools and materials required: Conventional. Hand drawing of sketches and sketches. Systems of representation. Views. Computerised. Introduction to 2D modeling

Methods of design of carpentry and furniture: techniques of creativity for the generation of ideas.

Aspects to be taken into account in the design: form-function, ecodesign, constructive rationalization, ergonomics.

5. Adaptation/modification of carpentry and furniture products

Objectives. Approach and structuring. Factors to consider.

Information. Collection. Sources. Supports. Selection.

Solutions adopted: Description and representation of alternative solutions. System of representation to be adopted according to the application to which it is intended. Key aspects to analyze for solution selection. Comparative analysis of solutions and decision-making.

6. Determination of the processes and means for the manufacture of the new carpentry and furniture product

Analysis of productive processes. Types and methods.

Technological requirements.

Technical media to be used in the development of carpentry and furniture products. Operation and use.

Analysis of the productive and economic viability. Analysis of production costs.

Identifying the technical capabilities of the company.

7. Analysis of furniture and carpentry elements. Features

Types of furniture and carpentry items: Types of furniture. Nomenclature and styles. Carpentry elements. Windows, doors, coatings. Standard furniture elements. Trade measures. Ergonomic dimensions.

Articulation, sliding, closing systems.

Extensibly folding systems.

Security regulations. Stability and balance.

Listing of the main manufacturing processes for carpentry and furniture products.

Relationship of major machines, equipment, and tools used in production.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the definition and development of carpentry and furniture products, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: DEVELOPMENT OF TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION IN CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE PROJECTS

Level: 3

Code: MF0175_3

Associated with UC: Develop and adjust the technical documentation

Duration: 210 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Develop the production and assembly plans of carpentry and furniture products with the required concreteness for the type of manufacture, applying the rules of representation.

CE1.1 Interpret the symbology and normalization used in the furniture and carpentry elements.

CE1.2 In a scenario of manufacturing and assembling new products, based on a given condition:

-Develop plans for the manufacture of new carpentry and furniture products, applying appropriate graphical representation techniques and introducing the specifications required by the product type and the adopted manufacturing system.

CE1.3 In a scenario definition scenario based on the specifications and the selected solution:

-Draw the set planes, in axonometric perspective, to illustrate the solution adopted.

-Draw the main and auxiliary views, sections, cuts, breaks, and details needed to define the components of the set and their relationships with each other.

-Develop the list of components or parts.

-Draw the resulting cutting planes, with the precise technical specifications for manufacturing.

-List the codes and references for the various parts that make up the product.

C2: Define carpentry and furniture products and develop the necessary plans, using computer-assisted drawing techniques.

CE2.1 Describe the most important features and applications of computer-aided design.

CE2.2 Describe the equipment and means required to obtain plans by means of a drawing software.

CE2.3 Define the typical configuration of a computer-assisted design team, contemplating the most relevant peripherals.

CE2.4 Identify operating system commands that allow you to operate with the computer-aided design program.

CE2.5 In a practical scenario of defining carpentry products, on the basis of given conditions:

-Make drawings and modifications of drawing in two and three dimensions, using a computer-aided drawing program, applying the conventional standards of representation to the realization of manufacturing plans, illustration and mount.

-Create two-and three-dimensional environment by using a computer-aided drawing program.

-Get the drawings using tracer and printer, using different formats and scales.

-Get job backups, keeping documentation sorted and easy to access.

C3: Define the manufacturing processes required for product procurement, setting the sequence of operations for their construction.

CE3.1 Identify the main equipment, machines and tools (saws, brushing, regruiser, milling, tupi, drills, lathe, sanders) that intervene in the different processes of construction of a product according to the materials, form, constructive solutions and characteristics of the same.

CE3.2 Relate the main processes applied to the construction of furniture and elements of carpentry in workshop (conventional machines, tools and tools), with the manufacture of prototypes.

CE3.3 Describe and characterize the processes, phases, operations, and means necessary to construct a given product, based on its characteristics and materials used, establishing the sequence of operations, indicating which is the result of each phase or operation and what implications they have with each other.

CE3.4 Compare the manufacture of a prototype with the manufacture of the corresponding product, differentiating the industrial production within the production system and the artisanal manufacture.

CE3.5 Differentiate which prototyping operations are feasible by serial or craft manufacturing.

CE3.6 In a practical scenario of defining manufacturing processes for obtaining new products, based on established conditions:

-Identify equipment, machines and tools (saws, brushing, regruiser, milling, tupi, drills, lathe, sanders) involved in the various processes of construction of a product according to the materials, Form, constructive solutions and characteristics of the same.

-Relating the processes of application to the construction of furniture and elements of carpentry in workshop (conventional machines, tools and tools), according to the information represented in the plans of the model.

-Characterize the processes, phases, operations, control guidelines and means necessary to construct a given product in the specification, depending on its characteristics and the materials used, establishing the sequence of operations, indicating which is the result of each phase or operation and what implications they have with each other.

C4: Economically evaluate the manufacture of carpentry and furniture products, considering the different costs involved.

CE4.1 In a practical scenario of economic assessment of the manufacture of carpentry and furniture products, on the basis of given conditions:

-Detailed the composition of the cost of carpentry and furniture products, through the product scandal.

-Describe the various types of fixed and variable costs involved in the manufacture of a product in an industry-type company.

-Use a computerized database of materials and manufacturing cost to obtain the cost of a product.

-Develop a product's budget by applying a budget software program.

-graphically determine the product profitability threshold, considering the cost composition.

C5: Organize the documentation generated and used in the definition of carpentry and furniture products.

CE5.1 In a scenario of organizing product definition documentation, starting with established conditions:

-Compose the memory of a project, collecting the relevant information (previous analysis, sketches and sketches of solutions, type of materials, finishes, assembly and assembly systems, qualities and other characteristics) required for the manufacture of a product.

-Develop the memory and other written documents that make up the product development project, applying a word processing software program.

-Work the measurement document and manufacturing budget for a product.

-Compounding and assembling project documents by getting an appropriate presentation.

-Describe established procedures for controlling changes based on common criteria, informing the various departments.

-Classify the technical documentation for easy identification.

-Classify the different documents, based on their content and the degree of usefulness.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 with respect to CE1.2 and CE1.3; C2 with respect to CE2.5; C3 with respect to CE3.6; full C4; C5 complete.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the correct production rules.

Prove a good professional.

Demonstrate autonomy in solving small contingencies related to your activity.

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Contents:

1. Determination of constructive solutions in carpentry and furniture

Types of assemblies and fixed and mobile joins. Features and applications.

Join and assembly systems using hardware. Features.

Accessories and accessories (sockets, auctions, trimmings).

Selection of constructive solutions: Comparison and analysis of solutions. Factors to consider. Analysis procedures.

Selection of materials.

2. Graphic representation of furniture and carpentry elements

Performing sketches and sketches.

Performing views and details with the information that should be contained in the plans. Acitation and scales.

Types of perspectives for furniture and carpentry elements.

Normalization of drawings and symbology of materials and components.

Representation of assemblies and joints in wood.

Assigning tags and references for identifying parts and components.

3. Computer-aided drawing applied to carpentry and furniture

Application of computer-aided design to the representation of furniture and carpentry. Interest and profitability of the system.

Elements that make up the system. Teams. Programmes. Minimum equipment required. Investment. Maintenance.

The system and its elements. Functions and possibilities. New products. Modifications and versions of existing products.

Performing carpentry and furniture elements in three dimensions by computer-aided design.

Obtaining two-dimensional planes from 3D parts.

Printing of plans and projects in 2 and 3 dimensions: print environment, printer or plotter print types, plotter configuration, drawing preparation for printing.

4. Manufacturing processes and machinery

Machines, equipment and tools used in carpentry and furniture. Features.

Machines with serrin boot: Tape Sierra, Cart Sectionator/Circulars, Bulldozers.

Chip-starting machines: Cepilladora, Rage, Molding, Tupi and Replanting, Telling and Milling Machines, Machining Centers (CNC).

Machines for the machining of junctions. Female, spigners.

Machines for coating of faces and edges. Presses, edge-plating, combined.

Machines for mounting and packing. Assembly presses, module presses, balers.

Machines with dust-up: Hand-bearing, belt-sanding machines.

Varnishes application machines: Application pistols, roller/curtain machines, CN (Robot) automatons.

Determination of machines, equipment, tools required for manufacturing.

Comparison and assessment of the required means with those available.

Selection of the manufacturing process of the carpentry and furniture product.

Definition of production processes for the manufacture of the product to be developed. Development of technical documentation for the manufacture of the carpentry and furniture product.

Elaboration of project technical documents: process sheet, manufacturing bulletins, technical specifications, among others.

Identification of the controls and self-controls required to produce the product with the required quality level.

5. Economic assessment and product budget

Realization of the product's outrageous.

Product cost calculation: Data collection, material and component cost calculation, manufacturing cost calculation. Fixed and variable, calculation of total cost.

Determination of the sale price, based on market prices and benefits.

Profitability study. Variables and parameters to consider. Methods and formulas.

Budgeting. Application of database and budget software.

Comparison in case of own manufacturing with purchase case to supplier. Other factors to consider (quality, warranty, service, redemptions).

6. Elaboration of the technical documentation of the carpentry and furniture project

Project documents (structure and content): brief and/or specifications, first ideas and sketches. Selection of the idea. Descriptive memory (material types, processes). Manufacturing planes. Set views in perspective. Listing of parts and materials. Calculation of costs. Production planning. Work orders.

Writing and processing of memory, measurements and budget. Applying a word processor.

Additional information and documents and annexes to the project: catalogues, samples of materials, photographs of models and prototypes.

Presentation and Composition. Binding.

Elaboration of the complete project of a product for manufacturing.

Computer applications for managing technical documentation.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the development and adjustment of the technical documentation, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 3: CONTROL AND DIRECTION OF THE MANUFACTURE OF CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE PROTOTYPES

Level: 3

Code: MF0176_3

Associate with UC: Control and direct the realization of carpentry and furniture prototypes

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Select the technical information required for the control of prototype production in carpentry and furniture industries and process the documentation that is required for distribution.

CE1.1 In a practical scenario of manufacturing a prototype of carpentry and furniture, and having available the technical information of the product and the process:

-Select the technical documentation required for production, in order to monitor the correct execution of the prototypes.

-Order the documentation according to different criteria (distribution, allocation, application).

-Meet the documentation required for the organization of production.

-Print and organize the drawings of parts, subsets, and sets.

-Develop the list of required materials.

-Develop the job type-fichain.

C2: Control the manufacture of carpentry and furniture prototypes, and propose alternative solutions to manufacturing in case it is needed.

CE2.1 In a practical scenario of prototyping, from given conditions:

-Verify that the materials contributed conform to the specifications of the proposed prototype.

-Control that the machine parameters (power rate, pressure) and the type of tools and their situation are appropriate to the process.

-Verify the characteristics of the manufactured parts, checking that they conform to the established specifications (dimensions, planimetry) with their tolerances and the absence of defects (tooth marks, burns, repeat).

-Check, once the product is finished, that the characteristics of the product are set to the initial specifications (color, brightness, touch, dimensions) and detect what the reasons for the deviations have been.

-Compare the manufacture of a prototype with the manufacture of the corresponding product, differentiating the industrial production within the production system and the artisanal manufacture.

CE2.2 In a practical scenario of a prototype of previously assembled carpentry and furniture, in which manufacturing and assembly problems appear:

-Perform timely inspections of the product to locate deviations that may have been produced with respect to the expected results, according to the conditions set in the project.

-Develop alternative solutions to the adopted construction and assembly system, which involve simplification in manufacturing processes, maintaining or improving the expected results of the product.

-Update documentation for the development and manufacture of the prototype carpentry and furniture.

C3: Apply quality control procedures on manufacturing processes in carpentry and furniture industries, combining quality requirements with the specifications of the process.

CE3.1 Define the necessary quality controls to meet the quality standards established by the company.

CE3.2 Analyze the quality levels of the product, in order to detect the factors to improve in the production process.

CE3.3 In a practical scenario of manufacturing a prototype of carpentry and/or furniture, and from the production quality control documentation:

-Identify the sampling points.

-Determine and explain what level of defects or errors are allowed in the mechanized and other operations involved in the processes, depending on the level of quality required.

-To indicate the factors and elements involved in the process that can produce merms in the quality of the materials or products (machines, tools, manual operations) relating cause-effect, and indicating the form of correct them.

C4: Analyzing safety and health conditions in production in carpentry and furniture industries, preparing procedures for their control and prevention.

CE4.1 Interpret the safety and occupational health regulations applicable to the carpentry and furniture industries (materials, installations, machinery, operations).

CE4.2 Analyze the safety conditions (lighting, ventilation, extinguishing means, protections), which must have the main productive areas (machining, assembly, finishing) of the wood and furniture industries.

CE4.3 Explain the analysis techniques of a job position from the security point of view.

CE4.4 In a practical scenario of manufacturing a product, known production facilities and equipment:

-Identify the safety and health risks and conditions of the facilities and machines.

-Deduct the risk level of the different jobs, establishing the hazard rates.

-Analyze the distribution and environment of the jobs.

-Order and distribute jobs, applying security criteria.

-Establish necessary means and facilities (personal protections, machine protections, detectors, means of extinction) to maintain an adequate level of occupational health.

CE4.5 In a practical scenario of a given job done on a visit to a production center:

-Identify/and describe the risks and degree of dangerousness of the same.

-Describe the appropriate conditions that this job position must have from the security point of view.

-Explain how operations should be developed from the perspective of occupational health.

C5: Evaluate the tests to which the prototypes are submitted to ensure the quality level set in the project.

CE5.1 Explain the objectives and functions of the analysis and testing of prototypes in the verification of the quality level of the project.

CE5.2 Classify the various types of tests, taking care of the intended purpose.

CE5.3 Analyze duration trials, describing tests, means, and test parameters.

CE5.4 Describe the main existing standards and prescriptions for furniture testing and carpentry elements.

CE5.5 In a test scenario of a prototype where the tests performed and the results obtained are described:

-Evaluate results, identifying and applying applicable regulations.

-Determine the possible causes (materials, nature of the adopted constructive solution, dimensions, tolerances) of the parameters of the non-exceeded prescription.

-Establish alternative proposals to improve the results obtained, reasoning the solution.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 complete; C2 complete; C3 with respect to CE3.3; C4 with respect to CE4.4 and CE4.5; C5 with respect to CE5.5.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the correct production rules.

Prove a good professional.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Contents:

1. Construction and finishing of prototypes and models, production control documentation

Selection of the technical documentation required for prototyping. Blueprints, roadmaps.

Selecting the tools and tools needed for machining, assembling and finishing parts.

Types and features of prototype workshop machines.

CNC programming knowledge for prototype manufacturing.

Preparation of machining operations with machine tools: construction and assembly of prototypes, placement of fittings, assembly, sizing, pressing, coating of surfaces, techniques, materials, realization.

Preparing surfaces for finishing. Features.

Performing manual finishes. Application of the products. Drying.

Control documents. Interpretation. Analysis. Application. Processed. Elaboration. Distribution. Assignment.

Control documentation. Computer processing. Performing case studies.

2. Quality control of the production process and prototypes

Application of the production quality manual.

Procedures for quality control in processes.

Phases and checkpoints (cutting, mechanical operation, mounting).

Detecting quality deviations.

Taking data and incidents (control tabs).

Correction measures to meet quality standards.

3. Monitoring security and maintenance in production

Risk prevention regulations in the workplace.

Required work and security conditions in production.

Preventive risk measures.

Action against accidents. Inspection of the causes and correction.

Maintenance programs. Preventive. Corrective. Calendar. Graphics.

Relationship between maintenance, productivity, quality, and security.

Tracking and verifying maintenance operations.

4. The process, prototype-promotion-product

Comparative analysis between design-model-prototype project.

Redesign and final product definition.

Promotion of the prototype and promotion of the final product. Dichotomy.

5. Prototype analysis techniques

Importance and function of trials for quality control.

Selection of furniture and carpentry elements: existing national and international regulations.

Selection of laboratories and entities that perform quality controls: services that offer, means, and equipment available.

Test types: destructive, non-destructive, resistance analysis, stability, durability, performance interpretation, normalized values.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the control and direction of the manufacture of carpentry and furniture prototypes, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX VII

PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: MAKING CORK OBJECTS

Professional Family: Wood, Furniture and Corcho

Level: 1

Code: MAM212_1

General competition:

Manufacture granulates, agglomerates, blocks and cork sheets, using tools, equipment and specific machines for the preparation and treatment of the raw cork and for processing according to the procedures established, obtaining products and by-products with the required quality in terms of safety, occupational health and environmental protection.

Competition Units:

UC0675_1: Prepare the cork

UC0676_1: Manufacture cork granules, pure cork agglomerate, and articles

UC0677_1: Manufacture natural cork and composite agglomerated products

Professional Environment:

Professional Scope:

Develops its professional activity in the production department in relation to the maintenance in the professional area of the cork dedicated/or to the preparation of the cork, manufacture of pure agglomerate, composed agglomerate and other cork articles such as sheets, pallets, decorative articles and natural cork or agglomerated specialities in large, medium and small enterprises, normally for hire or reward. It develops its activity depending on its case, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors:

It is located in the cork sector, in the subsectors of the first transformation of cork and the manufacture of cork products, developing its activity in the production area.

Relevant Occupations and Jobs:

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Machine operators for cork treatment, in general

Corcho-agglomerating machine operators

Machine operators for making cork articles, in general

Machine operators for making cork items, in general

Cork Crushing Machine Operators

Associated Training (240 hours)

Training Modules

MF0675_1: Corcho preparation (60 hours)

MF0676_1: Manufacture of pure cork-agglomerated cork granules and their manufactures (90 hours)

MF0677_1: Manufacture of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate (90 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: PREPARE THE CORK

Level: 1

Code: UC0675_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Perform basic first-level maintenance operations to avoid interruptions in the production process of cork preparation, complying with applicable regulations on occupational risks, safety and the environment, following instructions.

CR 1.1 The tools, materials, and accessories usable in the cork preparation machine or equipment are prepared, making simple assemblies, keeping them operational.

CR 1.2 The simple and interchangeable elements of the machine or equipment for the preparation of the cork: gubes, blades, saws, shafts, rods, suction tubes, and others, are adjusted, checking that there is no slack.

CR 1.3 The simple and interchangeable elements of the cork preparation machine or equipment: electric motors, pulleys, hoists, wheels, bearing, bearings, tightening cables and others, are cleaned, checking that they are not remains of dirt, complying with applicable regulations on occupational hazards, safety and the environment.

CR 1.4 The operation of the machines or equipment, used in the preparation of the cork: boiler for cork, presses, transport equipment, among others are checked, detecting possible anomalies, informing the superior responsible, for possible failures in each shift, day, or in the batch change.

CR 1.5 Tools and tools used in cleaning and maintenance such as rags, spatulas, fixed keys, screwdrivers, oil, oil and other, are ordered, as set.

CR 1.6 The tuning of the cork preparation machines is performed, considering the selection of the tools, their sharpening and fixing parameters according to the product to be obtained, complying with the applicable regulations of the occupational risks, safety and the environment.

CR 1.7 The records and annotations of maintenance operations on equipment used in the preparation of the cork are performed on the established support.

RP 2: Make the reception and storage of raw cork, controlling physical parameters (humidity, density, among others), for their preparation, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational risks, safety and environment, following instructions.

CR 2.1 The raw cork pieces received, are unloaded with the discharge equipment, distributing them in the assigned places in the yard, following instructions, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational risks, safety and environment.

CR 2.2 Possible deteriorated parts of the raw cork received materials are detected, by the required checks, by rejecting and classifying them as 'non-compliant'.

CR 2.3 The cubing, weighing and measuring of the cork items is carried out, using the required equipment and instruments, with the values recorded in the control register.

CR 2.4 The moisture of the cork pieces is calculated, the values being noted in the control and production tracking records.

CR 2.5 The cork pieces are stacked and stored, facilitating air circulation and avoiding water accumulations and preventing their demoralization in disassembly.

CR 2.6 Control records are logged, including the length of the cork in the stacked yard, the checks made, and the input and output movements.

RP 3: Control the first-firing operations of the raw cork irons for stabilization, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational hazards, safety and environment, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The cork irons are immersed in the water for cooking with the specified means and equipment, preventing flotation, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational hazards, safety and environment.

CR 3.2 The cooked operation is carried out, controlling temperature parameters, water conditions and time, complying with applicable regulations on occupational hazards, safety and the environment.

CR 3.3 The cooking water is renewed, coinciding with the cleaning of the boiler, in continuous operation and after a stop, recording the consumption for further analysis.

CR 3.4 The cooked cork plates are moved to the stabilisation store, using the required means of transport, controlling the same: temperature and humidity, in accordance with the conditions laid down, applicable rules on occupational risks, safety and the environment.

CR 3.5 The water changes of the boiler and its consumption, are recorded, according to the support established in the production process.

RP 4: Trim cork irons for selection and pickled, eliminating defects, complying with applicable labour risk, safety and environmental regulations, following instructions.

CR 4.1 The cork irons are cut, removing the irregular edges, damaged parts or in bad conditions, leaving the uncovered smooth cuts that allow to appreciate its quality, complying with the applicable regulations of risks work, safety and the environment.

CR 4.2 The thickness or caliber of the cork irons is measured, using the instruments required for their subsequent classification.

CR 4.3 The cork irons are classified, selecting the plates, according to their thickness or caliber and visual appearance, quoting and recording the industrial applications for each type of cork.

CR 4.4 The cork irons are grouped and cooled, taking care of their different calibers, qualities and their subsequent industrial application, following instructions.

CR 4.5 Fars are stored instead covered, cleaned and aerated, following established criteria.

CR 4.6 The trimming operations, the classification and the performance, are performed with the required equipment and means, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational risks, safety and environment.

CR 4.7 Production control and tracking records are completed, following established criteria.

Professional context:

Production media:

Scales, rules. Boilers for the production of energy which can be used for cork waste. Boilers for boiling cork. Equipment for the movement of cork (tractor-shovel, trailers, forklifts, conveyor belts, hoists, crane bridge). Clamping equipment for dipping cork irons. Blade sharpening equipment. Temperature control and relative air humidity equipment. Water control and consumption equipment. Slicer. Press. Tables to trim. Platform porta fardos. Chains with hook.

Products and results:

Cleaning, adjusting, assembling and maintaining equipment in the preparation of the cork. Reception and storage of crude cork, made. Cooked and classified cork irons. Cork irons, trimmed.

Information used or generated:

Procedure manuals and technical instructions. Work orders and control sheets (printed and item parts). Regulations. Production monitoring and monitoring records. Applicable regulations on occupational risks, safety and the environment, following instructions. Applicable international law on upholstery practices.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: MANUFACTURE CORK GRANULES, PURE CORK AGGLOMERATE AND ARTICLES THEREOF

Level: 1

Code: UC0676_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Perform basic first-level maintenance and equipment preparation operations, to keep them operational and to avoid interruptions in the production process for the production of granulates and cork agglomerate, complying with the the applicable rules on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment, following instructions.

CR 1.1 The tools, materials, and accessories usable in the machine or equipment for the manufacture of granules and pure agglomerate of cork, are prepared, carrying out simple assemblies, keeping them operational.

CR 1.2 The simple and interchangeable elements of the machine or equipment for the manufacture of granules and agglomerate of cork: blades, hammers, resistors, axes, suction tubes and others, are adjusted, checking that there is no slack.

CR 1.3 The simple and interchangeable elements of the machine or equipment for the manufacture of granules and agglomerate of cork: electric motors, pulleys, wheels, transmitters, sieves, metal meshes and others, are cleaned, no debris remains, complying with the applicable regulations on occupational hazards, safety and the environment.

CR 1.4 The operation of the machines or equipment, used in the manufacture of granules and agglomerate of cork, boiler for cork, presses, transport equipment, among others are checked, detecting possible anomalies, reporting to the top responsible, for possible failures in each shift, day, or in the change of lots.

CR 1.5 Tools and tools used in cleaning and maintenance such as rags, spatulas, fixed keys, screwdrivers, oil, oil and other, are ordered, as set.

CR 1.6 The tuning of the granulate and cork agglomerate manufacturing machines is performed, considering the selection of the tools, their sharpening and fixing parameters according to the product to be obtained, complying with the applicable rules on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 1.7 The records and annotations of maintenance operations on equipment used in the preparation of the cork are performed on the established support.

RP 2: Carry out the cork in the stacking yard for storage and subsequent use in the manufacture of granulates and cork agglomerate, checking the characteristics of the cork and recording the movements, complying with the applicable regulations on occupational risks, safety and the environment, following instructions.

CR 2.1 The cork, used in the manufacture of granulates and cork agglomerate, is discharged into the stacking yard with the established equipment, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CR 2.2 The cork is accepted, if it is in quantity and quality (provenance, appearance, humidity) and matches the characteristics of the order and rejects those items that have a high wood content.

CR 2.3 Seats are logged in the input and output control records, including the cork permanence time in the stacked yard.

CR 2.4 The cubed and heavy of the cork pieces is performed, using the required equipment, scoring the results.

CR 2.5 The cork pieces and residues are stacked in groups, using the required equipment, identifying different types of cork.

CR 2.6 The location and orientation of the stacks and the piles of cork (if stored in bulk), in the stacked yard, is performed, perpendicular to the dominant wind, avoiding accumulations of water at the bottom and preventing the collapse of the stack during disassembly, complying with applicable regulations on occupational hazards, safety and the environment.

CR 2.7 The placement of the different items is organized, completing the control and production tracking records and keeping the warehouse in the required cleaning conditions.

CR 2.8 The moisture of the cork is periodically checked in the storage period, by means of measuring instruments (hygrometers, among others).

RP 3: Obtain cork granules for the manufacture of agglomerated cork products or blocks, by grinding and refining, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational risks, safety and environment, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The metallic particles and foreign objects in the cork pieces are removed, using systems based on the weight difference.

CR 3.2 The moisture contained in the pieces of cork and residues is checked, before processing, by means of measuring instruments (hygrometers, among others).

CR 3.3 The plates and pieces of natural cork are crushed to obtain granulates, using mills (of hammers stars, among others), separating the minor grains that have a high amount of impurities, aspiring the powder produced for storage and subsequent use, complying with the applicable regulations on occupational hazards, safety and the environment.

CR 3.4 The crushed cork particles are refined to obtain granulates with the specified dimensions and shapes, aiming for the dust produced for storage and subsequent use, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational risks, safety and the environment.

CR 3.5 The cork granules are transported and classified according to subsequent use, dimensions and density, with the required equipment, verifying that the bulk density of the granulate is maintained within the limits set.

CR 3.6 The drying of the cork granules is performed, programming and controlling the temperature and relative humidity of the air according to the specified conditions.

CR 3.7 The granulate is packaged, labeled, and stacked for organized distribution.

RP 4: Get cork agglomerate blocks, by cooking and cooling to make irons, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational hazards, safety and environment, following instructions.

CR 4.1 The cork granulate is weighed, using the required means (scales, among others), scoring the results.

CR 4.2 The natural cork granulate, is cooked, programming parameters (temperature, pressure and time), in the autoclave oven.

CR 4.3 The cooked cork granulate, converted into a block, is extracted, using the required means and equipment, transported for cooling to an enclosure or established space, complying with the applicable rules of risks work, safety and the environment.

CR 4.4 The agglomerate blocks are cooled to the air, or in hermetic, cooled metal chambers, controlling time and avoiding tensions and deformations.

CR 4.5 Production control and tracking records are completed on the established media.

RP 5: Manufacture cork agglomerate plates for further storage or distribution, following instructions, complying with applicable regulations on occupational hazards, safety and the environment, following instructions.

CR 5.1 The agglomerate blocks are cut, placed according to the cutting and cutting, using the required means (saws, laminators, among others), adjusting the corresponding parameters, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational risks, safety and the environment.

CR 5.2 The obtained plates are prepared for expedition into 'retracted' blocks, labeled and stacked in the warehouse.

CR 5.3 The cork powder produced in the cut of the agglomerate blocks is intended for storage and subsequent use, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational hazards, safety and environment.

CR 5.4 Production control and tracking records are completed according to the established criteria.

Professional context:

Production media:

Energy production equipment that can be used for cork waste. Equipment for the movement of cork ('tractor-pala ', trailers, forklifts, conveyor belts, transport equipment by means of endless screws. Hoists). Pneumatic transport equipment for grainy. Scales. Mills. Sieves. 'densimetric' tables. Dryers. Autoclave oven. Hermetic metal chambers Sierras and squadrons. Profilers. Laminators. Sanders. Packing equipment. Deposits and storage silos for granulates.

Products and results:

Cleaning, fitting, mounting and maintaining of cork granulate manufacturing equipment. Reception of cork in the yard of stacking, carried out. Cork granules, obtained. Blocks of pure agglomerate of cork, obtained. Cork agglomerated plates, obtained.

Information used or generated:

Manufacturing programs. Procedure manuals and technical instructions. Work orders and control sheets (printed and item parts). Applicable rules for occupational risks, safety and the environment. Production control and tracking records.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: MANUFACTURE PRODUCTS DERIVED FROM NATURAL CORK AND COMPOSITE AGGLOMERATE

Level: 1

Code: UC0677_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Perform basic first-level maintenance and equipment preparation operations, to keep them operational and to avoid interruptions in the production process of manufacturing products derived from natural cork and Compound agglomerate, complying with applicable labour risk, safety and environmental regulations, following instructions.

CR 1.1 The tools, materials, and accessories usable in the machine or equipment for the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate are prepared, carrying out simple assemblies, keeping them operational.

CR 1.2 The simple and interchangeable elements of the machine or equipment for the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate: blades, saws, axles, rods, suction tubes, electric motors, pulleys, wheels, transmitters, and others adjust, checking that there is no slack.

CR 1.3 The simple and interchangeable elements of the machine or equipment for the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate: electric motors, pulleys, wheels, transmitters, sieves, metal meshes and others, are cleaned, checking that no debris remains, complying with applicable regulations on occupational hazards, safety and the environment.

CR 1.4 The operation of machines or equipment, used in the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerated: boiler for cork, presses, transport equipment, among others are checked, detecting possible failures, reporting to the top responsible, for possible failures in each shift, day, or in the change of lots.

CR 1.5 Tools and tools used in cleaning and maintenance such as rags, spatulas, fixed keys, screwdrivers, oil, oil and other, are ordered, as set.

CR 1.6 The setting up of machines for the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate is carried out, considering the selection of tools, their sharpening and the fixing of parameters according to the product to obtain, in compliance with applicable labour, safety and environmental standards.

CR 1.7 The records and annotations of maintenance operations on equipment used in the preparation of the cork are performed on the established support.

RP 2: Carry out the operations of receiving the cork required in the production of products derived from natural cork and agglomerated compound for storage, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational risks, safety and environment, following instructions.

CR 2.1 The cork received for obtaining products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate is discharged in the yard of stacking with the established equipment, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and safety regulations. environment.

CR 2.2 The characteristics of the cork received are checked for: quantity and quality, origin, appearance, humidity, among others, in relation to the order, detecting and rejecting the possible deteriorated parts.

CR 2.3 The cubing, weighing and measuring of the items is carried out, using the required equipment and instruments, scoring the results.

CR 2.4 Corcho parts and residues are stacked in groups, using the required equipment: tractor shovel, trailer, among others, complying with applicable safety regulations, following instructions.

CR 2.5 The humidity and density of the cork pieces are checked periodically, by means of measuring instruments, (hygrometers, among others), scoring the values in the control and production tracking records.

CR 2.6 The piles and piles of bulk cork in the yard, are located, orienting the piles perpendicular to the dominant wind, avoiding accumulation of water at the bottom and preventing the demorone in the disassembly.

CR 2.7 Crude cork pieces are classified according to the presence of defects.

CR 2.8 Control records are logged, including the length of the cork in the stacked yard, the checks made, and the input and output movements.

RP 3: Obtaining blocks of natural cork or agglomerate by means of cutting, casting and pressing operations to manufacture sheets or tiles, complying with applicable regulations on occupational hazards, safety and the environment, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The natural cork plates are introduced into the previously adjusted cutting equipment, eliminating the belly and back, obtaining and classifying jigs and cuts of cork with a certain thickness, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CR 3.2 The preparation of the adhesives is performed in the required proportions, checking the specified instructions and the type of block to be manufactured, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and safety regulations. environment.

CR 3.3 Natural cork parts or templates are wrapped, controlling the amount of adhesive per surface unit and the time that elapses until it is put into pressure, complying with applicable safety, health and safety regulations. work and environment.

CR 3.4 The moulds are prepared, preventing the granules from being glued during the pressing, heating them to the temperature and for the specified time.

CR 3.5 The mixture of granules and cork adhesive is introduced into the moulds with the specified particle size, humidity and density.

CR 3.6 The pressing or extrusion of the granulate and adhesive mixture is performed, adjusting the parameters of the set limits, obtaining blocks by extracting them from the mold, in their case and controlling their cooling.

RP 4: Obtain natural cork and agglomerate sheets for processing, complying with applicable regulations on occupational hazards, safety and the environment, following instructions.

CR 4.1 The agglomerated cork blocks are unwound, adjusting the parameters (cutting angle, pressure bar position, speed) and focusing the block on the lathe, obtaining sheets with a certain thickness.

CR 4.2 The blocks of parts of natural cork or composite agglomerate are laminated, adjusting the micrometric ascent of the table according to the thickness to be obtained and fixing the blocks to the table for obtaining sheets or papers Decorative with a certain thickness, complying with applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CR 4.3 The cork sheets obtained are left to rest, controlling the predetermined environmental parameters, until they reach their final shape, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CR 4.4 Production control and monitoring records are completed, following the established criteria.

RP 5: Process the sheets of natural cork and composite agglomerate, by means of gluing and pressing to obtain products with the established quality, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational risks, safety and environment, following instructions.

CR 5.1 Natural cork sheets are classified, taking into account their porosity and other observable aspects, by proceeding to their attachment to the composite agglomerated cork sheet.

CR 5.2 The quality of the final product is checked, verifying: the length, thickness, width, and density of the simple elements that are to conform to the complex element.

CR 5.3 The preparation of the adhesives is performed in the required proportions, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CR 5.4 The cork sheets are wrapped, checking the amount of adhesive per surface unit and the time before it is put under pressure, complying with applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CR 5.5 High-density boards are collared by the two sides, controlling the amount of adhesive per unit of surface and the time that elapses to the pressing, adhering a base sheet (one on each face), complying with the the applicable regulations on safety, occupational health and the environment.

CR 5.6 The wrapped elements are pressed, controlling the pressure, temperature and pressing time complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CR 5.7 The elements that are wrapped after the pressing are stored, leaving them to rest, controlling: temperature and humidity, in order to avoid deformations.

RP 6: Terminate cork sheets to obtain tiles, parquet, floating pallet sheets or specialties, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational hazards, safety and environment, following instructions.

CR 6.1 The cork sheets are lijan, using the required means and equipment, calibrating their thickness and assessing the uniformity and appearance of the surfaces, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and safety regulations. environment.

CR 6.2 The tiles, parquet or cork specialties are obtained by placing cover sheets on cork sheets, using the required equipment and means, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and safety regulations. environment.

CR 6.3 The preparation of varnishes or waxes is performed in the required proportions, checking their characteristics and measuring their viscosity, complying with applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CR 6.4 The mixture is applied in the quantity stipulated, on the sheets or sides of the pallet, using the appropriate equipment.

CR 6.5 Cutting equipment is prepared by verifying the sharpening conditions and adjusting the specified cut-off parameters in compliance with applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CR 6.6 Corcho floating sheets or pallet are cut, positioning on the required cutting equipment, cutting and cutting.

CR 6.7 The pallets are profiled, adjusting the corresponding cut parameters, and checking the dimensions of the profile.

CR 6.8 The pieces obtained are stored in the established place, controlling conditions of humidity, temperature and time, complying with applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CR 6.9 Packaging and transport operations are carried out with the established means and equipment, complying with applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

Professional context:

Production media:

Energy production equipment that can be used for cork waste. Equipment for the movement of cork ('tractor-pala ', trailers, forklifts, conveyor belts, transport equipment by means of endless screws. Hoists). Pneumatic transport equipment for grainy. Scales. Mills. Sieves. 'densimetric' tables. Dryers. Autoclave oven. Hermetic metal chambers Sierras and squadrons. Profilers. Laminators. Sanders. Packing equipment. Deposits and storage silos for granulates.

Products and results:

Basic first-level maintenance operations and preparation of manufacturing equipment for products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate, made. Blocks of natural cork pieces obtained. Natural cork sheets processed, obtained. Final cork products: tiles, floating cork and other specialties, obtained.

Information used or generated:

Manufacturing programs. Procedure manuals and technical instructions. Work orders and control sheets (printed and item parts). Production monitoring and monitoring records. Applicable regulations on occupational risks, safety and the environment.

TRAINING MODULE 1: PREPARATION OF CORCHO

Level: 1

Code: MF0675_1

Associate to UC: Prepare the cork

Duration: 60 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Carry out the cleaning, preparation and maintenance operations of the machinery and equipment used in the cork preparation machines, in compliance with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks, safety and the environment.

CE1.1 Recognize the operation, constitution and safety devices of machinery and equipment used in the preparation of cork.

CE1.2 Describe the anomalies or main operating problems more frequently, during the use of the equipment used in the preparation of the cork, identifying the correction indicated in each case.

CE1.3 Describe the periodic maintenance and replacement operations of process machinery items.

CE1.4 In a practical case of maintenance of cork preparation machines, based on a given condition and complying with the applicable regulations of occupational risks, safety and environment, following instructions:

-Replace items in equipment and installations at the time and condition marked by the maintenance plan.

-Identify the first-level maintenance operations of the materials moving and stacking equipment.

-Run the movement and stack maintenance operations.

-Maintain the cleaning and environmental protection conditions of the various spaces.

-Perform the cleaning of machines, equipment and areas, achieving the required levels in the manufacture of plugs, discs and multipiece natural cork plugs.

C2: Describe the process of preparing the cork, taking care of the purpose of the product to be dedicated.

CE2.1 Relate the different phases of the cork preparation process, with the input and output product, as well as the operations of each phase.

CE2.2 Describe the required operation sequences (preparation of machines, tools, power, control, verification, and maintenance) that characterize the process, relating them to machines and equipment.

CE2.3 Describe the typical risks and errors of the cork preparation process, as well as the means of protection required under the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks, safety and the environment.

CE2.4 Specify the importance of control and classification of stocks of natural cork irons, controlling their characteristics, dimensions, defects, pathologies and humidity.

C3: Apply cork plate cooking techniques, operating with specific equipment, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks, safety and the environment.

CE3.1 Describe the materials and mechanisms of boilers and other equipment, as well as the tools and tools necessary for the cooking of cork irons.

CE3.2 Define the use and characteristics of the places of rest and storage of the cooked cork irons.

CE3.3 In a practical case of plate cooking, from a heading of cork irons:

-Submerge the cork irons.

-Check the temperature, conditions, and cooking times of the cork irons, according to the specified conditions.

-Calculate the cooking time and temperature.

-Verify that the plates are kept submerged during cooking.

-Extract the cooked cork plates from the boilers and store, using the required means, in compliance with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational risks, safety and the environment.

-Register the required water consumption.

C4: Classify cooked cork irons, according to the specifications prior to the cut and chosen operations, complying with applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational risks, safety and the environment.

CE4.1 In a practical case of classification of cork irons, from a heading of cork plates and with given characteristics:

-Select measuring and measuring instruments, establishing the unit of measurement and applying its operation.

-Calibrate cork irons, with appropriate instruments, according to the established criteria.

-Group cork plates, depending on previously defined classifications, by appropriate thicknesses or calibers for each industrial application.

-Perform measurement and calibration with the appropriate instruments.

-Determine possible industrial applications of the irons.

-Classify the measured and calibrated plates according to the application to which they are to be used.

-Align documents and control records and track the classification of the cooked cork, interpreting and completing them according to the criteria set.

C5: Apply cutting and cork-wrap techniques by selecting the cut cork irons, depending on the industrial application to which it is intended, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational risks, safety and environment.

CE5.1 Describe the operations of scraping and trimming of natural cork irons, defining the sharpening factors of the blades depending on the thickness of pieces to be obtained.

CE5.2 Describe the risks associated with the cutting and faxing process, according to standards of occupational and environmental risk prevention.

CE5.3 In a scenario of cork irons, according to established criteria:

-Cut cork irons, according to the criteria set.

-Select cork irons, for their fencased and stacked, depending on the industrial application that is considered.

-Register the operations performed.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 with respect to CE1.4; C3 with respect to CE3.3; full C4; C5 with respect to CE5.3.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the production rules set by the organization.

Interpret and execute the work instructions.

Respect the organization's internal procedures and rules.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. Simple operations for adjusting and assembling interchangeable elements in cork preparation machines, following instructions

Maintenance of the first level of machines required in the preparation of the cork: assembly and disassembly, lubrication and cleaning operations; regulation, adjustment, cleaning and grease of the cork preparation equipment, equipment point.

Equipment, machines, tools and accessories for the maintenance of machines and equipment required in the preparation of the cork: types and characteristics. Applications.

Measurement and parameter control equipment.

2. Cork: properties, characteristics and treatments of cork, reception and storage operations of crude cork

The cork: concept, structure, composition, physical and chemical properties, defects, diseases and pathologies, cork moisture.

Reception and storage of raw cork raw material: discharge of materials, precautions.

Receipt compliance. Cases of non-compliance and actions.

Corcho characteristics: provenance, appearance, humidity.

Classification of materials and products of reception: cubed and heavy processes of cork, coding and marking of materials and products received.

Distribution and location: stacked cork.

Protection of cork lots. Means of protection.

3. First-cooked operations and stabilisation of cork, sorting and potting plates

Cork and rest of the cork: concept, purpose, methods.

Boilers and cork-cooked equipment. Types.

Ironing cork classification: Concept, purpose, basic criteria, stock calculation, and document fulfillment.

Cut of cork irons. Concept, purpose.

Detection and removal of defects: methods and equipment and maintenance of defects.

Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational risks in cutting the cooked cork.

Treatment, disposal and use of waste.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of the cork, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

FORMATIVE MODULE 2: MANUFACTURE OF PURE AGGLOMERATED CORK GRANULES AND ARTICLES THEREOF

Level: 1

Code: MF0676_1

Associate to UC: Manufacture cork granules, pure cork agglomerate, and articles thereof

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Carry out the operations of cleaning, preparing and maintaining the first level of machinery and equipment used in machinery for the manufacture of cork granules, cork agglomerated and articles thereof, applicable rules for occupational risks, safety and the environment, following instructions.

CE1.1 Recognize the operation, constitution and safety devices of machinery and equipment used in the manufacture of cork granules, cork agglomerate and articles thereof.

CE1.2 Identify the first-level maintenance operations of the teams and run them according to the appropriate instructions or manuals.

CE1.3 Describe anomalies or main operating problems more frequently, during the use of equipment used in the manufacture of cork granules, cork agglomerate and articles thereof identifying the correction indicated in each case.

CE1.4 In a practical case of maintenance of machines for the manufacture of cork granules, cork agglomerate and articles thereof, on the basis of a given condition and in compliance with the applicable labour risk regulations, safety and environment, following instructions:

-Replace items in equipment and installations at the time and condition marked by the maintenance plan.

-Carry out the maintenance of use and replacement of elements of the various equipment and systems of movement and stacking of materials.

-Maintain the cleaning and environmental protection conditions of the various spaces.

-Carry out the cleaning of machines, equipment and areas, achieving the required levels in the machines for the manufacture of cork granules, cork agglomerate and articles thereof.

C2: Describe the process of making cork granulates, cork agglomerate, and articles thereof.

CE2.1 Relate the different phases of the process of making cork granulates and cork agglomerate, with the product that arrives and the one obtained, as well as the operations of each phase.

CE2.2 Describe the required operation sequences (preparation of machines, tools, power, control, verification, and maintenance) that characterize the process, relating them to machines and equipment.

CE2.3 Describe the typical risks and errors of the process of manufacturing cork and cork granulates and manufactured, as well as the necessary means of protection.

CE2.4 Specify the classification of stocks of materials and residues, considering their characteristics, dimensions, defects, pathologies and humidity.

C3: Apply basculate and reams of cork techniques, complying with applicable regulations on occupational hazards, safety and the environment, following instructions.

CE3.1 Relate the different phases of the receiving process, classified from the raw material.

CE3.2 Describe the spaces required for the storage and handling of the receiving material.

CE3.3 Relate the machines, tools and instruments needed to classify the cork (rules, forcipolas, hygrometers, scales).

CE3.4 Recognize the risks involved in the handling and storage of the material.

CE3.5 Describe the equipment and the stacking conditions of the cork, ensuring its preservation and indicating its suitability according to the pieces to be manipulated.

C4: Use equipment for the removal of particles and foreign elements in plates and cork waste, complying with the applicable regulations on occupational hazards, safety and the environment, following instructions.

CE4.1 Describe pre-ground conditions for cork irons and residues.

CE4.2 Describe equipment and systems for the removal of particles and foreign elements in plates and cork waste.

CE4.3 In a practical case of removal of particles and foreign elements in the lines of plates and cork residues, from a heading of cork irons:

-Determine equipment and system to remove foreign particles and elements.

-Handling equipment and disposal systems in the line items of cork and cork waste, applying the rules of prevention of occupational and environmental risks inherent in the process.

-Control the operation of the equipment and the removal of items.

-Take appropriate action in case of incident.

C5: Get cork granules, operating with the required equipment, in accordance with established specifications, complying with applicable regulations on occupational hazards, safety and the environment.

CE5.1 Describe machines and equipment for the manufacture of cork granules, depending on their purpose in the various operations of the process.

CE5.2 Describe granulated cork storage conditions, referred to at temperature and humidity.

CE5.3 In a scenario of obtaining granulates, from given conditions:

-Handle the cork crushing mills, according to the specifications, verifying the correct aspiration of the powder produced in the process.

-Make the granulated cork sieve, according to granulometry, selected the required equipment, based on criteria of dimension, density, shape and speed of the process.

-Seca granulates of cork, according to the specified humidity criteria.

-Transport the cork granules, with the pneumatic equipment, according to the specifications, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational hazards, safety and environment.

C6: Handle cork agglomerate block manufacturing equipment, in accordance with established specifications, complying with applicable labor, safety, and environmental risk regulations.

CE6.1 Describe the controls of moulds, presses, stoves and autoclaves, other equipment, tools and tools in the manufacture of cork agglomerate.

CE6.2 Describe the self-key and cooling conditions of the cork agglomerate blocks, avoiding structural failures thereof.

CE6.3 In a practical case of making cork agglomerate blocks, based on established conditions:

-Manipulate the feeding mechanisms and self-key controls for the manufacture of cork agglomerate, under the conditions laid down, in compliance with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks inherent in the process.

-Meet the production log parts of cork agglomerate, taking into account the established pressure, time and temperature specifications.

-Manipulate mechanisms and equipment for the extraction and movement of cork agglomerate blocks, according to established conditions.

C7: Manufacture cork agglomerate irons, operating with equipment according to established specifications, complying with applicable regulations of occupational hazards, safety and environment.

CE7.1 Describe the cutting and rolling operations of cork agglomerate blocks, defining the sharpening factors of the blades based on the thickness of pieces to be obtained.

CE7.2 In practical scenarios for the manufacture of cork agglomerate, based on established conditions:

-Manipulate the blade controls of cutting cork and cork agglomerate blocks, according to the established criteria, by checking the cork dust aspiration mechanisms.

-Handle expedition machines (retracting, labeling) of agglomerate plates, controlling the quality of the process and minimizing waste, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental inherent in the process.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 with respect to CE1.4; C4 with respect to CE4.3; C5 for CE5.3; C6 for CE6.3; C7 for CE7.2.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the production rules set by the organization.

Interpret and execute the work instructions.

Respect the organization's internal procedures and rules.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. Cork granules

Concept. Types, characteristics of the cork to be obtained, manufacturing techniques.

Removing particles and extraneous elements to the cork: concept, process justification, techniques, and methods.

Cork Crushing Mills: concept, types, applications.

Getting methods: equipment and maintenance of the same.

Granular cork sifting mechanisms: concept, types, applications.

Classification methods: equipment and maintenance of the same.

Drying of cork granules: concept, types, applications.

Determination of established wetties, equipment, and maintenance thereof.

Suction and transport mechanisms for dust and cork granules. Concept, types, applications. Methods of obtaining: equipment and maintenance thereof.

Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational risks in obtaining cork granules.

More frequent risks.

Protective measures: equipment and personnel, first aid.

Toxicity of the products.

Prevention and extinction systems. Methods and means used.

Environmental protection in obtaining cork granules: concepts, purpose and methods. Treatment, disposal and use of waste.

2. Cork agglomerate

Concept: manufacturing methods, applications.

Cork Granulate Cooking: concept, purpose, methods.

Equipment: molds, presses and stoves and maintenance thereof, temperature, pressure and time parameters. Means and facilities: tools, equipment and machinery.

Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational risks in the operations of obtaining cork agglomerate.

More frequent risks.

Protective measures: equipment and personnel.

First aid: toxicity of products, prevention and extinction systems.

Methods and media used.

Environmental protection in the procurement of agglomerated: concepts, purpose, methods, treatment, disposal and use of waste.

3. Blocks and plates of cork agglomerate

Blocks: concept.

Extraction and cooling systems.

Teams and maintenance of them.

Machining of blocks: sawing, rolling, squadron, milling.

Sawing and Maintenance Equipment.

Cork agglomerate plates: concept and applications.

Applicable safety and occupational health rules in obtaining blocks and sheets of cork agglomerate.

More frequent risks.

Protective measures: equipment and personnel.

First aid.

Toxicity of the products.

Prevention and extinction systems. Methods and means used.

Environmental protection in the obtention of agglomerated blocks and irons: concept, purpose, methods.

Treatment, disposal and use of waste.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the manufacture of cork granules, pure cork agglomerate and articles thereof, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 3: MANUFACTURE OF PRODUCTS DERIVED FROM NATURAL CORK AND COMPOSITE AGGLOMERATE

Level: 1

Code: MF0677_1

Associated with UC: Manufacture of natural cork and composite agglomerated products

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Carry out the operations of cleaning, preparing and maintaining the first level of machinery and equipment used in the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate, complying with the regulations applicable to occupational risks, safety and the environment, following instructions.

CE1.1 Recognize the operation, constitution and safety devices of machinery and equipment used in the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate.

CE1.2 Identify the first-level maintenance operations of the teams and run them according to the appropriate instructions or manuals.

CE1.3 Describe the anomalies or main operating problems more frequently, during the use of the equipment used in the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate, identifying the correction indicated in each case.

CE1.4 In a practical assumption of maintenance of equipment for the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate, on the basis of given conditions and complying with the applicable regulations of occupational risks, safety and the environment:

-Replace items in equipment and installations at the time and condition marked by the maintenance plan.

-Carry out the maintenance of use and replacement of elements of the various equipment and systems of movement and stacking of materials.

-Maintain the cleaning and environmental protection conditions of the various spaces.

-Carry out the cleaning of machines, equipment and areas, achieving the required levels in the manufacturing machines of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate.

C2: Describe the manufacturing process for natural cork and composite agglomerated articles.

CE2.1 Relate the different phases of the process of manufacturing of natural cork and composite agglomerate articles, with the product that arrives and the one that is obtained, as well as the operations of each phase.

CE2.2 Describe the required operation sequences (preparation of machines, tools, power, control, verification, and maintenance) that characterize the process, relating them to machines and equipment.

CE2.3 Describe the typical risks and errors of the cork article manufacturing process, as well as the necessary means of protection.

CE2.4 Specify the importance of the control and classification of stocks of materials and residues, taking into account their characteristics, dimensions, defects, pathologies and humidity.

C3: Describe the process of receiving and stacking the cork in the process of making articles of natural cork and composite agglomerate.

CE3.1 Relate the different phases of the receiving process, classified as raw material in the process of making articles of natural cork and composite agglomerate.

CE3.2 Describe the spaces required in the storage and handling of the receiving material.

CE3.3 Relate the machines, tools and instruments required in the cork classification (rules, forcipolas, hygrometers, scales).

CE3.4 Specify the risks associated with handling and storing the material.

CE3.5 Describe the equipment and the stacking conditions of the cork, ensuring its preservation, indicating its suitability according to the pieces to be manipulated.

C4: Obtaining blocks of natural cork or agglomerated cork, complying with applicable regulations of occupational hazards, safety and environment.

CE4.1 Describe the process of obtaining blocks of natural cork or composite agglomerate, based on criteria of use and specifications.

CE4.2 In practical scenarios for obtaining blocks of natural cork, from given conditions:

-Manipulate cutting equipment of natural cork pieces, taking into account the sharpening factors of the smooth blade blades depending on the thickness of parts to be obtained.

-Calculate quantities of granulated cork and tails and additives in proportions required to feed the mixers.

-Manipulate press equipment, according to established criteria of time, temperature and pressure.

-Schedule in the extrusion or molding machine the engine speed.

-Set the pressure and temperature criteria.

-Successfully manipulate the extrusion or molding machine, feeding the molds.

-Successfully correct the emptying of the blocks obtained from their molds.

C5: Obtaining sheets of natural cork or agglomerated cork, for the manufacture of decorative products and specialties.

CE5.1 Describe the process of obtaining sheets of natural cork or of agglomerated cork, having regard to certain criteria of use and specifications.

CE5.2 Describe the process of binding sheets of natural cork to sheets of agglomerate made of cork or other bases, according to the criteria of use, the defined specifications and the purpose of said process.

CE5.3 Describe the operations of unwinding and rolling of natural cork or cork composite pieces, defining factors of choice of cutting tools, depending on the thickness of the pieces to be obtained.

CE5.4 In a practical case of obtaining cork sheets, from given conditions:

-Manipulate the controls of the rolling and rolling machines according to the specifications.

-Prepare the sheets to be joined.

-Dosify and apply the adhesives by tending to the sheets to be wrapped and their surface.

-Calculate proportions, times, and quantities.

-Control the proportions, the time between their preparation, their application and the quantity per unit of surface.

C6: Get finished products, such as: floating pallet and other cork objects with required media and equipment.

CE6.1 Describe the process of cutting, sanding, and finishing of cork composite agglomerate sheets.

CE6.2 Describe the cork composite sheet cutting operations, defining the sharpening factors of the blades according to the pieces to be obtained.

CE6.3 In a practical case of obtaining cork products, on the basis of given conditions:

-Lijar cork sheets, according to established conditions, checking the wear of abrasive and the quality of the surface achieved.

-Dosify varnishes or waxes in the required proportions, controlling their viscosity and keeping the flow.

-Handle varnish-waxed equipment, checking the quality of the application, preventing process disruption and keeping equipment clean and in optimal state of use.

-Use the cutting equipment, checking the quality of the product obtained and maintaining the established job parameters.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 with respect to CE1.4; C4 with respect to CE4.2; C5 with respect to CE5.4; C6 with respect to CE6.3.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the production rules set by the organization.

Interpret and execute the work instructions.

Respect the organization's internal procedures and rules.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. Cork blocks used in the manufacture of cork-derived products

Natural Cork Blocks: concept, types, applications.

Getting methods: equipment and maintenance of the same.

Agglomerated block blocks: concept, types, applications, methods of obtaining. Equipment and maintenance of equipment.

Regulations applicable to the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and agglomerated from occupational safety and health.

Most common risks. Protective measures: equipment and personnel.

First aid. Toxicity of the products. Prevention and extinction systems.

Environmental protection in the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate: concept, purpose, methods.

Treatment, disposal and use of waste.

2. Cork sheets

Natural cork sheets: concept, types, and applications.

Getting methods: equipment and maintenance of the same.

Cork composite sheets: concept, types and applications.

Get Methods. Equipment and maintenance of equipment.

Regulations applicable to the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and agglomerated from occupational safety and health.

Most common risks. Protective measures: equipment and personnel.

First aid. Toxicity of the products.

Prevention and extinction systems: methods and means used.

Environmental protection in the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and agglomerate of safety and occupational health: concept, purpose, methods.

Treatment, disposal and use of waste.

3. Cork specialties

Losets. Concept. Types. Applications.

Getting methods: equipment and maintenance of the same.

Parquet: concept, types, and applications.

Get methods.

Teams and maintenance of them.

Corcho floating Tarima: concept, types, and applications.

Get methods.

Teams and maintenance of them.

Other items and specialties: concept, types, and applications.

Get methods.

Teams and maintenance of them.

Applicable safety and occupational health regulations in the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and agglomerate.

More frequent risks.

Protective measures: equipment and personnel. First aid.

Toxicity of the products.

Prevention and extinction systems. Methods and means used.

Environmental protection in the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and agglomerated: concept, purpose.

Methods, treatment, disposal and use of waste.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the manufacture of products derived from natural cork and composite agglomerate, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX VIII

PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: GETTING VENEERS, PLYWOOD BOARDS AND REJECTIONS

Professional Family: Wood, Furniture and Corcho

Level: 2

Code: MAM213_2

General competition:

Get wood veneers, plywood boards and decorative chapeados, using tools, equipment and specific machines for machining, bending, pressing and bonding, as well as for the packaging of products, according to the procedures established, with the required quality, in terms of safety, occupational health and environmental conditions.

Competition Units:

UC0432_1: Manipulate loads with forklift trucks

UC0678_2: Get veneer from roll wood

UC0679_2: Get decorative chapeados from sheet metal

UC0680_1: Elaborate plywood, curvy, and rechred panels

Professional Environment:

Professional Scope:

Develops its professional activity in the production department in connection with maintenance and quality in the area of first transformations of wood and cork, dedicated to the obtaining of plate, board Plywood, curving and reclapados made of wood, in private entities, in small, medium and large enterprises, normally for hire or hire. It develops its activity, depending on its case, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors:

It is located in the wood and furniture sector, in the sub-sectors of the first wood processing and the manufacture of products for the manufacture and installation of carpentry and furniture elements.

Relevant Occupations and Jobs:

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Plywood-Pressers

Wood-rolled manufacturing operators

Wood and board cutting operators

Machine operators for making sheets and plywood boards

Forklift drivers, in general

Associated Training (330 hours)

Training Modules

MF0432_1: Handling loads with forklift trucks (90 hours)

MF0678_2: Taping processes (90 hours)

MF0679_2: Decorative Chapeate Get Processes (60 Hours)

MF0680_1: Elaboration of plywood, curved, and rejected (90 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: HANDLING LOADS WITH FORKLIFT TRUCKS

Level: 1

Code: UC0432_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Drive forklift trucks to carry out the movement of goods, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, and under the supervision of responsible personnel.

CR 1.1 The lifting of the forklift truck is performed by checking the performance indicators of the control box, such as oil levels, battery charge, among others.

CR 1.2 The forklift truck is driven using the necessary individual protective equipment and the existing retention systems.

CR 1.3 The displacements are carried out taking into account existing signage and avoiding pedestrian traffic areas.

CR 1.4 The down-slope path is backtracked, not making changes of direction over the slope, to avoid rollover risks.

CR 1.5 The forklift truck is conducted in conditions of visibility and otherwise, the displacement is reversed, making use of the acoustic and luminous warning signals.

CR 1.6 The moves are made with the lowered forks avoiding the risk of center-of-gravity lifting dumps.

CR 1.7 The forklifts are parked in the assigned and authorized zones, removing the contact key and actuating the handbrake, maintaining these clean areas of materials or elements that may pose risks.

RP 2: Carry out the loading or unloading of materials and products for reception, dispatch and storage, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, and under the supervision of the responsible staff.

CR 2.1 The amounts to be delivered or received are checked by verifying at the delivery or receipt order respectively.

CR 2.2 The loading unit (packaging, packaging or containers) is checked by verifying that it does not exhibit any apparent deformations or damage and, if detected, communicate to the responsible personnel.

CR 2.3 Maximum load indications are respected in order not to exceed the forklift capacity limits and ensure stability, avoiding accident hazards in discharge and storage operations.

CR 2.4 The goods are handled using the appropriate means in each case (conventional, retractable, manual or electric truck, stacker, among others) avoiding alterations or damage and taking into account special risks (dangerous atmospheres, dangerous goods, among others).

CR 2.5 The implement is placed depending on its function, when the load movement requires it, not exceeding the load capacity or the resistance of the forks and following instructions from the responsible personnel.

CR 2.6 The loading and unloading of the external means of transport (truck, van, among others) is carried out by ensuring the integrity of the loads and following instructions from the personnel responsible for their placement.

CR 2.7 Manipulated loads are lowered to the ground level before manoeuvring, to avoid risks to the operating personnel and staff of the environment (damage to facilities, dumps, runs, among others).

CR 2.8 The load is deposited in the allocated space or alveolo (shelving or pavement level), placing the forklift at right angle with respect to the shelving or stacked load and with the mast in a vertical position.

RP 3: Supply raw materials and materials for processing in production, as well as remove the generated waste, depositing them in the intended areas and under the supervision of responsible personnel.

CR 3.1 The distribution of raw materials is done using the means established in the production order, in the areas authorized for this purpose, in order to avoid dysfunctions in the process.

CR 3.2 The raw materials are replenished according to production needs and before they are exhausted in the work zone, to avoid stoppages in the process and following instructions from the responsible personnel.

CR 3.3 The generated waste is loaded by checking in advance if they are contaminants, harmful or if they have visible defects, taking the appropriate measures as instructed by the responsible personnel.

CR 3.4 The waste generated is safely transferred and deposited in the areas and, where appropriate, in containers corresponding to the type of waste, in order to avoid contamination of the environment.

RP 4: Perform the first level maintenance of forklifts to ensure their operation, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational, environmental and quality risks, and under the monitoring of responsible personnel.

CR 4.1 First-level maintenance is executed by taking into account the technical documentation of the equipment and the procedures established by the company.

CR 4.2 The status of the wheelbarrow is checked by visual inspection of the undercarriage, lifting equipment, loss of fluids, among others, communicating to the responsible personnel the existence of any anomaly.

CR 4.3 The elements arranged for safe driving and handling such as brakes, tyre condition, lifting system, hydraulic or fuel leakage, acoustic and visual signals, among others, check that they remain in the running state.

CR 4.4 Safety devices and individual protective equipment (belt, helmet, among others) are verified by checking that they remain useful.

CR 4.5 The forklift truck is paralyzed if breakdowns are detected that can affect operation and safe handling by communicating it to its personnel responsible for repair.

CR 4.6 The periodic reviews are collected in the maintenance book informing the staff responsible for the previous performances.

Professional context:

Production media:

Manual carretillo, self-handling, electric or internal combustion engines. Manual forklifts. Containers, packaging and pallets. Shelves suitable for the type of loads. Personal protective equipment. Implements.

Products and results:

Lots and items of raw materials. Semi-processed products prepared for transfer on a machine foot. Finished items prepared for delivery to the customer. Load units carried, placed or stacked.

Information used or generated:

Applicable regulations on handling loads and using forklift work equipment. Applicable rules on prevention of occupational risks. Applicable rules for the management of waste or environmental protection. Orders for movement of goods, goods, transport and/or internal supply. Delivery barns. Coding of materials and products. Manual of use of the machine. Risk identification cards. Documents written and in digital support for the control of movement and transport of materials and products, materials and products in process and classification of warehouse stocks. Maintenance book. Tags. Production orders.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: GET VENEER FROM ROLL WOOD

Level: 2

Code: UC0678_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Prepare the work area for obtaining sheet metal from the roll wood according to the production plan established to ensure hygiene and safety, according to the production requirements, complying with the applicable rules.

CR 1.1 The procedures, in obtaining sheets from roll wood, are planned with the information obtained in the application technical sheets on the products and the process to be developed.

CR 1.2 The materials required to obtain sheets are selected, according to the requirements of the production process, using the technical tab.

CR 1.3 The position of work is conditioned, according to the procedures required in the cutting of wood, using the technical information sheet, so that the hygienic and sanitary conditions of the installations and the machinery maintain, in accordance with the requirements laid down in the working instructions and applicable regulations.

RP 2: Perform the first level maintenance of equipment used in the production of sheets from roll wood (cutting, vaporizing and unwinding), according to the production plan established for achieve the operability of the same, complying with the applicable regulations.

CR 2.1 The first level maintenance of the machines and equipment used in the production of sheets from roll wood (cutting, vaporizing and unwinding) is carried out in the form and periodicity indicated. in the manual of use, provided by the manufacturer, following the guidelines set out in the maintenance sheet, complying with the applicable rules.

CR 2.2 The anomalies are detected, identifying worn or damaged elements in machines and equipment used in the production of sheets from roll wood (cutting, vaporizing and unwinding), proceeding to its replacement, according to maintenance instructions.

CR 2.3 The machines and equipment maintenance records are cut, vaporized and unrolled, and are completed by recording the operations to be performed and their frequency, according to the programmed maintenance plan, as well as a field for incidents.

CR 2.4 The water renewal operations of the equipment for the use of the trotae and the vaporized chambers are carried out in accordance with the technical documentation, the instructions of the company, complying with the applicable regulations of the prevention of occupational risks.

CR 2.5 The machines used in the removal of plate by unwinding of prepared wood trots are put to the point, adjusting the angle and inclination of the blade, the situation of the pressure bar, the speed of the claws and the situation of the tatters in the claws, in accordance with the characteristics of the material and the product to be obtained, in compliance with the applicable rules.

RP 3: Prepare the wood, as set out in the production plan, to facilitate the production of sheet metal, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 3.1 Wood medium or quarterons are obtained, taking advantage of the characteristic vein of each piece, following the established production plan.

CR 3.2 Medium or wood quarterons obtained are processed in the vaporization or stout chambers during the time set.

CR 3.3 The wood vaporization conditions and tools used in wood cutting fit the wood to be processed, verifying that the equipment used is operational.

RP 4: Extract sheets for unwinding of prepared wood trots, as set out in the production plan for obtaining plywood boards, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and occupational risks environment.

CR 4.1 The cutting elements and the parameters for the execution of the blades in the rolling machines are fixed according to the characteristics of the material and the type of product to be obtained, complying with the applicable rules of prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 4.2 Wood stumps are cut, manually or automatically, and fastened with the claws or device set in the sheet metal removal equipment.

CR 4.3 The sheets by unwinding are extracted, by means of the cut made, so that the blade approaches the wood that rotates on its axis, fulfilling the criteria of use, according to the characteristics of the material, following the established production plan.

CR 4.4 The sheets obtained are stored without producing breakages or deformations, for obtaining plywood boards, complying with safety, occupational health and environmental standards.

RP 5: Extract sheet metal, from prepared parts, as set out in the production plan, to obtain plates for decorative purposes, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and occupational risks environment.

CR 5.1 The cutting elements and the parameters for the execution of the blades in the sheet metal removal machines are fixed, depending on the characteristics of the material and the type of product to be obtained, applicable rules on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 5.2 Wood stumps are cut, manually or automatically, and fastened with the claws or device set on the sheet metal removal equipment or rotary, complying with the applicable standards.

CR 5.3 The sheets to the flat or rotary are extracted through the cut with an angle of cut in depth, obtaining parallel cuts to the face, being tangential to the growth rings, according to criteria of use, depending on the characteristics of the material, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 5.4 The sheets obtained are stored without any breakage or deformation, for the production of plates for decorative purposes, complying with safety, occupational health and environmental standards.

RP 6: Run the shearing and drying of the sheets obtained, as set out in the production plan, to obtain final products with the required quality, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational risks and environment.

CR 6.1 The sheets obtained are subjected to the shear and drying, regulating parameters of: temperature, relative humidity and feed speed, depending on the material to be processed, verifying the state of the cutting elements, taking full advantage of each machine, considering the characteristics of the plate, following the established production plan.

CR 6.2 The flow of materials in the chain of work is controlled, avoiding jams, transporting the waste for its splinter and recycling, complying with safety, occupational health and environmental standards.

RP 7: Classify the dry sheet, as set out in the production plan to facilitate its storage and/or transportation, in compliance with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 7.1 Dry sheet is classified and grouped into stacks, by species, size and characteristics, facilitating their storage and/or transport, complying with applicable standards.

CR 7.2 The dry plate is marked, taking into account its technical characteristics, following the established marking plan.

CR 7.3 Dry sheet pieces are packaged, according to the production requirements, in accordance with the established packaging plan.

Professional context:

Production media:

Wood on roll. Carriage saw. Vaporized or stucco chamber. Parts centrepiece. Unwinding, sheet metal. Splinters. Classification useful.

Products and results:

Ready area for the veneer work. First-level maintenance performed on equipment used in the processing of sheets. Wood prepared for the production of sheet metal. Sheet metal extractions for unwinding of prepared wood tatters. Sheet metal extractions of prepared parts. Shearing and drying of the sheets, executed. Classified dry plate. Plate to the flat. Unwinding sheet.

Information used or generated:

Production Plan. Production orders. Technical manuals. Classification manuals. Technical sheets. Product entry statistics. Product exit statistics. Incident sheets. Applicable rules on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: GET DECORATIVE CHAPEADOS FROM SHEET METAL

Level: 2

Code: UC0679_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Prepare the work area for obtaining decorative chapeados from the plate, according to the production plan established to avoid interruptions in the processing, complying with the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 1.1 The operations established in obtaining decorative chapeados are planned with the information obtained in the application technical sheets on the products and the process to be developed.

CR 1.2 The required materials (wood sheets, dyes, among others) in obtaining decorative chastings are selected, considering the technical and visual characteristics (surface texture, color, drawing, vetoes, humidity, etc.). (ii) by rejecting sheets which do not meet the requirements of the composition to be made, according to the production sheets.

CR 1.3 The tools (cutting tools, among others) and machines (heaters, sheet metal, portable sanders, tapes and bonding elements, among others), are selected according to the production techniques.

CR 1.4 The position of work is conditioned, in accordance with the procedures required in the production document, in the production of decorative chapeados, in such a way that the hygienic and sanitary conditions of the installations and the Machinery shall be maintained, in accordance with the requirements laid down in the working instructions and applicable regulations.

RP 2: Perform first-level maintenance operations, machines and equipment used in obtaining decorative chapeados according to the production plan established to achieve the operation of the same, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 2.1 The possible anomalies of the equipment (heaters, plates, portable sanders, tapes and connecting elements, among others), required in the process of obtaining decorative chastings, are detected, acting according to equipment maintenance instructions, proceeding to their replacement or correction in accordance with the applicable maintenance plan.

CR 2.2 The adhesive application equipment used in obtaining decorative chastings is controlled, periodically removing the jams due to impurities.

CR 2.3 Simple anomalies affecting the operation of the required equipment in the process of obtaining decorative chastings are corrected, following instructions for maintenance.

CR 2.4 The machines and tools used in the draught of the different pieces of wood, are put to the point, considering the highest level of sharpening of the tools and cutting tools.

CR 2.5 The cutting, engraving and laser marking machine is set to check the state and operation of the gases and their ducts, the optics, the refrigerator and the suction pump.

CR 2.6 The documentation related to the maintenance carried out is completed, as established in the production process.

CR 2.7 Possible detected breakdowns that exceed their level of competence are reported to the maintenance service.

RP 3: Run the marquetry operations, marking, cutting and decorating the different pieces of wood, as set out in the production plan to obtain parts with the required quality complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 3.1 The templates, tools, and tools for marking are prepared, verifying their status.

CR 3.2 The wood sheets required in the composition of decorative chapeados are pressed with pressing machines, as set out in the production plan.

CR 3.3 Prepared wood sheets are marked, transferring the drawing of the templates, using drawing tools, as set out in the production plan.

CR 3.4 Wood sheets are cited, following the markings and strokes, placing the stops on the machines in the required position, making them sound and optimized, complying with the applicable standards.

CR 3.5 The various parts of the assembly are heated, or profiled with the machines without producing burrs or splashes.

CR 3.6 Wood figures are dyed with the required products and means, for shading, in compliance with applicable standards.

CR 3.7 The quality of the decorative chapeate compositions is checked, separated or rejected by those who do not comply with the controls, as set out in the production plan.

RP 4: Carry out cutting, engraving and/or laser marking operations on wood sheets to obtain decorative chapeados, as set out in the production plan, in compliance with the applicable risk prevention regulations work and environment.

CR 4.1 The material is prepared, verifying its correct status, positioning and vacuum fixation.

CR 4.2 The program or the machining programs to be used are loaded onto the machine's computer, checking that the cut, engraved, or marked parameters correspond to those specified in the production order.

CR 4.3 The machined parts are checked, verifying their correct cut, etching and/or marking, rejecting those that do not meet the required levels, recording in the established support the possible incidences.

CR 4.4 Selected machined parts are stacked to facilitate their storage and/or transportation to the downstream process, following the established production plan, complying with applicable standards.

CR 4.5 The process of machining the wood sheets is carried out, controlling the equipment, complying with the applicable standards.

RP 5: Carry out and paste operations of sheets to compose the drawing with its different pieces, as set out in the production plan, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and occupational risks. environment.

CR 5.1 The sheets are combined considering the vetoing, the numbering of the sheets and the excess to be used.

CR 5.2 Figures are placed and affixed with adhesive tape on the gaps of previously heated wooden sheets and pressed on the element to be decorated, complying with safety, occupational health and environmental standards.

CR 5.3 The different elements that make up the composition are attached, by pasting, to the adhesive tape, complying with the safety, occupational health and environmental standards.

Professional context:

Production media:

Templates. Shears. Calators. Sheet stitching. Portable sanders. Tapes and join elements. Cutting machine, engraving and laser marking of wood sheets. Pressing machine.

Products and results:

Ready area for the work of obtaining decorative chapeados. Operations carried out for the maintenance of the first level of machinery and equipment used in the production of decorative chapeados. Executed operations of marquetry, marking, cutting and decorating the different pieces of wood. Operations of cutting, embossing and marking with laser machine on wood sheets. Put together and glued sheets to compose the drawing with its different pieces.

Information used or generated:

Production Plan. Production orders. Technical manuals. Technical sheets. Drawings of marquetteries. Templates. Product entry statistics. Product exit statistics. Incident sheets. Machine maintenance book. Procedures for the management of quality, the environment and the prevention of occupational risks. Applicable rules on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

COMPETITION UNIT 4: BUILD PLYWOOD, CURVED, AND REJECT BOARDS

Level: 1

Code: UC0680_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Prepare materials and equipment in the manufacture of rechapated, curved and plywood boards, to avoid production interruptions, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and occupational risks environment, following instructions.

CR 1.1 The components of the adhesives used in the collection of redrawn boards (resin, hardeners, additives and other elements) received, are checked, verifying their correspondence with the quantity and quality requested, rejecting items that do not meet the required levels, recording possible incidents on the established support.

CR 1.2 The components and adhesives received to obtain rejected boards are stored in the specified locations for this purpose, complying with applicable standards.

CR 1.3 The adhesives required to obtain redrawn boards are selected according to the type of composition and the material to be joined, preparing according to the technical specifications.

CR 1.4 The mold for making curved boards is selected, checking that it has no deformations.

CR 1.5 The veneer is prepared, meeting the criteria of use, according to its characteristics and according to the production plan.

CR 1.6 The cutting elements and the execution parameters of the blades are regulated according to the composition and the type of wood to be joined.

CR 1.7 The parameters of the junction machine to obtain rechapated and plywood boards (forward speed, calderin temperature, pressure, temperature, race-end situation) are regulated, depending on the composition to be made and the type of wood to be joined.

CR 1.8 The parameters of the strainer (separation of the rollers from the strainer, speed of advancement, among others) in the production of boards, are regulated according to the composition and the type of wood to be joined.

CR 1.9 The parameters of the press (temperature and pressure of the dishes, time, situation of the end of the race, among others) in the production of boards, are regulated according to the composition and the type of wood to be joined.

RP 2: Get plywood or plywood boards, carrying out different checks throughout the production process, following instructions to avoid interruptions, complying with applicable risk prevention regulations work and environment, following instructions.

CR 2.1 The viscosity of the gluing liquid is measured periodically, checking that the gelling times, comply with the established values and reject those items that do not meet them, following instructions.

CR 2.2 The moisture content of the sheets and the support is measured periodically with the psychometric or hygrometer, checking that they meet the specified limits and rejecting those items that do not meet them, according to instructions.

CR 2.3 The pieces are wrapped, using the roller-strainer, checking the characteristics of the material to be joined and the environmental conditions, complying with the applicable labour health regulations, following instructions.

CR 2.4 The sheets and boards are pressed, placing them in the plates of the press, checking the displacements of material between them, considering the margins of displacement, according to instructions.

CR 2.5 The boards are cooled and cured according to the conditions of the local (cooled of the material and adhesive setting), following instructions.

RP 3: Terminate the plywood boards or rechinks in the manufacturing program, controlling the quality, to avoid obtaining products that do not conform to the established, complying with the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational risks and the environment, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The parameters of the squadron (type of tooth, cutting angles and speed, among others) in the finished plywood panels are regulated according to the characteristics of the material, checking the state of the cutting elements, complying with safety, health and environmental standards.

CR 3.2 The parameters of the gauge (type and size of grain, type of support and speed of advancement) are regulated according to the characteristics of the material, checking the state of the cutting elements, complying with the standards applicable.

CR 3.3 The flow of materials from the plywood or reclapado board end work chain is regulated by avoiding traffic jams, facilitating the transport of waste for slatting and recycling, following instructions.

CR 3.4 The quality of the boards produced is controlled periodically, separating or rejecting parts that do not conform to the manufacturing schedule.

Professional context:

Production media:

Chapas. Adhesives. Moulds. Roller strainer. Adhesive preparer. Hot plates press. Curvar press. Cooler. Squadron. Sectionator. Calibrator. Viscosimeter. Psychrometer or Higrometer.

Products and results:

Materials and equipment in the manufacture of rechared, curved, and plywood boards, prepared. Plywood boards or rechapado, carrying out different checks throughout the production process, obtained. Plywood boards or rechones with final quality control, obtained.

Information used or generated:

Production Plan. Production orders. Technical manuals. Technical sheets. Product entry statistics. Product exit statistics. Incident sheets. Machine maintenance book. Procedures for the management of quality, the environment and the prevention of occupational risks. Safety, occupational and environmental health regulations, applicable.

TRAINING MODULE 1: HANDLING LOADS WITH FORKLIFT TRUCKS

Level: 1

Code: MF0432_1

Associated with UC: Manipulate loads with forklift trucks

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Apply forklift driving techniques by performing conventional operations and basic maneuvers.

CE1.1 Localize the situation of the driving controls of the wheelbarrows and the control indicators, describing the function that each one plays.

CE1.2 Describe the different points to be checked for starting the forklift truck.

CE1.3 Recognize the risks arising from the handling of forklift trucks and the means and equipment used, identifying them.

CE1.4 Identify the normalized signals that delimit the specific zones of work and movement, interpreting each one.

CE1.5 Identify the light and acoustic signals to be carried by the wheelbarrows, relating them to their typology and location.

CE1.6 Explain the basic conditions of load stability and dump possibilities depending on the maneuver.

CE1.7 Recognize the operations to be performed for the parking of the forklift truck and for the maintenance of the obstacle-free space.

CE1.8 In a scenario of driving forklift trucks, from technical specifications:

-Check the performance indicators.

-Running the machine.

-Drive the machine without loading and perform the specified maneuvers.

-Raise and lower the fork.

-Parking the specified place and leave it out of operation.

C2: Apply loading and unloading techniques for forklift trucks by carrying out the reception, dispatch and storage with different goods.

CE2.1 Identify the basic ways to constitute the load units.

CE2.2 Explain the conditions to be met by packaging or packaging to constitute the load unit.

CE2.3 Identify and classify the different types of palettes and explain the fundamental applications of the palettes.

CE2.4 Explain the variations in the load weight performance mobilized, depending on the volume utilization available, depending on the shapes of the products or their packaging.

CE2.5 In a practical case of handling materials and products properly characterized:

-Interpret the information provided.

-Locate the physical situation of the load.

-Check that packaging, packaging, as well as materials or products meet security conditions.

-Check that the selected small metal container or palette type is best suited for handling and transporting the load unit, under security conditions.

C3: Interpreting and implementing regulations on the prevention of occupational risks and the health of workers.

CE3.1 Recognize the risks derived from manual handling of loads: object falls, contusions, lifting positions, repetitive overefforts, fractures, musculoskeletal injuries, and others.

CE3.2 Recognize the risks arising from the management of automatic machines and traction or thrust, such as: entrapments, cuts, overefforts, repetitive positional fatigue, torsions, vibrations, noise, gases, and others.

CE3.3 Distinguished individual protection equipment (E.P.I.) types appropriate to each risk.

CE3.4 Identify action measures in emergency situations.

CE3.5 Before a simulated load, transport and download scenario, perfectly defined:

-Identify the most appropriate personal protective equipment.

-Recognize the risks derived from load handling.

-Identify the risks arising from the transport, the stow/esestiba, stacked/off load.

-Detailed possible emergency situations that may be presented.

C4: Interpret the symbology used in the environment and transport paths.

CE4.1 List the duties, rights and rules of conduct of persons handling and transporting loads.

CE4.2 Identify the mandatory signals and information boards that reference the load, as well as other information symbols to be carried by the cart.

CE4.3 Identify and interpret the standardised signals to be defined by the specific areas of work, those reserved for pedestrians and others on the roads; and to act in accordance with the limitations of the warehouse, in case of handling indoors.

CE4.4 Identify the light and acoustic signals to be carried by the wheelbarrows, relating them to their standard typology and location.

C5: Identify the elements of the intended machines for safe driving, as well as the first-level maintenance operations.

CE5.1 Interpret on forklifts (or mockups) controls, systems and driving and handling elements; as well as fuel indicators, battery charge level and others included in the control board of the forklift.

CE5.2 Interpret the instructions in the maintenance manual, the operations that correspond to a primary level of the maintenance manual.

CE5.3 Identify those anomalies that, affecting safe driving or handling, must be communicated for immediate repair and may cause the forklift to be stopped.

CE5.4 In a scenario where the wheelbarrow charges anomalies:

-Detect failures.

-Identify those that have their possible origin in manufacturing or maintenance defects.

-Determine if there are breakdowns whose repair exceeds their responsibility and must be the object of communication to whom it corresponds.

-Perform maintenance operations that correspond to your level of responsibility.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 with respect to CE1.8; C2 with respect to CE2.8; C3 with respect to CE3.5; C4 with respect to CE4.6.

Other capabilities:

Maintain the work area with the degree of order and cleanliness required by the organization.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Finish the job based on criteria of suitability, speed, economy and effectiveness.

Interpret and execute the work instructions.

Respect the organization's internal procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Wheelbarrow handling and driving

Locating the items in the cart.

Machine handling: Guideline axis. Pre-set check-up. Start and stop of the wheelbarrow. Manoeuvres with and without load. Extraordinary maneuvers. Braking, starting and stopping the equipment.

Safety in handling: transport and lifting of the load.

Site signaling and transit system.

Personal protection equipment.

Transverse and Longitudinal Dump: How to avoid them.

Access/drop of the truck: use of the restraint system, cab, seat belt.

Circulation: displacement speed, path, floor nature, state of the floor, among others.

2. Loading and unloading of materials

Load unit.

Interaction between the center of gravity of the load and the center of the cart.

Lost and loaded truck stability loss.

Conventional counterbalance truck support triangle.

Dynamic and static behavior of the loaded and unloaded truck: excessive speed, overload, poorly placed load, accelerations, incorrect maneuvers.

Notions of balance. Types. Load charts.

Leverage law enforcement.

Load severity center: elementary concept and simple methods for your determination.

Usage of accessories.

Load and unload operations: Transportation media, shelving, and others.

3. Handling loads

Palletizing systems. Types of pallets.

Containers, drums, and others.

stacked and removed from loads.

Special holds.

Transportation precautions in special environments (chemical, explosive, and other industries).

Dangerous goods.

4. Forklift maintenance

Basic maintenance operations: visual inspection, first-level maintenance.

Thermal engine.

Electric engine.

Main items of manual trucks.

Main elements of fork lift trucks.

Lift system.

Types of masts, forks, hydraulic cylinders, forks and others.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to handling loads with forklift trucks, which will be accredited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Qualifications Framework for Higher Education) or higher education level related to this professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of three years in the field of competencies related to this training module

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 2: VENEER PROCESSES

Level: 2

Code: MF0678_2

Associate to UC: Get veneer from roll wood

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Relate the characteristics of the wood with the possibilities of obtaining plate and the associated preparation.

CE1.1 Differentiate and recognize the main types of national, European and tropical wood.

CE1.2 Recognize the most traditional figures obtained from the woods (water, magnifying glass, verruga, palm, mesh, cathedral, diamond, moketa) through the different cutting systems.

CE1.3 Discriminate the main systems of cubication, using measuring instruments.

CE1.4 Recognize and distinguish the main defects and diseases from the woods.

CE1.5 Different the main properties of the woods.

CE1.6 Select the wood based on the type of veneer to be obtained.

CE1.7 Acondition wood, relative to humidity, regulating the optimal level.

C2: Relate the different sheet metal removal procedures with the input and output material.

CE2.1 Describe the various veneer removal procedures, advantages and drawbacks and applications.

CE2.2 List the spaces required for sheet metal removal in the various procedures.

CE2.3 Define the extracted products and their qualities.

CE2.4 Explain the importance of the veneer extraction process in the wood and furniture sector as a whole.

C3: Maintain sheet-making equipment from roll wood (cutting, vaporizing and unwinding), making facilities preparation, complying with applicable regulations.

CE3.1 In a convenient equipment maintenance scenario, given the given conditions:

-Place tools and tools on the machines by adjusting the parameters while recognizing, choosing the tools with good conservation status, sharpening, and mounting the security devices.

-Assign the parameters (of cutting, vaporization and unwinding), to the different machines according to the technical data, where it is checked by the tests of commissioning.

-Perform a usage maintenance on the shearing, controlled by the corresponding tab, identifying items and operations to be performed.

-Assign the parameters (input speed, temperature, humidity, and air speed) in the drying tunnel.

-Perform on the machine a periodic maintenance, controlled by the maintenance tab, where the elements are identified and the operations to be carried out (detection of faults (typology, causes, instrumental and visual tests), replacement of parts or elements, system regulation).

-Make the machines ready in terms of occupational health, safety and quality.

-To condition the position of work in the cutting of the wood, so that the hygienic and sanitary conditions of the installations and the machinery, complying with the applicable regulations, applying the safety and health norms work.

-Keep the machine in use, controlled by the corresponding tab, identifying items and operations to be performed.

C4: Apply wood vaporization techniques, maintaining equipment, complying with applicable regulations.

CE4.1 Explain the vaporizer and stout systems.

CE4.2 In a practical case, to obtain sheet metal from the roll wood, from a given material and conditions:

-Assign the parameters (dimension, speed, alignment) to the different machines according to the technical data and type of machining, checking them by starting up tests.

-Get sawn parts with the required characteristics, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational hazards and the environment.

-Regular moisture to each type of wood.

-Perform the maintenance of use in saws, vaporizers and stovators, collecting it in the corresponding tab, where elements and operations are identified to be performed.

C5: Extract continuous veneer by unwinding of wood, controlling parameters and quality of the product obtained.

CE5.1 Explain the process of continuous process plate removal by wood unwinding.

CE5.2 In a practical case of continuous sheet metal removal by wood unwinding, complying with applicable regulations, on the basis of given conditions:

-Regular tools and tools on the machines by adjusting the parameters (angles and inclination of the cutting blade, depth, pressure bar situation, the speed of the claws and the situation of the In the claws), checking the good condition of the blades and mounting the necessary safety devices according to the characteristics of the material and the type of product to be obtained.

-Place the wood troza manually or automatically by centring it and holding it with the appropriate claws or device.

-Check that the cut is required, depending on the characteristics of the material that is unrolled and the product to be obtained.

-Check the transport, cutting and storage of the sheets, avoiding breakages or deformations.

-Machine a maintenance of use, controlled by the corresponding tab, identifying items and operations to be performed.

C6: Extract sheet plate from wood, complying with applicable regulations.

CE6.1 In a practical scenario, preparing for the extraction of sheet metal to the wooden plane:

-Place tools and tools on the machines by adjusting the parameters (cutting angles, depth).

-Select the blades in the conservation and sharpening state.

-Mount security devices, complying with applicable regulations.

CE6.2 In a practical scenario, from obtaining sheet metal to the wood flat, from the prepared parts and a given project:

-Assign the parameters (dimension, speed, alignment) to the machine based on the technical data and type of sheet to be obtained, checking their startup.

-Calculate the characteristic parameters, blade angles and inclination, pressure bar situation, claws speed and the situation of the jaws in the claws.

C7: Operate with the shear and drying equipment, complying with applicable regulations.

CE7.1 Explain how the shear and drying processes are performed, specifying the machines and their characteristics.

CE7.2 Specify the risks associated with shear and drying, complying with current regulations.

CE7.3 In a practical scenario of shear and drying of wood, from a given condition:

-Place tools and tools on the machines by adjusting the parameters (cutting angles, depth).

-Select tools in the use and sharpening state and mount the security devices.

-Assign the parameters (dimension, speed, alignment) to the shearing based on the technical data and type of machining, checking it through the startup tests.

-Perform in the drying tunnel a use maintenance, controlled by the corresponding tab, identifying elements and operations to be performed.

CE7.4 In a practical scenario, of running shear and drying from the sheets obtained:

-Adjust the temperature and relative humidity of the dryer and the feed rate depending on the material to be processed, verifying the correct state of the cutting elements.

-Make the most of the material on each machine and respecting its characteristics.

-Perform the flow of materials in the chain of work, avoiding jams and transporting waste for splinter and recycling.

-Perform the maintenance of use of the machines and auxiliary media, collecting it on the corresponding tab, where elements and operations are identified to be performed.

C8: Apply quality criteria to the dry sheet classification.

CE8.1 In a practical scenario of quality control in the classification of sheets, fulfilling given characteristics:

-Recognize the main defects of the sheets (color, splinters, different thicknesses).

-Classify the veneer according to its type of vetching (natural, wavy, stripes).

-Classify the sheets taking care of their dimensions.

-Build the sheets by keeping the output order of the extraction.

-Mark the sheets based on their technical characteristics and the production plan.

-Embaling the sheets according to the composition to be made and the requirements of the client.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C3 complete; C4 with respect to CE4.2; C5 complete; C6 complete; C7 with respect to CE7.3 and CE7.4; C8 complete.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Prove a good professional.

Maintain the work area with the degree of order and cleanliness required by the organization.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Characteristics of wood for the extraction of sheets

Types of timbers used to obtain sheets.

Types of compositions.

A-cutting systems.

Measurement and control systems for volumes and humidity.

Defects of the timbers that influence the collection of sheets.

Wood properties and their relationship to procurement systems.

Wood storage and conditioning systems for obtaining sheets.

Concept. Get processes.

Cooked and vaporized from tatters. Purpose. Techniques and methods.

Treatment times according to the species and the diameter of the die.

2. Sawing and vaporization

Purpose. Cutting technology (parameters).

Cutting tools (tapes and saw disks).

Obtaining medians and quarthons.

Machines and equipment used. Description, features, capabilities.

Safety and occupational health and safety rules.

3. Sheet metal extraction and drying techniques

Purpose. Parameters.

Rolled out of wood.

Other sheet extraction techniques.

Positioning of parts.

Machines and tools. Description, features, capabilities.

Sheets-stackers collection.

Sheet drying: concept, technique, types and parameters.

Product quality control.

Applicable safety and environmental protection regulations in wood sawing.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to obtaining veneer from the roll wood, which shall be credited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of three years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

FORMATIVE MODULE 3: DECORATIVE CHAPEATE PROCUREMENT PROCESSES

Level: 2

Code: MF0679_2

Associate to UC: Get decorative chapeados from sheet metal

Duration: 60 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Describe the preparation and composition processes of the marquetry.

CE1.1 Relate the different phases of the markup processing process with the products and means used.

CE1.2 Recognize the types of veneer more used in making marquetteries and their main properties and characteristics (surface texture, color, vetoing, among others).

CE1.3 Select sheets based on the type of decorative chapeate to be obtained.

CE1.4 Recognize the types of dyes that are most used in the development of marketteries and their main types, characteristics, capabilities, and applications.

CE1.5 Select the dyes based on the type of decorative chapeate to be obtained.

CE1.6 Recognize the different styles of the furniture and the most common marquetteries applied in each of them.

CE1.7 Relate the machines, tools and instruments used in the development of marquetteries.

CE1.8 Explain the risks involved in the handling of materials and instruments used in the marking composition, in compliance with applicable regulations.

CE1.9 Explain the elements and processes that influence the quality of the materials, the products, and the process of making sheet metal compositions.

C2: Maintain equipment for obtaining decorative chapeados from the plate, preparing the facilities, complying with the applicable regulations.

CE2.1 In a practical case of maintenance of equipment for obtaining decorative chapeados, from a given condition:

-Place tools and tools on the machines by adjusting the parameters while recognizing, choosing the tools with good conservation status, sharpening, and mounting the security devices.

-Assign the parameters (cutting, among others), to the different machines based on the technical data, where it is checked by the commissioning tests.

-Perform on machines (shears, calers, plate-stitchers, portable sanders, cutting machine, engraving and laser marking of wood sheets, pressing machine) a periodic maintenance, controlled by the card corresponding, identifying elements and operations to be performed.

-Perform the machines, complying with applicable regulations.

-To condition the job in obtaining decorative chapeados from veneer, complying with the hygienic and sanitary conditions of the installations and the machinery, the applicable regulations.

-Perform the main basic maintenance operations of the shearing and caladora saw (grease, cleaning), collecting it on the corresponding tab, where elements and operations are identified to be performed.

C3: Prepare the sheets for your shearing and draught, applying established quality criteria.

CE3.1 Describe the process of preparing for the shearing and draught of veneers, indicating their purpose.

CE3.2 Describe the operation and maintenance of use of the different machines and useful handbooks to be used in the shearing and heating of sheets for compositions.

CE3.3 In a practical case, identification of defects in sheets (stains, crooked fibre, moisture, uneasiness, holes, grabber), and the making of marquetry compositions, on the basis of given conditions:

-Reject those chaps that do not meet the required conditions.

-Draw marketry compositions, indicating the types of sheets to be used for each piece.

-Group the different pieces of the composition with the same contour or plate.

-Get templates for getting them.

C4: Cizzling the sheets, making them ready to make the established compositions, complying with the applicable regulations.

CE4.1 In a practical scenario of preparing useful for shearing and draught, before a given project:

-Select cutting tools (shearing leaves and draught saws) that meet the conditions of sharpening and conservation status.

-Install them on machines using the required tools and equipment.

-Follow the marks and marks made on the sheets.

-Position the machine stops at the indicated position.

-Perform the sanitized and optimized sheets.

CE4.2 In a practical scenario, run of draught from the sheets obtained:

-Group the different sheets in packages.

-Mark the contours with the help of templates.

-Perform the sheet or sheet pack draught.

C5: Perform the cutting, engraving and/or marking with laser machine on wood veneers to obtain decorative chapeados.

CE5.1 In a practical scenario of cutting, engraving and/or marking with a laser machine, given the given conditions:

-Set the wood sheets.

-Load the machining program to use.

-Check the parameters of the loaded program by checking that they correspond to the one specified in the production order.

-Verify that the machined parts meet the required levels by recording possible incidents on the support.

-Pillar the machined parts.

-Perform machining operations by controlling the equipment, complying with safety, occupational health and environmental standards.

C6: Perform the composition of sheets and marquetry for the rechapate, complying with applicable regulations.

CE6.1 Describe the process of making sheet metal and marquetry compositions.

CE6.2 Describe the operation and maintenance of use of the different machines and useful handbooks to be used in the manufacture of sheet metal and marquetry compositions.

CE6.3 Relate the decoration processes applicable to the pieces for making marquetry compositions, identifying the materials used, utensils and their preparation.

CE6.4 Describe the different types of materials used for the union of sheets to make compositions, identifying the equipment and tools to be used, processes to be performed and their implications with subsequent processes (sanding, plating and finishing).

CE6.5 In a practical scenario of sheet and marquetry compositions for rebranding:

-To set the selected sheets according to their characteristics and those of the press.

-To set the sheets for making compositions without embedding of marquetry, taking into account the vetoing, the numbering of sheets and the surplus to be used and with the appropriate technical means.

-Decorate the pieces by tinting or shading in sand bath preparing the necessary products and getting the desired appearance.

-Assemble the pieces that make up the marking, placing the bottom on the holes in it, the different pieces, making sure of its correct positioning and placing adhesive material to fix the piece in its position definitive.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 complete; C3 with respect to CE3.3; full C4; C5 complete; C6 relative to CE6.5.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Prove a good professional.

Maintain the work area with the degree of order and cleanliness required by the organization.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Preparation of the marquetry and its components

Chapas for marquetry. Identification. Features. Uses. Defects and anomalies.

Drawn and marked from marquetry compositions. Techniques and processes.

Furniture styles and their influence on the markup drawings.

Sheet-side. Techniques. Processes. Teams.

Layer of sheets. Techniques. Processes. Teams.

Quality control of materials.

Safety and occupational health and safety rules.

2. Perform the composition of sheets and marquetteries

Sheet of sheets. Techniques. Processes. Teams.

Decoration of marquetry pieces. Tinting and shading. Other processes.

Composition of marquetry. Description. Technology. Processes. Materials and equipment.

Quality control of the compositions.

Applicable regulations.

Organization and distribution of the job.

Documentation and management.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to obtaining decorative chapeados from the veneer, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of three years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

FORMATIVE MODULE 4: CRAFTING PLYWOOD, CURVED, AND REJECT BOARDS

Level: 1

Code: MF0680_1

Associated to UC: Elaborate plywood, Curved, and Rejected

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Relate the products obtained with the processes followed, machinery, equipment and materials involved.

CE1.1 Describe the main manufacturing processes.

CE1.2 Classify the main products that are obtained according to: the layout of the sheets, the type of sizing, the manufacturing system and its destination.

CE1.3 Regular the main parameters of the machinery used in the process of making boards.

CE1.4 Specify the dimensions and conditions to gather the workspaces by linking them to safety, health, and environmental standards.

CE1.5 Recognize the qualities of the boards according to their technical and superficial characteristics.

C2: Prepare the adhesive according to the sheets to be attached and the required properties on the boards, complying with the applicable regulations.

Ce2.1 Recognize the main types of adhesives, their properties and applications (resins, hardeners, additives).

CE2.2 Select the adhesive and its components depending on the type of board to be manufactured, preparing according to the technical specifications.

CE2.3 Perform periodic pH, pot time, and adhesive gel controls.

C3: Apply the adhesive, using mechanical means, in compliance with applicable regulations.

CE3.1 In an alleged application of the adhesive, under established conditions:

-Select the main types of dashboards, specifying their features and applications.

-Assign the parameters (forward speed, temperature, pressure, queue type, alignment) to the strainer and put it to the point based on the technical data, type of board to be obtained and type of wood.

-Perform the sizing of the different sheets that make up the board.

-Apply the adhesive, complying with applicable regulations.

-Deposit the waste into the containers arranged for recycling.

C4: Perform the shearing and sheet-pooling, operating with the specific machines.

CE4.1 In a practical scenario of shearing and vening of veneers, in the face of established conditions:

-Place tools and tools on the machines, making the adjustment of the parameters (cutting angles, depth) and selecting the tools and tools in the state of use and sharpening, placing the safety devices required according to applicable regulations.

-Assign the parameters (dimension, speed, alignment) to the shear based on the technical data and type of machining.

-Make use maintenance on the shearing, identifying the items to be reviewed and the conditions to be maintained.

-Allocate parameters (input speed, type of adhesive, temperature) to the sheet metal junction and dispose of the sheet to form.

-Perform the shearing and bonding of the sheets, complying with applicable regulations.

-Make the repository of the waste in the containers set for subsequent recycling.

C5: To make the board, straight or curved, in the hydraulic press, in practical cases properly characterized.

CE5.1 Analyze the operation of the press and the necessary tools and accessories for pressing.

CE5.2 In a practical, pressing case of the board with established conditions:

-Assign the parameters (pressure, type of adhesive, time, alignment) to the press based on the technical data and type of board.

-Check the state of the molds and perform their cleaning.

-Place the molds in the press and the pieces in the press.

-Make use maintenance in the press, identifying the items to be reviewed and the conditions to be maintained.

-Prensar, complying with applicable regulations.

C6: Prepare the plywood and rejected boards, complying with applicable regulations.

CE6.1 In a scenario of preparation of plywood and rechapated boards, under established conditions:

-Place tools and tools on the machines, making the adjustment of the parameters (cutting angles, depth) to select the useful tools and tools in good condition and to mount the required security devices.

-Assign the parameters (dimension, speed, alignment) to the squadron based on the technical data and type of machining.

-Mechanize boards by sizing them to standard, standard or customer requirements, leaving surfaces without splashes or burrs.

-Deposit the waste into the containers arranged for recycling.

-Place the abrasive in the gauge by adjusting the parameters (meaning, tension, grain), regulating the input and output speeds of the material and in terms of safety and occupational health.

-Make use maintenance on the squadron machines and liders/calibrators by identifying the items to be checked and the conditions to be maintained.

-Perform machining and sanding, complying with applicable regulations.

C7: Apply manufacturing techniques for plywood, curved, and redrawn board, complying with applicable regulations.

CE7.1 In a practical scenario of making plywood boards, under established conditions:

-Set the sheet collection to the product to be manufactured.

-Describe the shear and composition of the veneers.

-Explain the preparation of the adhesive and the setting of the strainer.

-Describe the process of sizing the sheets.

-Set the parameters of the press.

-Describe the panel pressing process.

-Drill down the board conditioning and cooling process.

-Explain the machining process to measure the board.

-Define the finishing process of the board, specifying the type of abrasive and the surface characteristics.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C3 full; full C4; C5 with respect to CE5.2; C6 complete; C7 complete.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Prove a good professional.

Maintain the work area with the degree of order and cleanliness required by the organization.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Products, materials and equipment involved in the manufacture of boards

Plywood boards and rechinks. Concept. Manufacturing process. Applications. Classification.

Chapas. Qualities and types.

Media for the chboard. Features.

Materials for Reject. Types. Features. Handling.

Glued of wood veneers. Purpose. Systems.

Types of adhesives. Preparation of the queues. Dosage.

Veneer for Layers. Description. Features. Benefits.

2. Preparing and obtaining plywood and rechinks

Adhesives. Components. Suitability in the application. Drying times.

Layer Union. Types, applications.

Machines and equipment used in the sheet union. Description, features, capabilities.

Composition of plywood boards. Number and placement of parts.

Sizing machines. Description, features, capabilities.

Board pressing machines. Description, features, capabilities.

Curved of plywood boards. Moulds. Properties. Temperatures for the curvy.

Cooling and curing the board.

Safety and Health Standards. Typology of risks. Methods of protection and prevention. Individual protective equipment and safety devices in installations and machinery. Symbology used. First aid.

Environmental protection and waste treatment. Waste generated. Use and disposal.

3. Termination of the plywood and rechink board

Squared and dimensioned. Techniques. Parameters (feed speed, saw speed, saw tooth).

machines: types, description, operation and maintenance. Cutting tools.

Commercial dimensions.

Calibrated. Sanding techniques. Parameters.

Calibrators: types, description, operation, and maintenance.

Lijas: support, grain, pore, abrasive type.

Quality control of the boards. Factors that influence quality. Technical and superficial characteristics.

Safety and Health Standards. Typology of risks. Methods of protection and prevention. Individual protective equipment and safety devices in installations and machinery. Symbology used. First aid.

Environmental protection and waste treatment. Waste generated. Use and disposal.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the elaboration of plywood, curved and rechapated boards, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of three years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX IX

PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: MANUFACTURE OF PARTICLE BOARD AND WOOD FIBRES

Professional Family: Wood, Furniture and Corcho

Level: 2

Code: MAM214_2

General competition:

Get particle board and wood fibers, controlling the automated equipment for manufacturing and finishing, as well as for the preparation of the raw materials according to the established procedures, with the quality required, in conditions of safety, occupational health and environmental protection.

Competition Units:

UC0432_1: Manipulate loads with forklift trucks

UC0681_2: Preparing particles and wood fibers

UC0682_2: Develop particle and fiber boards

UC0683_1: Finish and coat particle and fiber boards

Professional Environment:

Professional Scope:

Exercises its activity in the production department in connection with maintenance and quality in the area of first transformations of wood and cork, dedicated to the manufacture of particle board and fiber wood in medium and large enterprises, normally for hire or hire. It develops its activity, depending on its case, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. You may have staff in your position at times, for seasons or in a stable way. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors:

It is located in the productive sector of sheet and board manufacturing in the subsector, subsector of: particle board manufacturing, manufacturing of fiber boards and board coatings.

Relevant Occupations and Jobs:

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Operators of wood crushing machines

Machine operators to manufacture agglomerates

Operators of sawmills, board-making machines and related facilities for the treatment of wood and cork

Peons of the wood and cork industry

Mechanized train operators of agglomerated boards

Melamine cutting machine operators

Melaminizing machine operators

Forklift drivers, in general

Associated Training (420 hours)

Training Modules

MF0432_1: Handling loads with forklift trucks (90 hours)

MF0681_2: Preparation of particles and wood fibers (90 hours)

MF0682_2: Particle and fiber board elaboration (120 hours)

MF0683_1: Preparing the particle and fiber board coating (120 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: HANDLING LOADS WITH FORKLIFT TRUCKS

Level: 1

Code: UC0432_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Drive forklift trucks to carry out the movement of goods, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, and under the supervision of responsible personnel.

CR 1.1 The lifting of the forklift truck is performed by checking the performance indicators of the control box, such as oil levels, battery charge, among others.

CR 1.2 The forklift truck is driven using the necessary individual protective equipment and the existing retention systems.

CR 1.3 The displacements are carried out taking into account existing signage and avoiding pedestrian traffic areas.

CR 1.4 The down-slope path is backtracked, not making changes of direction over the slope, to avoid rollover risks.

CR 1.5 The forklift truck is conducted in conditions of visibility and otherwise, the displacement is reversed, making use of the acoustic and luminous warning signals.

CR 1.6 The moves are made with the lowered forks avoiding the risk of center-of-gravity lifting dumps.

CR 1.7 The forklifts are parked in the assigned and authorized zones, removing the contact key and actuating the handbrake, maintaining these clean areas of materials or elements that may pose risks.

RP 2: Carry out the loading or unloading of materials and products for reception, dispatch and storage, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, and under the supervision of the responsible staff.

CR 2.1 The amounts to be delivered or received are checked by verifying at the delivery or receipt order respectively.

CR 2.2 The loading unit (packaging, packaging or containers) is checked by verifying that it does not exhibit any apparent deformations or damage and, if detected, communicate to the responsible personnel.

CR 2.3 Maximum load indications are respected in order not to exceed the forklift capacity limits and ensure stability, avoiding accident hazards in discharge and storage operations.

CR 2.4 The goods are handled using the appropriate means in each case (conventional, retractable, manual or electric truck, stacker, among others) avoiding alterations or damage and taking into account special risks (dangerous atmospheres, dangerous goods, among others).

CR 2.5 The implement is placed depending on its function, when the load movement requires it, not exceeding the load capacity or the resistance of the forks and following instructions from the responsible personnel.

CR 2.6 The loading and unloading of the external means of transport (truck, van, among others) is carried out by ensuring the integrity of the loads and following instructions from the personnel responsible for their placement.

CR 2.7 Manipulated loads are lowered to the ground level before manoeuvring, to avoid risks to the operating personnel and staff of the environment (damage to facilities, dumps, runs, among others).

CR 2.8 The load is deposited in the allocated space or alveolo (shelving or pavement level), placing the forklift at right angle with respect to the shelving or stacked load and with the mast in a vertical position.

RP 3: Supply raw materials and materials for processing in production, as well as remove the generated waste, depositing them in the intended areas and under the supervision of responsible personnel.

CR 3.1 The distribution of raw materials is done using the means established in the production order, in the areas authorized for this purpose, in order to avoid dysfunctions in the process.

CR 3.2 The raw materials are replenished according to production needs and before they are exhausted in the work zone, to avoid stoppages in the process and following instructions from the responsible personnel.

CR 3.3 The generated waste is loaded by checking in advance if they are contaminants, harmful or if they have visible defects, taking the appropriate measures as instructed by the responsible personnel.

CR 3.4 The waste generated is safely transferred and deposited in the areas and, where appropriate, in containers corresponding to the type of waste, in order to avoid contamination of the environment.

RP 4: Perform the first level maintenance of forklifts to ensure their operation, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational, environmental and quality risks, and under the monitoring of responsible personnel.

CR 4.1 First-level maintenance is executed by taking into account the technical documentation of the equipment and the procedures established by the company.

CR 4.2 The status of the wheelbarrow is checked by visual inspection of the undercarriage, lifting equipment, loss of fluids, among others, communicating to the responsible personnel the existence of any anomaly.

CR 4.3 The elements arranged for safe driving and handling such as brakes, tyre condition, lifting system, hydraulic or fuel leakage, acoustic and visual signals, among others, check that they remain in the running state.

CR 4.4 Safety devices and individual protective equipment (belt, helmet, among others) are verified by checking that they remain useful.

CR 4.5 The forklift truck is paralyzed if breakdowns are detected that can affect operation and safe handling by communicating it to its personnel responsible for repair.

CR 4.6 The periodic reviews are collected in the maintenance book informing the staff responsible for the previous performances.

Professional context:

Production media:

Manual carretillo, self-handling, electric or internal combustion engines. Manual forklifts. Containers, packaging and pallets. Shelves suitable for the type of loads. Personal protective equipment. Implements.

Products and results:

Lots and items of raw materials. Semi-processed products prepared for transfer on a machine foot. Finished items prepared for delivery to the customer. Load units carried, placed or stacked.

Information used or generated:

Applicable regulations on handling loads and using forklift work equipment. Applicable rules on prevention of occupational risks. Applicable rules for the management of waste or environmental protection. Orders for movement of goods, goods, transport and/or internal supply. Delivery barns. Coding of materials and products. Manual of use of the machine. Risk identification cards. Documents written and in digital support for the control of movement and transport of materials and products, materials and products in process and classification of warehouse stocks. Maintenance book. Tags. Production orders.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: PREPARE THE PARTICLES AND WOOD FIBERS

Level: 2

Code: UC0681_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Prepare reception, refining and adjustment equipment, of wood particles and fibres, regulating, operating parameters, for the preparation thereof, complying with the applicable risk prevention regulations labor and environmental.

CR 1.1 Information on the preparation of wood particles and fibres is obtained from the application and process techniques to be developed.

CR 1.2 The tools for preparing particles and wood fibres are selected according to the characteristics of the wood.

CR 1.3 The input speed of the equipment used in the preparation of wood particles and fibers is adjusted according to the characteristics of the wood.

CR 1.4 The parameters of the grinding equipment, (feed speed, engine speed, hammers situation), are adjusted, as set out in the preparation of particles and fibers.

CR 1.5 The parameters of the splinter and vitriated machines (sharpening and pressure of blades, feeding speed, turning of cutting elements, among others), are adjusted, as set out in the preparation of particles and fibers, determining the rate of material input.

CR 1.6 The preheating parameters of the splinters (vaporized pressure, temperature, cooking time), to soften them are adjusted, as set out in the preparation of particles and fibers.

CR 1.7 The tilting and vitriated tools are selected according to the type of wood to be processed.

RP 2: Perform the first-level maintenance operations of machines and equipment used in the reception and preparation of wood particles and fibers to prevent production interruptions, complying with the regulations applicable.

CR 2.1 The first level maintenance of the equipment and auxiliary means required in the preparation of wood particles and fibres (grinding mills, splinters, vitriators, refining mills, digesters of the defibrated, defibrated grinders, among others), it is carried out, in the form and periodicity indicated in the manuals of use, following the guidelines marked in the instructions of work regarding the form and with the periodicity required.

CR 2.2 Possible elements specified as first level, worn, deteriorated or possible operating anomalies, used in the preparation of particles and wood fibres (splinter, vitriated, ground, sifted, refining, defibrated, among others), are detected.

CR 2.3 The tuning of the wood-cutting and cutting machines is done by adjusting the different parameters (feed speed, rotation speed).

CR 2.4 Uncut and Tronked tools are selected, according to the wood to be processed, verifying that they are operational and do not cause damage to the materials.

CR 2.5 The first-level maintenance and replacement operations of elements of the metal detection, splinter, vitriolic, grinding, sifting, refining, defibrating and transport equipment are carried out in accordance with the technical documentation, complying with applicable regulations.

CR 2.6 The prepared roll wood is transported with the appropriate means stored in the established locations, controlling that the minimum stock levels are maintained, following the established production plan.

CR 2.7 Parts or elements specified as first level, broken or defective in equipment and machines (grinding mills, splinters, vitriators, refining mills, digesters of defibrillate, mills In the case of dust-up, among others), used in the preparation of wood particles and fibres are replaced, in compliance with the applicable rules.

CR 2.8 The documentation referred to the first level maintenance performed, is recorded for the incident history, on the established support.

CR 2.9 The report of failures detected in the first-level maintenance of equipment that exceeds its level of competence, is transmitted to the responsible personnel or maintenance service.

RP 3: Make the collection and storage of materials to obtain prepared wood particles and fibers, controlling their quality, complying with applicable regulations.

CR 3.1 The raw material (wood on roll, chips, waste or recycled wood), required in the preparation of prepared wood particles and fibres, is located in the stacking yard, using the means of transport expected, complying with applicable regulations.

CR 3.2 The quantity and quality of the wood received according to the requested levels, is checked, rejecting those items that do not meet the required levels.

CR 3.3 The reception and cubity of the wood in roll, chips and wood residues, is carried out, using the measuring utensils, assessing its quality according to the percentage of moisture and bark or other products, granulometry of the vipath, sawdust, and splinters, among others.

CR 3.4 The place of storage of the roll wood is prepared, assigning the place according to the characteristics of each item received.

CR 3.5 The inputs and outputs of the raw material in the stack yard are recorded manually or in computerised form for their control, allowing to know the status of the stocks and informing the responsible of supply the the extent of the minimum levels.

CR 3.6 The raw material (wood in roll, chips and wood waste) is classified according to the state and characteristics of the same (dimensions, species, content of bark, presence of metallic elements), set in the production orders, assigning the means of transport of the raw material, as well as the shape and place of storage.

CR 3.7 The raw material is stacked, with the means allocated (forklift trucks, cranes, loading blades, blondines), without causing damage, optimizing the movement of material, minimizing time and travel.

CR 3.8 The stacking yard is checked, verifying the operation of the drainage channels, drainage mouths and the absence of waste, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

RP 4: Prepare roll wood, to obtain particles and fibers, as required in the production process, in compliance with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CR 4.1 The possible metal elements of wood are detected with the metal detector arc, apart from those that present metal parts to prevent damage to the cutting equipment.

CR 4.2 The prepared roll wood is transported with the required means, stored in the established locations, controlling the minimum stock levels, following the established production plan, complying with the regulations Applicable to the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 4.3 The roll wood is prepared, by means of the uncut and ground operations with the established machines, making the adjustment of the parameters of the same with the feeding of the wood, following the plan of established production and complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 4.4 The bark of the logs and other by-products is evacuated in such a way that no disruption occurs and the applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards are met.

RP 5: The chips and chips are obtained, by grinding the recycled raw material, by adjusting the required equipment to the material input speed to the needs of the production process, avoiding jams.

CR 5.1 The chips and chips are obtained by grinding the recycled raw material, adjusting the required equipment to the material input speed to the needs of the production process, avoiding jams.

CR 5.2 The chips produced are selected, using the metal element separation equipment, verifying that there are no interruptions and complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and occupational risks. environmental.

CR 5.3 The chips and chips are stored in the specified places, avoiding the use of the same as interruptions, according to the production orders, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and occupational risks. environmental.

CR 5.4 The produced chips and chips are transported with the means of transport set for such an end to the splint silos.

RP 6: Perform the operations of refining and adjusting wood particles or fibers, classifying them, according to the size required to obtain wooden boards, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental.

CR 6.1 The condition and sharpening of the elements of the ground equipment, refined and defibrated, is checked, prior to the start of the manufacturing and refining operations of particles and fibres to obtain products with the quality set.

CR 6.2 The position of the blades and blades (angles of the blades and position against blades) and the separation of the defibrated and calibrated discs, are regulated, according to the size of the particles and fibers, complying with the the applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards.

CR 6.3 The parameters of the preheating operation of the chips (vaporization pressure, temperature and cooking time) are regulated, as established in the production process to soften them, facilitating the production of fibres, complying with the applicable rules.

CR 6.4 The particle and fiber grinding equipment is fed with the splinters, controlling the flow according to established production plan.

CR 6.5 The wood particles or fibres are separated according to their dimensions by sifting, checking the return of the particles or coarse fibres to the refining or defibrating ground equipment.

CR 6.6 Wood particles and fibers are dried, proceeding to the regulation of parameters (temperature, injection flow, device activity, wet air evacuation, among others).

CR 6.7 The particles and fibers are moved in the different types of dryers, controlling the moisture content to fit the specified.

Professional context:

Production media:

Descortezators. Tronzadoras. Measurement tools (graduated rules, tapes, forcipolas, scales, volumeters, crabs). Metal arches, electromagnets. Grinding mills, splinters, vitriators. Refiner mills, digesters of defibrate. Defibrated mills. Burners and boilers, particle or fibre dryers, classification screens. Silos, pneumatic transports. Means of transport (forklift trucks, crane trucks, loading shovels, blondines).

Products and results:

Preparation of equipment for reception, refining and adjustment of particles and wood fibres. First-level maintenance operations of the machines and equipment used. Collection and storage of materials required for obtaining particles and wood fibres. Roll wood prepared to obtain particles and fibers. Processed raw material, as well as the recycled raw material of other processes. Operations of refining and adjustment of wood particles or fibres.

Information used or generated:

Production Orders. Production plan. Albaranes. Product entry and exit statistics. Technical manuals. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Equipment maintenance tabs.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: BUILD PARTICLE AND FIBER BOARDS

Level: 2

Code: UC0682_2

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Organize the work area of particle board and wood fibers, preparing the required tools and conditioning the surface, to initiate the process, complying with the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 1.1 Information on the processing of particle board and wood fibres is obtained from the application and process techniques to be developed.

CR 1.2 Tools, machines and equipment (mixing of adhesives, glers, formers, among others), used in the manufacture of particle board and fibre, are prepared from the application technical sheets, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks.

CR 1.3 The work area for the manufacture of particle board and wood fibres is conditioned, in such a way as to comply with the requirements of the working instructions and the applicable regulations.

RP 2: Perform the first-level maintenance operations of machines and equipment used in the manufacture of particle board and wood fibres to prevent production interruptions, complying with the regulations Applicable to the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 2.1 The first level maintenance of equipment and auxiliary means required in the manufacture of particle board and wood fibres is carried out in the form and periodicity indicated in the use manuals, following the guidelines set out in the work instructions for the required form and periodicity.

CR 2.2 The operation of equipment and auxiliary means (mixing of adhesives, gluing, forming, among others), required in the process of making particle board and fiber, is checked, following the guidelines marked in the equipment maintenance work instructions.

CR 2.3 Possible operating anomalies in equipment used in the manufacture of particle board and fibre (adhesive mixers, formers, sizing machines, laminar presses, particle transport equipment, etc.) fibers, among others), are detected, according to equipment maintenance instructions.

CR 2.4 The parts or elements specified as the first level of manta formation elements and particle and fiber transport equipment are replaced in accordance with the applicable maintenance plan.

CR 2.5 Possible bottlenecks in the manufacture of particle board and fibre by impurities in adhesive application equipment are removed periodically, in compliance with the applicable regulations.

CR 2.6 Simple failures affecting the operation of equipment are corrected, following maintenance indications.

CR 2.7 The documentation referred to the first level maintenance performed, is recorded for the incident history, on the established support.

CR 2.8 The report of failures detected in the first level maintenance of equipment that exceeds its level of competence is transmitted to the responsible personnel or maintenance service.

RP 3: Make the collection and storage of raw materials (particles and fibers) and auxiliary products, to obtain particle boards and wood fibers, controlling their quality by complying with the applicable rules of prevention occupational risks and the environment.

CR 3.1 The raw materials (particles, fibers, among others) and auxiliaries (adhesives, resins, among others), are received by means of the unloading and stacked operations with the required means of transport, controlling the level of stocks and reporting to the supply officer, as determined in the production process, in compliance with the applicable regulations.

CR 3.2 The quality of the raw materials and auxiliary products received and their suitability with the specifications specified in the documentation of reception (apbarans, note of purchases, order sheets, among others) and the requirements of the production process for particle board and fiber panels, are checked, rejecting those items that do not comply with the established levels, as determined in the production process of particle board and fibers.

CR 3.3 The reception products (raw and auxiliary materials, among others) are stored, in the places required in the production orders, by checking the environmental conditions according to their characteristics (application, physical status and expiration date).

CR 3.4 The inputs and outputs of the raw and auxiliary materials, among others, required in the process of making particle board and fibers, are recorded, according to the system established in the company.

RP 4: Encolar the particles or wood fibers, controlling characteristics of the adhesive to obtain particle board with the physical and mechanical characteristics established in the production process, complying with the regulations Applicable to the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 4.1 The adhesive is prepared and selected according to the type of board, controlling the proportions of the components (resin, hardener and additives) to be provided by the dispenser and by verifying the levels of the food, complying with applicable regulations.

CR 4.2 The pH and the 'gelling' times of the adhesive are checked periodically, verifying that they conform to the established values and rejecting those items that do not meet the required levels.

CR 4.3 The quality of the prepared adhesive is controlled by sending a sample of the adhesive to the laboratory, checking after the report submitted by the laboratory that the quality and proportions of the components (resin, hardener, ), are in accordance with the requirements of the production process for the manufacture of fibreboard, otherwise it is discarded.

CR 4.4 The wood particles or fibres are wrapped with the filling machine, controlling the feeding of these and the pressure of the adhesive sprayers, achieving the density of the veil of particles and fibers inside. of the adhesive and the flow of adhesive at the required levels, complying with the applicable regulations.

CR 4.5 The particulate matter or fibers are transported to the formator with the means established for this purpose, preventing the formation of apelmazations.

RP 5: Regular the formation equipment of the blanket of particles or cast fibers, adjusting parameters to obtain a homogeneous distribution of the particle blanket.

CR 5.1 The particle and fibre dispersers and veil trainers of the blanket formation equipment (air speed, speed of the rolling rollers) are adjusted to obtain the gradient of particles or fibres required, along the thickness of the board and the specified weight of the blanket.

CR 5.2 The weight of the blanket and the homogeneity of the supplied mantle of particles or fibers are evaluated by periodic sampling at different points of the outlet mouth, proving that the particle or fiber gradient in its The bulk remains constant, complying with applicable regulations.

RP 6: Provide the particle or fiber blanket to manufacture the raw board with the characteristics defined in the production process, complying with the applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

CR 6.1 The speed of the board manufacturing line fits the press times of the board to be manufactured.

CR 6.2 Prepressing is performed according to the type of board to be manufactured, guaranteeing the percentage of precompression of the blanket, facilitating its pressing.

CR 6.3 The loading and unloading of the particle or fiber blanket is controlled in the press loader systems, complying with applicable regulations.

CR 6.4 The moisture of the blanket at the press entry is evaluated by periodic sampling, checking that it conforms to the specified limits and rejecting those items that do not meet the required levels.

CR 6.5 The 'prepress' and the temperature, pressure and time pressing parameters, among others, of the different sections, are checked, verifying the coincidence of the established theoretical pressing cycle, the separation of the Press bands with the thickness of board to be manufactured.

CR 6.6 The uniformity and thickness of the pressed board are evaluated, by periodic sampling, to detect possible irregularities.

CR 6.7 Possible irregularities of the pressed board are evaluated, controlling uniformity and thickness, by periodic sampling.

CR 6.8 The boards are introduced into the cooler by verifying that no jams or any other irregularities occur.

Professional context:

Production media:

adhesive mixer. Gluing. Formadora. Dispenser. Laminar presses. Board cooler; measuring tools (king foot, scales, hygrometers, thermometers and timers among others).

Products and results:

Organized area for the work of making particle board and wood fibers. First-level maintenance operations of the machines and equipment used. Collection and storage of raw materials (particles and fibres) and auxiliary products. Gluing of particles or wood fibres. Regulation of the formation of the blanket of particles or cast fibres. Crude boards.

Information used or generated:

Production Orders. Technical application sheets on products. Fact sheets for production in the manufacture of particle board and wood fibres. Product entry and exit statistics. Technical manuals. Purchase Notes. Supplier orders. Albaranes. Technical documentation machinery. Applicable rules on safety and the environment. Equipment maintenance tabs.

COMPETITION UNIT 4: FINISH AND COAT PARTICLE AND FIBER BOARDS

Level: 1

Code: UC0683_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Perform basic first-level maintenance operations on equipment to finish and coat particle and fiber boards, complying with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations, following instructions.

CR 1.1 The tools, materials, and accessories usable in the machine or equipment to finish and coat particle and fiber boards, saws, livers, cooler, continuous and discontinuous pressing equipment, among others, prepare, by making simple mounts, keeping them operational.

CR 1.2 The simple and interchangeable elements of the machine or equipment to finish and coat particle and fiber boards and others are adjusted, checking that there is no slack.

CR 1.3 The simple and interchangeable elements of machines or equipment, used to finish and coat particle and fibre boards are cleaned, checking that no debris remains, complying with the applicable regulations of occupational, safety and environmental risks.

CR 1.4 The operation of machines or equipment, used to finish and coat particle and fiber boards, are checked, detecting possible anomalies, reporting to the superior responsible, to possible anomalies in each shift, day, or change of lots.

CR 1.5 Tools and tools used in cleaning and maintenance such as rags, spatulas, fixed keys, screwdrivers, oil, oil and other, are ordered, as set.

CR 1.6 The tuning of the machines to finish and coat particle and fiber boards is performed, considering the selection of the tools, their sharpening and fixing parameters according to the product to be obtained, complying with the applicable rules on occupational risks, safety and the environment.

CR 1.7 The records and annotations of maintenance operations on equipment used to finish and coat particle and fiber boards are performed on the established support.

RP 2: Cool freshly pressed wood boards, controlling physical parameters to maintain the required quality, complying with applicable labor and environmental risk prevention regulations, following instructions.

CR 2.1 The loading and unloading of the boards in the cooler is carried out without producing deformations or breakages on the boards, complying with the applicable regulations.

CR 2.2 The cooling time is obtained from predetermined values depending on the type of board to cool and considering different parameters (thickness of the board and pressing temperature among others).

CR 2.3 The coordination of the speed of work is maintained on the line without breakages.

RP 3: Perform the operations of squadron, sanding and calibrating, among others, wooden boards, classifying them according to quality, complying with the applicable regulations of prevention of occupational risks and environment, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The state of the saws (teeth, trisking, hardener treatment of the tips), is verified to perform the cut operation with the required quality.

CR 3.2 The cut-off parameters (saw speed, feed speed, angle of attack, saw tooth), are adjusted, depending on the properties of the species that form the board (hardness) and the position of the Squadron saws to size the board.

CR 3.3 The sandgrain, the type of support and the abrasive, are selected, depending on the type of wood and the final quality required, periodically checking their condition and adjusting the calibration equipment to the bulk. specified.

CR 3.4 The uniformity and accuracy of the calibration of the sanded surfaces are checked periodically, rejecting those that do not comply with the established specifications and classifying each board according to the qualities defined.

CR 3.5 The final quality of the boards is examined, separating those that present defects (stains, colorations, irregularities of the particles, burns) according to the company's rules and the production plan. set.

RP 4: Coating particle board or raw fiber with adhesive, for finishing, controlling the quality, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational risks and the environment, following instructions.

CR 4.1 The boards are impregnated with adhesive, checking the uniformity in the application and the amount of adhesive applied.

CR 4.2 The attachment of the coating to the base board is performed, considering the visual characteristics of the coating material, in compliance with the applicable regulations.

CR 4.3 The pressing parameters (temperature, pressure and time) are checked, which coincide with the established theoretical pressing cycle and that the separation of the plates or the bands is the required one to the thickness of the board coat.

CR 4.4 The speed of the line is adjusted to that of the press times of the board to be manufactured, controlling the power of the particle board or the fibers and the coatings or the coils.

CR 4.5 The quality of the coated boards is evaluated, separating those that present defects (laminate breaks, uncoated areas, stains, irregularities).

Professional context:

Production media:

Cooling. Presses and press downloaders. Finishing machines and coating of boards. Squads. Calibrators. Sanders. Measurement tools.

Products and results:

Simple adjustment and assembly operations of interchangeable elements in machines and equipment to finish and coat particle and fiber boards. Support operations in the basic operations of cleaning, maintenance and commissioning of equipment. Freshly pressed wood boards, cooled. Operations of machining of wooden boards. Particle board or of raw, coated fibres.

Information used or generated:

Production Orders. Product entry and exit statistics. Technical manuals. Supplier orders. Production plans. Applicable rules on the prevention of occupational risks and the environment.

TRAINING MODULE 1: HANDLING LOADS WITH FORKLIFT TRUCKS

Level: 1

Code: MF0432_1

Associated with UC: Manipulate loads with forklift trucks

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Apply forklift driving techniques by performing conventional operations and basic maneuvers.

CE1.1 Localize the situation of the driving controls of the wheelbarrows and the control indicators, describing the function that each one plays.

CE1.2 Describe the different points to be checked for starting the forklift truck.

CE1.3 Recognize the risks arising from the handling of forklift trucks and the means and equipment used, identifying them.

CE1.4 Identify the normalized signals that delimit the specific zones of work and movement, interpreting each one.

CE1.5 Identify the light and acoustic signals to be carried by the wheelbarrows, relating them to their typology and location.

CE1.6 Explain the basic conditions of load stability and dump possibilities depending on the maneuver.

CE1.7 Recognize the operations to be performed for the parking of the forklift truck and for the maintenance of the obstacle-free space.

CE1.8 In a scenario of driving forklift trucks, from technical specifications:

-Check the performance indicators.

-Running the machine.

-Drive the machine without loading and perform the specified maneuvers.

-Raise and lower the fork.

-Parking the specified place and leave it out of operation.

C2: Apply loading and unloading techniques for forklift trucks by carrying out the reception, dispatch and storage with different goods.

CE2.1 Identify the basic ways to constitute the load units.

CE2.2 Explain the conditions to be met by packaging or packaging to constitute the load unit.

CE2.3 Identify and classify the different types of palettes and explain the fundamental applications of the palettes.

CE2.4 Explain the variations in the load weight performance mobilized, depending on the volume utilization available, depending on the shapes of the products or their packaging.

CE2.5 In a practical case of handling materials and products properly characterized:

-Interpret the information provided.

-Locate the physical situation of the load.

-Check that packaging, packaging, as well as materials or products meet security conditions.

-Check that the selected small metal container or palette type is best suited for handling and transporting the load unit, under security conditions.

C3: Interpreting and implementing regulations on the prevention of occupational risks and the health of workers.

CE3.1 Recognize the risks derived from manual handling of loads: object falls, contusions, lifting positions, repetitive overefforts, fractures, musculoskeletal injuries, and others.

CE3.2 Recognize the risks arising from the management of automatic machines and traction or thrust, such as: entrapments, cuts, overefforts, repetitive positional fatigue, torsions, vibrations, noise, gases, and others.

CE3.3 Distinguished individual protection equipment (E.P.I.) types appropriate to each risk.

CE3.4 Identify action measures in emergency situations.

CE3.5 Before a simulated load, transport and download scenario, perfectly defined:

-Identify the most appropriate personal protective equipment.

-Recognize the risks derived from load handling.

-Identify the risks arising from the transport, the stow/esestiba, stacked/off load.

-Detailed possible emergency situations that may be presented.

C4: Interpret the symbology used in the environment and transport paths.

CE4.1 List the duties, rights and rules of conduct of persons handling and transporting loads.

CE4.2 Identify the mandatory signals and information boards that reference the load, as well as other information symbols to be carried by the cart.

CE4.3 Identify and interpret the standardised signals to be defined by the specific areas of work, those reserved for pedestrians and others on the roads; and to act in accordance with the limitations of the warehouse, in case of handling indoors.

CE4.4 Identify the light and acoustic signals to be carried by the wheelbarrows, relating them to their standard typology and location.

C5: Identify the elements of the intended machines for safe driving, as well as the first-level maintenance operations.

CE5.1 Interpret on forklifts (or mockups) controls, systems and driving and handling elements; as well as fuel indicators, battery charge level and others included in the control board of the forklift.

CE5.2 Interpret the instructions in the maintenance manual, the operations that correspond to a primary level of the maintenance manual.

CE5.3 Identify those anomalies that, affecting safe driving or handling, must be communicated for immediate repair and may cause the forklift to be stopped.

CE5.4 In a scenario where the wheelbarrow charges anomalies:

-Detect failures.

-Identify those that have their possible origin in manufacturing or maintenance defects.

-Determine if there are breakdowns whose repair exceeds their responsibility and must be the object of communication to whom it corresponds.

-Perform maintenance operations that correspond to your level of responsibility.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 with respect to CE1.8; C2 with respect to CE2.8; C3 with respect to CE3.5; C4 with respect to CE4.6.

Other capabilities:

Maintain the work area with the degree of order and cleanliness required by the organization.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Finish the job based on criteria of suitability, speed, economy and effectiveness.

Interpret and execute the work instructions.

Respect the organization's internal procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Wheelbarrow handling and driving

Locating the items in the cart.

Machine handling: Guideline axis. Pre-set check-up. Start and stop of the wheelbarrow. Manoeuvres with and without load. Extraordinary maneuvers. Braking, starting and stopping the equipment.

Safety in handling: transport and lifting of the load.

Site signaling and transit system.

Personal protection equipment.

Transverse and Longitudinal Dump: How to avoid them.

Access/drop of the truck: use of the restraint system, cab, seat belt.

Circulation: displacement speed, path, floor nature, state of the floor, among others.

2. Loading and unloading of materials

Load unit.

Interaction between the center of gravity of the load and the center of the cart.

Lost and loaded truck stability loss.

Conventional counterbalance truck support triangle.

Dynamic and static behavior of the loaded and unloaded truck: excessive speed, overload, poorly placed load, accelerations, incorrect maneuvers.

Notions of balance. Types. Load charts.

Leverage law enforcement.

Load severity center: elementary concept and simple methods for your determination.

Usage of accessories.

Load and unload operations: Transportation media, shelving, and others.

3. Handling loads

Palletizing systems. Types of pallets.

Containers, drums, and others.

stacked and removed from loads.

Special holds.

Transportation precautions in special environments (chemical, explosive, and other industries).

Dangerous goods.

4. Forklift maintenance

Basic maintenance operations: visual inspection, first-level maintenance.

Thermal engine.

Electric engine.

Main items of manual trucks.

Main elements of fork lift trucks.

Lift system.

Types of masts, forks, hydraulic cylinders, forks and others.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1.-Domain of knowledge and techniques related to handling loads with forklift trucks, which will be accredited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Qualifications Framework for Higher Education) or other higher-level academic training related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of three years in the field of competencies related to this training module

2.-Accredited pedagogical competence according to what the competent administrations establish.

TRAINING MODULE 2: PREPARATION OF WOOD PARTICLES AND FIBRES

Level: 2

Code: MF0681_2

Associated with UC: Preparing Particles And Wood Fibers

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Relate the characteristics of the wood with the obtention of particles and fibers.

CE1.1 Describe the main properties of the woods by linking their features with their applications on boards.

CE1.2 Recognize the physical and chemical changes that occur in the stacking of woods, chips, and sawdust.

CE1.3 Differentiate and recognize the main types of wood by class (conifera and leafy) and by their hardness.

CE1.4 Relate the influence of hardness, humidity, and wood class with the obtention of chips, particles, and fibers.

CE1.5 Recognize the products that are obtained after the wood is prepared: crushed chips, splinter splinter, chip, sawdust, particles, fibers, and dust.

CE1.6 Differentiate the specific surface (surface of the particles in a given weight) from each type of product prepared and the influence it has on the adhesive dosage.

CE1.7 Explain the influence of the sveliness of the particles in the resistance of the board.

CE1.8 Select the wood based on the size and type of shredding to be performed.

C2: Perform first-level preparation and maintenance operations of machines and equipment used in the reception and preparation of wood particles and fibres.

CE2.1 Contrasting the operation of auxiliary equipment and means, required for the reception and preparation of wood particles and fibres.

CE2.2 In a practical first-level maintenance scenario, of the machines and equipment used in the reception and preparation of wood particles and fibres, on the basis of given conditions:

-Identify possible operating failures in equipment required for the reception and preparation of wood particles and fibers, acting according to equipment maintenance instructions.

-Change parts or items specified as first-level, in bad condition (broken or defective) on equipment and machines used in the reception and preparation of wood particles and fibers.

-Verify periodically that there are no jams caused by impurities in the equipment.

-Solve small anomalies that affect the operation of the required equipment in the reception and preparation of wood particles and fibers.

-Set a record with first-level maintenance performed, for incident history.

-Detect incidents that exceed their level of competence, communicating failures to responsible personnel, using a report.

C3: Control the particle preparation material and wood fibers in the park.

CE3.1 Relate the different phases of the receiving process, classified from the raw material.

CE3.2 Describe the type and necessary spaces for the storage and handling of the receiving material.

CE3.3 Relate the machines, tools and instruments required in the classification of wood (rules, forcipolas, hygrometers, scales).

CE3.4 Describe the download and transport equipment of materials by linking them to their applications.

CE3.5 Explain the risks associated with materials, products, waste and their storage, their toxicity, degree of flammability and solubility, according to applicable regulations.

CE3.6 In a practical material reception scenario, given the following conditions:

-Cubicar wood (actual and apparent volume), determining its weight by scales, its volume, moisture content by hygrometers or by weight after drying stove and the percentage of bark by decutting of a sample.

-Determine the weight of waste and recyclable materials and their moisture by hygrometers or by weight after drying stove and their quality by sampling and analysis.

-Identify the basic documents used in the control of material entries, associating them with their purpose.

C4: Apply uncortezled and tronked technologies.

CE4.1 Explain the process of decutting, indicating its purpose and specifying the characteristics of the equipment used in particle board and fiber factories.

CE4.2 Describe the tronzado process, indicating its purpose and specifying the required equipment, the size of the trotches, depending on their characteristics of the wood and the equipment of vitriol and splinter.

CE4.3 Identify the risks associated with decutting and tronking, as applicable regulations.

CE4.4 In a practical, uncortezable and tronked case of a wooden game, given the given conditions:

-Determine the tools to use according to the wood to process.

-Select the means of transport of required materials and machines.

-Adjust the parameters of the uncorked and tronked machines with the power of the wood.

-Store the bark of the logs and other byproducts.

C5: Get particles and fibers, regulating the parameters of the machines, complying with applicable regulations.

CE5.1 In a practical scenario of parameter regulation, in obtaining particles and fibers from given conditions:

-Assign to each type of machine (shredder, splinter, vitriator, refining mill, pre-defibrated and defibrated digester) the tools to be used and their characteristics (cutting angles, distance to the pressure bars).

-Assign the parameters (dimension, spin speed, feed speed, line alignment, steam pressure, steam temperature) to the different machines depending on the characteristics of the wood and the Equipment capabilities, where it is checked by the commissioning tests.

C6: Perform first-level maintenance operations, machines and equipment used in the reception and preparation of wood particles and fibers, complying with applicable regulations.

CE6.1 In a practical first-level maintenance scenario of the machines and equipment used in the reception and preparation of wood particles and fibres, given the following conditions:

-Perform the first level maintenance of equipment and auxiliary media required in the preparation of particles and wood fibres (grinding mills, splinters, vitriators, refining mills, prepared digesters of the defibrated, defibrated mills, among others), in the form and periodicity indicated in the manuals of use, following the guidelines marked with respect to form and with the required periodicity, complying with the applicable regulations.

-Defer any specified first-level, spent, deteriorated, or operating failure elements to be observed in equipment and machines used in the preparation of wood particles and fibers.

-Monitor the state and sharpening of ground, refined and defibrated equipment to perform the manufacturing and refining operations of particles and fibers with the required quality.

-Change parts or items specified as first-level, in bad condition (broken or defective) on equipment and machines used in the preparation of wood particles and fibers.

-Set a record with first-level maintenance performed, for incident history.

-Identify failures that exceed your level of competence, communicating to responsible personnel, using a report.

C7: Apply particle and fiber preparation and screening techniques, operating the equipment.

CE7.1 Explain the risks associated with the preparation and screening of fiber particles, complying with applicable regulations.

CE7.2 In a scenario of preparation and screening of particles and fibers, given the following conditions:

-By diestrously placing the tools and tools on the machines by adjusting the set parameters.

-Monitor the operation of the equipment by visual analysis of the particles and fibres produced and the correct auditory and visual perception of the engines.

-Dispose the sieves in the required enclosure, according to the established work schedule.

-Select the correct speeds in the input systems depending on the characteristics of the wood to be machined.

-Check the percentage of fine and coarse that are obtained, communicating when this percentage deviates from what is expected.

-Control the condition of the sieve maintenance, making the change of the screens, when due to dirt or other circumstances it does not perform the intended function with quality.

C8: Regular the parameters of the boilers and the particle and fiber dryers, adjusting them until the values are obtained.

CE8.1 Recognize the influence of moisture from the fibers and particles in the quality of the manufacturing process.

CE8.2 Differentiate the drying systems of particles and fibers, relating them to the quality of the products obtained.

CE8.3 Discriminating the variables that influence the drying of the particles and fibers (material size, initial and final moisture of the wood, type of wood class, quantity of wood to be dried per unit of time), the parameters of boilers (type and quantity of fuel, draught, temperature, air flow in the exchangers), and dryers (feed speed, speed of circulation of the particles or fibres and temperature).

CE8.4 In a practical, particle-and fiber-drying case, in the face of a certain moisture and particle size (interior or exterior):

-Determine the final humidity to be obtained.

-Set the temperature of the dryer.

-Regular the input flow of the particles.

-Regular the time of the particles in the dryer.

-Evaluate the temperature and humidity controls of the dryer and the particle during drying.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 with respect to CE2.2; C3 with respect to CE3.6; C4 with respect to CE4.4; C5 complete; C6 for CE6.2; C7 for CE7.2; C8 for CE8.4.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the correct production rules.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Prove a good professional.

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Contents:

1. Collection and storage of wood materials for the preparation of wood particles and fibres

Characterization of the wood in roll according to groups of species (coniferous and leafy, hard and soft), of the sawdust, viruta, splinter, coastal and cuttings of sawmill, cylinder, and wood of recycling (containers, pallets).

Cubication of wood. Measure in apparent volume (stereo) and in real volume. Apparent weight. Calculation. Cubication of wood in roll. Techniques, equipment (scales, forcidomes, tape metrics). Cubication of sawdust, shavings, chips, coastal, cuttings and other waste and recycling material. Techniques and equipment.

Receipt compliance. Cases of non-compliance and actions. Classification of materials and products at reception. Criteria (quality of wood, hazard of products, destination, size).

Encoding and marking of materials and products received. Systems. Storage. Types. Features.

Spaces and premises for storage of wood on roll, chips, chips, sawdust, coastal and recycled material. Internal handling and transportation of materials and products. Systems and equipment. Applicable rules. Warehouse planning and organization.

Distribution and location. Stacked. Storage costs.

Damage and defects in materials and products derived from storage. Causes. Consequences. Corrections.

Documentation. Documents. Types. Interpretation. Applications. The destination of the warehouse documents.

2. First-level maintenance operations of machinery and equipment for the preparation of wood particles and fibres

Detection of faults of machines used in the preparation of wood particles and fibres. Machines, equipment, tools and tools. Wear of parts. Control levels. Type failures.

Maintenance of used equipment.

Machines, equipment, tools, tools.

Typology of faults in the sheet extraction systems. Various causes that determine problems in the systems. Instrumental testing and visual testing.

Replacing parts or items of used machinery.

Machines, equipment, tools, tools. Slatching, grinding and defibrating system. Commissioning.

Regulation of the machinery system used.

Machines, equipment, tools, tools. Failure correction. Performance protocols, communications at higher levels.

Documentation on machines and equipment used in the preparation of particles and wood fibres. Book maintenance machines. Protocol update. Production orders. Incident sheet. Technical manuals for machines and tools. The company's maintenance plan.

3. Uncut and tronked wood, crushed and defibrated technologies

Uncut from wood. Techniques. Purpose.

Descortezators and tronzators: Types, description, operation, and first-level maintenance.

Grinding and electromagnets for separating metal elements. Purpose. Technology. Types of shredders (first-level description, operation and maintenance). Size and shape of chips obtained. Useful for grinding, first level maintenance. Electromagnets Purpose and techniques.

vitriators. Purpose. Technology. Size and shape of the shavings. Types, description, first-level operation and maintenance). Shavings. Cutting tools, first-level maintenance.

Astillers. Purpose. Technology. Size and shape of the splinters. First-level types, description, operation and maintenance. Chips. Cutting tools, first-level maintenance.

defibrators. Purpose. Techniques. Defibrators or digesters (types, description, operation and maintenance of first level). Preparation of the fibres, types and operation.

Particle refining mills. Purpose. Technology. Size and shape of the particles. First-level types, description, operation and maintenance. Particles. Cutting tools, first-level maintenance.

Rules applicable to the decutting and tronking of wood.

4. Classification, storage and drying of particles and fibres

Particle and fiber classification. Purpose. Techniques. Types of classifiers. Particle and fibre classification equipment: sieves and other sorting machines. First-level features and maintenance.

Storage. Silos. Features, description, applications.

Dust removal equipment. Cyclones and filters. First-level operation and maintenance.

Transport of particles and fibers. Equipment: description and operation. Advantages and disadvantages. First-level maintenance.

drying techniques. Purpose. Technology. Boilers (types, description, operation and first level maintenance).

Types of particles and fibers. First-level operation and maintenance.

Waste treatment. Waste generated in the manufacture of panels. Collection, transport and storage of waste in the factory. Systems and media. Treatment, use and discharge of waste. Methods and means used. Regulations.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of wood particles and fibres, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

FORMATIVE MODULE 3: MANUFACTURE OF PARTICLE BOARD AND FIBER

Level: 2

Code: MF0682_2

Associate to UC: Elaborate particle and fiber boards

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Organize the work area of particle board and wood fibers.

CE1.1 Establish the planning of procedures in the manufacture of particle board and fiber, with the information obtained in the application technical sheets on the products and the process to be developed.

CE1.2 Select tools, machines and equipment (adhesive mixer, strainer, forming, among others), required in the manufacture of particle board and fiber, using the application technical sheets.

CE1.3 Determine the tools, machines, equipment, in the production processes of particle board and fiber (gluing of the particles, formation of the particle blanket, pressing of the particle blanket, among others), using the application technical tabs.

CE1.4 To prepare the job, according to the procedures established in the production sheet on the manufacture of particle board and wood fibres, so that the hygienic and sanitary conditions of the installations and machinery are maintained, in accordance with the requirements laid down in the working instructions and regulations in force.

C2: Perform first-level maintenance operations, machines and equipment used in the process of making particle board and wood fibers.

CE2.1 Contrasting the operation of the equipment and auxiliary means (mixing of adhesives, gluing, forming among others), required in the process of making particle board and fibers, following the marked guidelines in the equipment maintenance work instructions.

CE2.2 In a practical first-level maintenance scenario, of the machines and equipment used in the process of making particle board and wood fibres, from given conditions:

-Identify possible operating anomalies in the equipment required in particle board and fiber processing processes, acting according to equipment maintenance instructions.

-Change parts or items specified as first-level, in bad condition (broken or defective) on equipment and machines used in the processing of particle board and wood fibers.

-periodically verify that there are no impurity jams on the adhesive application equipment, used in the manufacture of particle board and fiber, carrying out their removal if necessary.

-Solve small anomalies that affect the operation of the required equipment in particle board and fiber processing processes.

-Set a record with first-level maintenance performed, for incident history.

-Detect incidents that exceed their level of competence, communicating failures to responsible personnel, using a report.

C3: Relating the products obtained with the processes followed, machinery, equipment and materials involved in the manufacture of particle boards and fibers.

CE3.1 Defend major particle and fiber board manufacturing processes (dry cycle and wet cycle).

CE3.2 Recognize the main products that are obtained (by the disposition of the particles or fibers; the type of sizing; manufacturing and destination system).

CE3.3 Relate the main parameters to be applied to the machines, depending on the type of machining and the characteristics of the material to be machined.

CE3.4 Differentiate the main types of dashboards by their composition and quality.

CE3.5 Specify the spaces for manufacturing, indicating environmental conditions, complying with applicable regulations.

C4: Prepare adhesives based on the particles or fibers to be attached and the properties to be achieved on the boards.

CE4.1 Recognize the main types of resins, their properties and applications, and the function of hardeners and additives.

CE4.2 In a convenient preparation of the adhesive, from given conditions:

-Check the level.

-Fill in the deposits of the various components of the adhesive.

-Regular the different dosages of the mixture.

-Select the adhesives and modifying components.

-Check the pH and gel gel time of the adhesive.

C5: Prepare adhesives based on the board to be worked out, complying with applicable regulations.

CE5.1 Determine the risks associated with the preparation of adhesives, complying with applicable regulations.

CE5.2 In a scenario of preparing adhesives, based on the following conditions:

-Perform the injection of the injectors for spraying and check that the input speed of the particles and fibers is in line with the established program.

-Perform the cleaning of the equipment and equipment with the appropriate means by controlling the destination of the waste, complying with the applicable regulations.

C6: Control the parameters characteristic of the formation of the blanket, of the prepress and of the pressing of the boards, complying with the applicable regulations.

CE6.1 Explain the associated risks in the formation of the blanket, prepressing and pressing of boards, complying with the applicable regulations.

CE6.2 In a practical scenario of control of the formation of the blanket in the manufacture of fiber boards:

-Regular the projection of the particles or fibers on the conveyor belts or belts depending on the size of the board to be formed, its quality, and the speed of the conveyor belt.

-Control the weight of the blanket, verifying that it conforms to the program set.

-Position the press stops in an appropriate position depending on the size of the board to be obtained.

-Verify the entry of the blanket in the press preventing irregularities.

-Check the closure of the press and that it is performed homogeneously through the control devices of the closure and otherwise communicate it to regulate the dosage of the blanket or the humidity of the particles.

-Interpret the graphic record of the press and check the correct operation of this record with timestamps, pressure and temperature.

-Check the output of the press and cooler by preventing traffic jams that stop manufacturing.

-Assign the parameters (temperature, pressure and time) to the press based on the technical data of the board formation according to the established program.

C7: Apply plywood, curved, and rechapated board processing techniques.

CE7.1 Describe the preparation of the adhesive mixture, setting differences according to the type of board to be obtained.

CE7.2 Explain the assembly and adaptation of security devices, complying with applicable regulations.

CE7.3 Detailed how the adhesive is dosed, setting differences according to the type of board to be obtained.

CE7.4 Describe the process of regulating nozzles, setting differences according to the type of board to be obtained.

CE7.5 Explain the procedure for controlling the viscosity and gelling time of the formed adhesive.

CE7.6 Specify how the flow and suspension of particles and fibers are controlled.

CE7.7 In a practical assumption of particle board processing of a given thickness and a composition of coarse and fine particles:

-Deduct the adjustment of the formers and the speed of the conveyor belt to obtain a certain density of the final product (both external and internal layer).

-Control the density of the formed blanket.

-Perform the first-level maintenance operations to perform.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 with respect to CE2.2; C4 with respect to CE4.2; C5 for CE5.2; C6 for CE6.2; C7 for CE7.6.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the correct production rules.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Prove a good professional.

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Contents:

1. Preparation of the working position for the manufacture of particle board and wood fibres

Planning. Technical production sheets. Sequenced operations. Types, features, capabilities, and applications. Incidence sheets. Completion. Elements of movement and transport of material among others. Job streams: reception, treatment application, concentrations, times.

Selection of precise tools, machines and equipment, according to the application technical sheets. Technical application sheets. Processes involved. Machines associated with each process.

Preparation of machines and materials to be used, according to the technical information sheet for particle board and fiber panels. Technical documentation for the manufacture of particle board and wood fibres. Machine preparation orders (adhesive mixer, gluing, forming, among others). Programming parameters for particle board and wood fibre panel processing machines.

Conditioning of the work position for the manufacture of particle board and fiber. Sanitary conditions of the workplace. Degree of facility cleanup.

Regulations applicable to the conditioning of surfaces for the manufacture of particle board and wood fibres.

2. First-level maintenance operations of machines and equipment used in the process of making particle board and wood fibres

Checking the operation of equipment and auxiliary media required in the manufacture of particle board and fiber.

Operating and maintenance manuals for machines and equipment. Company Maintenance Manual.

Preventive and corrective maintenance of machines and equipment required in the manufacture of particle board and fiber. Operating failures. Features.

Detection of worn and/or deteriorated items.

Tuning the machines.

Correction of simple failures that affect operation. Procedures. Replacement of broken or worn-out elements. Lubrication and cleaning; regulation and adjustment.

Maintenance of machines and equipment required in the manufacture of particle board and fiber. Interpretation of the technical documentation of machines and equipment.

sharpening equipment. First-level operation, adjustment and maintenance principles.

The state history of machines and tools. Report on the preservation and maintenance of finishing machines.

Review or maintenance needs reports.

Use of equipment, machines, tools and accessories for maintenance: types and characteristics. Applications. Tools and tools of conservation and maintenance. Equipment for use in assembly and disassembly. Measurement and parameter control equipment.

3. Particle and fibre sizing

Purpose. Types of adhesives. Selection criteria and techniques of use. Preparation of gluing mixtures: dosage of the adhesive, loads, supplements and additives.

Encolators: types, description of rules and operation. Sheets of gluing. Sizing parameters (pressure and flow of sprayers, density of the veil, suspension of particles/fibres, circulation, quantity of tail in wet-sharpening systems).

Transport of particles and fibers.

Quality control. Factors that influence quality.

Rules applicable to the sizing of particles and fibers.

4. Blanket formation

Purpose. Process. Techniques. Thick and density of the blanket required to manufacture the programmed board. Transportation of the blanket.

Formators (types, description, first-level operation and maintenance). Analysis of samples.

Wood fiber felt: process. Homogenization of the suspension of fibers, adhesives and additives. Wet and dry-track sharpening procedures.

Sample Analysis. Automatic press chargers.

Discontinuous presses (first-level types, description, operation, and maintenance). Continuous presses (first-level types, description, operation and maintenance).

Quality control. Factors that influence quality.

Regulations applicable to the formation of the blanket.

5. Prepress of the blanket

Prepressed: purpose. Prepress parameters. Prepresses (first level types, description, operation and maintenance). Indicators of the prepressing and pressing process.

Pressed: purpose. Techniques. Pressing graphics. Parameters of the press. Calculation of the pressure. Types of presses.

Quality control. Factors that influence quality.

Regulations applicable to the pressing of the blanket.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the manufacture of particle board and fibre, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 4: PREPARATION OF PARTICLE BOARD AND FIBER COATING

Level: 1

Code: MF0683_1

Associate to UC: Finish and coat particle and fiber boards

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Value the different products obtained, relating them to their visual characteristics, feeling of quality, physical and mechanical properties.

CE1.1 Relate the various processes involved in the finishing of agglomerated boards, relating them to each other and to the rest of the production process.

CE1.2 Relating different board types to 'market' measures.

CE1.3 Analyze the types and characteristics of the machining applicable to the different boards according to their properties and the possible coatings.

CE1.4 Relate the various materials used for the coating of agglomerated boards by relating them to the various adhesives used.

CE1.5 Recognize the storage and expedition capabilities of dashboards (packages, blocks, and maximum weights, among others).

C2: Perform support operations in the basic operations of cleaning, maintenance and commissioning of equipment in the finishing and coating of boards.

CE2.1 In a scenario of maintenance and tuning, based on a given condition:

-Perform basic cleaning and maintenance operations, on equipment and auxiliary means required in particle board and fibre board finishing processes, following the guidelines set out in the work instructions maintenance of equipment.

-Verify that the machines or equipment, used and auxiliary means required in the particle and fiber board finishing processes, are operative, identifying the possible anomalies and informing the superior responsible.

-Place tools and tools used for cleaning and maintenance in the process of finishing particle board and fiber, in order according to the instructions received under the conditions set.

C3: Control the parameters characteristic of the agglomerated board cooling operations.

CE3.1 Specify the risks associated with the board cooling, according to applicable regulations.

CE3.2 In a convenient cooling scenario of an agglomerated board:

-Select the most appropriate cooling equipment.

-Calculate the time for cooling.

-List the problems that might result in a reduction of the cooling time.

-List the EPIS to adopt.

-Control the loading and unloading of the material, preventing damage to the material that will merit its quality.

-Coordinate the speed of the various equipment by preventing line breaks.

-Perform first-level maintenance operations, noting possible incidents.

-Perform all operations under security and occupational health conditions.

C4: Perform the machining operations of wooden boards (squared, sanding and calibrated), classifying them according to quality and instructions.

CE4.1 Relate the machines with the useful ones to use and with the materials to be squared and sanded/calibrate.

CE4.2 In a practical case of machining wooden boards from a given condition:

-Position the tools and tools in the sharpening operational state, in the squadron.

-Perform the tuning of the parameters (cutting angles, depth), mounting the security devices.

-Interpret the encodings of abrasive bands and applications according to the type of grain (material, finesse, among others.

-Check that the speed of advance of the board in the squadron is the required one, not producing splinters or breakages, regulating it otherwise.

-Place the abrasive bands in the gauge, making the adjustment of the parameters (sense, tension, grain), and level the input and output speeds of the material.

-Check that the input and output of the material in the gauge is made and that, once the operation is completed, its visual appearance (absence of stripes and uniformity, among others) and caliber responds to the manufacturing program.

-Describe first-level maintenance operations, controlled by the maintenance tab, where items and operations are identified to be performed.

C5: End particle boards or raw wood fibers with coatings, complying with applicable regulations.

CE5.1 Describe the process of laminate of boards, the different parts that compose it, and the materials involved, relating them to each other.

CE5.2 Characterize machines and equipment that are involved in the process of rolling boards (function, capabilities, among others, working out a process type scheme.

CE5.3 In a practical scenario of particle board finishing from established conditions:

-Impregnate the boards with the required adhesive, considering the uniformity throughout the surface and the amount of adhesive applied, following instructions.

-Make the coating join to the base board, considering the visual characteristics of the coating material.

-Set the board, regulating the parameters of the press (temperature, pressure and time), so that they match the established theoretical pressing cycle and that the separation of the plates or the bands is the required one in function of the thickness of the board to coat, following instructions.

-Recovering the particle board, controlling that the feed of the particle board or fibers in the process, is adjusted to the material flow in the production line and to the press time of the board to be manufactured, following instructions.

CE5.4 In a practical scenario of control of particle board finish from established conditions:

-Control the quality of the pressing, separating the boards with defects (rolling of the laminate, uncoated areas, stains, irregularities) in the process of rolling or coating.

-Describe Individual Protective Equipment (EPIs) and the protection of machines by linking them to the risks they can avoid.

-Describe first-level maintenance operations, controlled by the maintenance tab, where items and operations are identified to be performed.

-Relate the waste generated with the treatment to apply them, according to the current regulations and the plan of the company.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 complete; C3 with respect to CE3.2; C4 with respect to CE4.2; C5 with respect to CE5.3 and CE5.4.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the correct production rules.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Prove a good professional.

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Contents:

1. Simple operations for the adjustment and assembly of interchangeable elements in the preparation machines for the coating of particle board and fibre panels

Specific technical documentation of particle board finish planning. Process diagrams. Travel diagrams. Process for assembling fabric parts and laminates. Lists of sequenced operations.

Working methods: Operating process. Control parameters.

List of machines, tools, and tools.

Types, features, capabilities, and applications.

presses, saws.

Measurement and control devices: types, capabilities, and applications.

2. Support operations in the basic operations of cleaning, maintenance and tuning of particle and fibre board coating equipment

Checking the operation of equipment and auxiliary means required in the process of finishing particle board and fiber.

Operating and maintenance manuals for machines and equipment. Company Maintenance Manual.

Preventive and corrective maintenance of machines and equipment required in particle and fiber board finish processes.

Malfunction. Features. Detection of worn and/or deteriorated elements. Correction of simple anomalies affecting operation. Procedures.

Replacement of broken or worn-out items. Lubrication and cleaning; adjustment and adjustment. Machine tuning.

Technical documentation of equipment and machines for the maintenance of machines and equipment required in the process of finishing particle board and fiber.

The state history of machines and tools. Report on the preservation and maintenance of finishing machines. Review or maintenance needs reports.

Equipment, machines, tools and accessories for maintenance: Types and characteristics. Applications. Tools and tools of conservation and maintenance. Equipment for use in assembly and disassembly. Measurement and parameter control equipment.

3. Board cooled

Loading and unloading of boards in the cooler.

Equipment for the transport and handling of boards. Types. Uses and functions.

Material transport techniques. Non-conformance management.

Particle board cooling process and wood fibers.

cooled systems and methods. Purpose and spaces.

Teams. Types. Uses and applications. Times and speeds. Quality control.

Adjusting and cooling parameters (temperature, humidity, pressure).

Typologies of particle board of wood fibres. Features. Thicknesses.

4. Machining of boards

Machining. Preparation of the machinery. Selection of cutting elements (type of teeth, angle of attack and incidence, number of teeth among others).

Machining types and tools according to the hardness of the board. Cutting disk sharpening.

Machining and resizing of boards: process of squadron and sizing. Purpose, techniques.

machines, types, operation and maintenance.

Adjusts parameters (speed of advancement, speed of rotation, number of teeth, type of teeth, position of the saw, among others).

Adjustment of measures (automatic stops, handbooks, disk height).

Types of mechanized. Applications and uses. Commercial dimensions.

Calibrated of boards. Sanding of boards. Selection of abrasives (type of grain, support, pore, abrasive).

Calibrated of boards. Purpose and techniques.

Calibrators, types, operation, and maintenance.

Selection of elements (type of wood, types of finishes). Parameter regulation (thickness, feed speed, belt tension, skid pressure). Setting standard thicknesses.

Quality control. Quality protocols (flatness, tolerance dimensions, uniformity, calibration pressure, among others).

Product Classification. Types. Dimensions. Quality control tests.

Technical and surface characteristics. Defects (stains, colorations, irregularities, burns among others). Production rules and plans.

Rules applicable to the machining of boards.

5. Finishing of the particle board or of raw wood fibres with coatings

Wood board sizing.

Types of adhesives.

Nature. Systems of Accession.

Coating Materials. Types, purpose, applications, and receive controls.

Preparing Adhesives.

Decorative plate sizing systems and coating materials. Quality controls. Glers. Types, operation and maintenance.

Parameter regulation: viscosity, gramage, applied flow rate, dosing among others.

Pressed wood board with coating.

Coover bonding procedures to the base board.

Visual characteristics of the coating material. Types and applications.

Coating arrangement (texture, direction, and face). Presses. Types (cold and hot plates), operation and maintenance.

Pressing parameters (temperature, pressure, and time). Plate parameters (thickness dimensions, strip separation).

Dashboards production flows. Pressing times. Scrolling of boards. Material power control on the production line.

Quality control of the wood board liner. Defects: coating breaks, absences, stains and irregularities. Procedures for the separation of defective elements. Quality control. Influential factors.

Rules applicable to the finishing of boards.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the finishing of particle board and fibers, which will be accredited by one of the following two ways:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX X

PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: APPLICATION OF VARNISHES AND LACQUERS IN CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE ELEMENTS

Professional Family: Wood, Furniture and Corcho

Level: 1

Code: MAM275_1

General competition:

Perform the finishes on carpentry and furniture elements, using tools, equipment and specific machines for the conditioning of surfaces, the application of varnishes and lacquers, as well as its controlled drying, obtaining products with the required quality, in accordance with established procedures, in conditions of safety, occupational health and environmental protection.

Competition Units:

UC0880_1: Preparing equipment and media for the application of varnishes and lacquers on carpentry and furniture items

UC0881_1: Conditioning the surface for end product application and controlling drying in carpentry and furniture products

UC0167_1: Carry out the application of surface finishing products with mechanical and mechanical means in carpentry and furniture

Professional Environment:

Professional Scope:

Develops its professional activity in the production department in close relation to the maintenance, in the area of carpentry and furniture, dedicated to the application of finished products in general, in entities of private nature, in large, medium and small enterprises, as an employed or self-employed person. It develops its activity depending, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors:

It is located in the productive sector of furniture manufacturing, subsector manufacturing of carpentry elements.

Relevant Occupations and Jobs:

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Wood Furniture Finishes

Parquet varnishes-Barnizers

Barnizador-wood-craft-lacquers

Wood furniture-lacquers-lacquers

Furniture finishing train operators

Associated Training (210 hours)

Training Modules

MF0880_1: Preparation of equipment and means of application of varnishes and lacquers in carpentry and furniture elements (60 hours)

MF0881_1: Surface conditioning and drying operations on carpentry and furniture products (60 hours)

MF0167_1: Application of finished products in carpentry and furniture (90 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: PREPARING THE EQUIPMENT AND MEANS OF APPLICATION OF VARNISHES AND LACQUERS ON CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE ELEMENTS

Level: 1

Code: UC0880_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Carry out basic maintenance operations of the machines for the application of varnishes and lacquers in carpentry and furniture elements, to ensure the operation of the machines, following instructions and complying with the regulations applicable for safety, occupational and environmental risks.

CR 1.1 The carts and other means of transport of parts are maintained in operational conditions, checking, the existence of possible anomalies in the operation.

CR 1.2 Air ventilation and purification elements are reviewed, replacing with required equipment, interchangeable parts in case of dysfunctions.

CR 1.3 The verification of the operation of the systems and means of pressurisation is carried out, controlling the operation of the systems and the systems of sealing, proceeding to repair, if appropriate or warning to the maintenance technical service.

CR 1.4 The maintenance or replacement of filters is carried out periodically, thus allowing for the maintenance of the level of pressurization and quality of application.

CR 1.5 The tuning of the varnishing equipment is carried out by checking the condition of the equipment and the vacuum operation of the equipment.

CR 1.6 The worn or defective components in the varnishing equipment are replaced, if they are within their competence, by removing the discarded components at the place established for recycling, complying with the plan of production.

RP 2: Carry out cleaning and preparation of equipment and varnishing facilities to achieve the operation of the same, complying with applicable regulations on occupational safety and environmental protection, instructions.

CR 2.1 The varnishing facilities are cleaned, using the means of aspiration, blowing and other means of cleaning.

CR 2.2 The varnishing equipment (guns, rollers, buckets, among others), are cleaned using the required products, without causing damage, or deformations in needles, rollers and other components, making the cutting, fulfilling the applicable safety, health and environmental rules.

CR 2.3 Equipment, machinery, and varnishing elements are prepared, regulating the parameters in the operations to be performed.

CR 2.4 Useful and cleaning products are discarded and removed, complying with the production plan.

RP 3: Locate the barnized application equipment in the work zone, to optimize the space and the operation of the equipment, complying with applicable regulations, occupational safety and environmental, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The quality of the surfaces before the application is checked, visually, verifying the absence of dust, stains and fineness.

CR 3.2 Carpentry and furniture parts that do not meet the requirements set for the application of the varnish are rejected or conditioned with the required means.

CR 3.3 The location of the carpentry and furniture parts at the place of application is carried out, according to characteristics and magnitudes of the same (size, shape, volume, weight), complying with applicable regulations.

CR 3.4 The media and equipment are reviewed, before the application, by checking the operability.

CR 3.5 The parts before and after the application of the varnish are moved, optimizing the space and the movements, complying with the applicable regulations.

Professional context:

Production media:

Equipment and varnishing facilities, movement and transport elements (forklift, pallet truck, manual carts, among others), rotating tables for the positioning of the parts.

Products and results:

Ready-work aircraft and maintenance of varnishing equipment, carried out. Varnishing equipment, prepared. Location of parts, media and varnishing equipment at the place of application, optimizing space and movements.

Information used or generated:

Product Safety Sheets. Technical sheets of the equipment. Production orders. Incident sheets. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks. Instructions.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: CONDITION THE SURFACE FOR THE APPLICATION OF THE FINAL PRODUCT AND CONTROL THE DRYING IN CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE PRODUCTS

Level: 1

Code: UC0881_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Maintain equipment and work areas of the surface conditioning installations of carpentry and furniture elements, with the equipment of sanding and polishing, to achieve the operability of these, complying with the applicable safety, occupational and environmental health regulations, following instructions.

CR 1.1 The maintenance of the environmental conditions of plant conditioning installations of carpentry elements and furniture for the application of the final product, is carried out, checking the extraction systems and air purification, as required.

CR 1.2 The tuning of sanding and polishing equipment is carried out, regulating the parameters set out in the production plan.

CR 1.3 The replacement of the abrasive is carried out, complying with applicable safety and health and environmental health regulations.

CR 1.4 The choice of abrasive size, grain type and polishing pastes is performed, considering, the type of product to be applied and the final finish established.

CR 1.5 The cleaning of the equipment is carried out, without damaging the elements (rollers and surfaces among others) and with the means established for this purpose.

CR 1.6 The tuning of sanding and polishing equipment is carried out with the established means, complying with the applicable safety and health and environmental health regulations.

RP 2: Perform the final sanding and polishing of the surfaces of carpentry and furniture elements, for the application of the final product, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations, following instructions.

CR 2.1 The preparation of the surface to be treated for the application of the final product is performed, removing visual imperfections, which does not interfere with the finishing operations.

CR 2.2 The mass of the carpentry and furniture elements is performed with the required techniques, depending on the imperfections they present, depending on the type of support and finish to be applied.

CR 2.3 The surface of the carpentry and furniture elements is lit, after the mass with the established techniques, in the direction according to the nature of the support, grain of abrasive and with the required pressure, complying with the the applicable labour and environmental health and safety regulations.

CR 2.4 The polishing tools (rollers, discs) are placed, adjusting them, depending on the surface to be polished, adding the polishing paste, complying with the applicable regulations.

CR 2.5 Polishing operations are coordinated to the drying and hardening times and the state of the surfaces to be polished, complying with applicable safety and health and environmental health regulations.

CR 2.6 The operation of the sanding and polishing machines and equipment is checked, making the appropriate corrections.

RP 3: Control the drying area to keep it in operation, making it to the point, complying with the applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The tuning and maintenance of the drying place for carpentry and furniture products is carried out with the required means and products.

CR 3.2 The environmental conditions of pressure and the absence of suspended particles, among others, are checked, prior to the introduction of the pieces for drying, avoiding their deposit on the uncured surfaces, complying with the applicable safety, occupational and environmental health rules.

CR 3.3 The preparation of the equipment to be used is carried out, regulating the parameters of temperature and speed of progress, among others, with the means established in the production plan, complying with the applicable safety regulations and occupational and environmental health.

CR 3.4 The adjustment and testing of the drying cabin extraction and filtration systems is performed according to the product to be applied.

RP 4: Move the carpentry and furniture parts to the drying area to proceed to the drying operation, complying with applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 4.1 The handling of carpentry and furniture pieces in the drying process is carried out, saving time and travel, complying with applicable safety and health and environmental regulations.

CR 4.2 The transfer of the carpentry and furniture parts to the drying site is carried out with the equipment and means established, without air currents, or elements in suspension in the environment and with the access cleared, allowing the circulation of the parts in the dryer, without causing damage or to the surfaces to be cured or to the people.

CR 4.3 The environmental conditions of the drying site, such as: humidity, temperature, absence of dust, among others, are controlled, keeping them under established conditions, using the required equipment, increasing the quality of the surface treated.

Professional context:

Production media:

Portable sanding machines (vibrators, disk) and band. Portable and portable polishing machines. Sanding facilities. Cars and transport elements. Drying booths.

Products and results:

Ready work areas and maintenance made of surface conditioning equipment of carpentry and furniture elements. Operations of sanding and final polishing of the surfaces of carpentry and furniture elements. Point of the place of drying of carpentry and furniture products. Moving pieces of carpentry and furniture, for drying.

Information used or generated:

Technical sheets of the products to be applied. Sheets of sheets and polishing pastes. Catalogues and Standards for the operation of sanding and polishing machines. Incident sheets. Applicable rules for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks and quality. Instructions.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: PERFORM SURFACE FINISHING PRODUCTS WITH MECHANICAL AND MECHANICAL MEANS IN THE CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE

Level: 1

Code: UC0167_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Apply the finished products with gun and other hand tools, on carpentry surfaces and furniture to obtain the finished finish, complying with applicable safety regulations, occupational health, environmental and quality, following instructions.

CR 1.1 The finishing products: lacquers, varnishes, among others and auxiliary means of finishing of carpentry surfaces and auxiliary means: guns, brushes, rollers, among others, are prepared according to the finish to be applied and available means.

CR 1.2 The finishing products are applied with the established machines, equipment and tools, according to the type of product and finish to be applied, according to the technical specifications, complying with the applicable safety regulations, health work, environment and quality.

CR 1.3 The fluidity of the varnish product is controlled with viscosimeter, indicating, addition or not, of solvents in order to facilitate the application, according to the technical specifications.

CR 1.4 The application of the finishing product is performed by manual operations and handling of the tools and means, so that the result is obtained.

CR 1.5 The applicator and the pieces that constitute it are checked, verifying that they are in the ideal conditions to achieve the use of the material and to increase the quality of the application.

CR 1.6 The quality of the application of the finished product is achieved, guaranteeing the pressure and flow parameters, through the visual control of the application.

RP 2: Apply finishing products with continuous process automatic machines, on carpentry and furniture surfaces, to obtain the established finish, complying with applicable regulations, occupational safety and environmental, following instructions.

CR 2.1 The application machines for finishing products are regulated according to the parameters established, according to the characteristics of the support and the material to be used, controlling parameters of: speed of advancement and breakage of curtain, among others.

CR 2.2 The parts are placed on the finishing machines, checking that a uniform flow of the product is obtained, optimizing the process.

CR 2.3 The application of finishes with automatic continuous process machines is adjusted to the geometry of the parts and to the parameters set out in the production plan.

CR 2.4 The deviations detected in the process of application of finishes with automatic continuous process machines are communicated to the senior manager.

RP 3: Run control actions in the process of application of finished products with continuous process machines, in carpentry and furniture to achieve the established finish, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The parameters of the equipment used in the application of finished products with automatic continuous process machines, in carpentry and furniture are adjusted, depending on the product used, checking the evaporation of the solvents and the curing of the products.

CR 3.2 The constant flow of the products to be applied, is carried out, maintaining control of the levels, preventing interruptions in production.

CR 3.3 The finishing product is applied, controlling the environmental conditions of: temperature, renewal and air purity, proceeding to reset them in case of diversion of the same, complying with applicable regulations.

CR 3.4 Quality control throughout the application of finished products with continuous process automatic machines is performed according to established criteria.

CR 3.5 Equipment and accessories are cleaned upon completion of the finishing products application work, leaving them under conditions of use for later use.

RP 4: Separate the waste from the finished product of the machines and utensils used in the application of finishes, to carry out its handling and treatment as established, following instructions.

CR 4.1 The separation of the waste is carried out during the application process, at the end of the process and with the frequency established in the production plan, complying with the applicable regulations.

CR 4.2 Waste is stored in containers in previously established locations, complying with applicable regulations.

CR 4.3 Waste handling is carried out using the individual means of protection and protection in compliance with the applicable regulations.

Professional context:

Production media:

Handguns equipment: aerographic, airmix, airless, electrostatic, continuous machines: roller barnizers, curtain, application robots. Tunnels and chambers of convection or radiation drying (IR, UV). Application cabins with air refresh.

Products and results:

Finish products, applied with gun and other manual means. Finishing products applied with continuous process automatic machines. Control actions executed to perform the process of applying finishing products with continuous process automatic machines. Separate residues of the finished product.

Information used or generated:

Technical and Security Sheets. Technical sheets of the equipment. Quality control results sheets. Environmental parameters. Incident sheets. Regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks and quality, applicable. Work instructions.

TRAINING MODULE 1: PREPARATION OF EQUIPMENT AND MEANS OF APPLICATION OF VARNISHES AND LACQUERS ON CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE ELEMENTS

Level: 1

Code: MF0880_1

Associate with UC: Preparing the equipment and means of application of varnishes and lacquers in carpentry and furniture elements

Duration: 60 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Describe the application media and equipment preparation processes.

CE1.1 Relate the different phases of product application processes with the elements and equipment involved.

CE1.2 Explain the importance of maintaining the conditions under applicable safety, risk prevention and environmental regulations of the place and the means of application.

CE1.3 Specify how the finishing process affects the tuning of equipment and installations and the impact of the non-tuning.

CE1.4 Relate the movements that require the parts, their situation, and application elements with the efficiency of the process.

C2: Perform the checks and controls of the environmental conditions of the place of application of varnishes and lacquers.

CE2.1 In a practical scenario of applying varnishes and lacquers, based on established conditions:

-Order the application area with appropriate equipment and media without altering environmental conditions, removing elements that may cause accidents and allowing the free movement of people and parts.

-Review the filter and temperature elements of the application site, subsating the detected irregularities by cleaning or replacing the filters.

-Check the status of the carts and other means of transport, greasing the moving parts when necessary and keeping surfaces free of dust.

-Review the operation of the pressurization systems and means, checking their tightness and communicating the detected deficiencies.

C3: Make the equipment ready to perform the application of lacquers and varnishes, as established, in compliance with the applicable regulations for the prevention of risks, occupational health and environmental health.

CE3.1 Explain how equipment is cleaned with the appropriate media and products and to keep them in conditions of use by checking their operation in a vacuum.

CE3.2 Indicate how the tools (guns, rollers, buckets) are made to be put in place, achieving the appropriate regulation and loading of products.

CE3.3 Describe how the cleaning of components (needles, rollers among others) is carried out, without causing damage or deformations, as well as wear and tear or oxidations, which prevent the equipment from working properly.

CE3.4 Define how useful and useful cleaning products and products are properly disposed of, respecting safety, health and environmental standards.

CE3.5 Determine how worn or defective components are detected and replaced before they can affect equipment performance.

CE3.6 In a practical scenario of preparation of equipment for the application of lacquers and varnishes, based on the following conditions:

-Perform the cleaning of the equipment with the appropriate media and products.

-Select components and mix them according to technical specifications, complying with applicable risk prevention, occupational health and environmental regulations.

-Conditioning the application temperature of the workplace to the product type to be applied.

-Check the determined parameters: material dosage, speed, viscosity, and pressure.

C4: Locating the parts, media and application equipment of varnishes and lacquers to achieve optimal working conditions, complying with applicable regulations on risk prevention, occupational health and environmental health.

CE4.1 Explain the risks associated with moving parts and media, according to applicable regulations.

CE4.2 In a practical scenario of the location of the parts, media and equipment for applying varnishes and lacquers for application in carpentry and furniture elements:

-Perform visual check of surfaces on which to apply the finish, checking the absence of dust, stains or defects and their fineness, and restoring or rejecting the parts that do not meet the necessary requirements for perform the application.

-Position the parts, controlling their movements during the application, checking their operation in a vacuum.

-Review the operation of air refresh elements (extractors, boosters, filters, water curtain if applicable).

-Select the appropriate cart or support based on the part's properties.

-Dispose the equipment and products to be applied.

-Place the part in the cart to support.

-Perform the movement of the part during the application by minimizing the material expense to be applied, complying with applicable regulations for risk prevention, occupational health and environmental health.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 complete; C3 with respect to CE3.6; C4 with respect to CE4.2.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the correct production rules.

Prove a good professional.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Contents:

1. Maintenance of installations for the application of varnishes and lacquers on carpentry and furniture elements

Cleaning of facilities: products used in cleaning facilities, useful and cleaning machinery.

First-level maintenance of chariots and means of transport for the application of varnishes and lacquers.

Air ventilation and purification elements.

Applicable regulations of: safety and occupational health in the maintenance of varnishes and lacquer application facilities in carpentry and furniture elements.

Characteristic risks of the facilities and processes of finishes: fire, explosion, toxicity.

Lacquer and lacquer application machines.

Varnishing and lacquer application installations on carpentry and furniture elements.

2. Surface preparation methods for finishing

Application Surfaces: features for finishing.

Surface sanding for pre-coating: putty. Sanding with prior coating.

Polishing of finished surfaces.

Landing and polishing machines and tools: application.

Finishes sanding abrasives.

Classification of lijas.

Factors that influence the quality of materials and products.

Preparing media for finishing: during defect preparation and correction.

State of the surfaces.

Applicable regulations of: safety and occupational health in the preparation of surfaces for finishing.

Security items. Personal. Machines. Installations.

Treatments and disposal of waste generated by the finish: removal of sanding powder, waste from the application booths, remains of non-employed products. Packaging. First aid.

3. Preparation techniques for finishing products, location of parts, media and application equipment

Barnices and paintings. Products, types and main features.

Solvents and diluents.

Factors that influence the quality of products.

Process of preparing media and products for finishing.

Preparing and correcting surface defects.

Security items. Personal. Machines. Installations.

Treatments and disposal of waste generated by the finish.

Removal of sanding powder.

Waste of application cabins.

Remains of non-employee products. Packaging. First aid.

Move and transport elements: manual and automatic.

Movement and Optimized Parts Positioning.

Defects of parts or elements of carpentry and furniture.

Applicable regulations of: safety and occupational health in the preparation of finishing products, location of parts, means and equipment of application.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the preparation of equipment and means of application of varnishes and lacquers in carpentry and furniture elements, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 5 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: SURFACE CONDITIONING AND DRYING OPERATIONS IN CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE PRODUCTS

Level: 1

Code: MF0881_1

Associate to UC: Conditioning the surface for end product application and controlling drying in carpentry and furniture products

Duration: 60 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Explain the surface conditioning and drying processes of carpentry and furniture products, indicating the importance within the finishing process.

CE1.1 Differentiate the various conditioning and drying procedures, relating them to the types of finishes applied.

CE1.2 Relate the different phases of the conditioning and drying processes of surfaces with the machines and equipment involved.

CE1.3 Recognize the added value of conditioning and drying, in relation to the final quality of the product.

CE1.4 Specify the associated risks according to regulations applicable to the conditioning of surfaces and drying of carpentry and furniture products.

C2: Prepare sanding and polishing equipment, making it to the point, complying with applicable risk prevention, occupational health and environmental regulations.

CE2.1 Describe the cleaning of sanding and polishing equipment with the appropriate means and products to keep them under conditions of use.

CE2.2 Define how the useful (abrasive, brushes, and paste among others) is performed, achieving the proper regulation and loading of the products.

CE2.3 In an event of preparation of sanding and polishing equipment, based on established conditions:

-Perform cleaning of equipment, media and places to act on.

-Select the required useful, depending on the features of the part and the finish to be achieved.

-Check the determined parameters: abrasive, brush, paste, and piece speed among others.

-Perform first-level maintenance of equipment and changes of equipment (rollers and abrasives) for operation, in compliance with applicable regulations on risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.

C3: Apply the sanding and polishing techniques of the carpentry and furniture parts, complying with the applicable regulations for risk prevention, occupational health and environmental health.

CE3.1 Explain the associated risks, according to regulations applicable to sanding and polishing operations.

CE3.2 In a case of sanding and polishing of carpentry and furniture parts:

-Place the parts on the equipment to obtain the required result, complying with applicable regulations for risk prevention, occupational health and environmental health.

-Handle the operation control devices of the computers by maintaining the parameters throughout the process.

-visually verify the quality of the sanded or polished surface, rejecting those that do not reach the required finish level.

-Clean the bands when their performance decreases, breaks in this or affects the quality of sanding and polishing.

C4: Apply drying techniques in carpentry and furniture products, handling established parts, complying with applicable regulations on risk prevention, occupational health and environmental health.

CE4.1 In a scenario of drying parts, based on established conditions:

-Select the means of transport based on the type of part, avoiding damage or damage.

-Download the carts so as not to damage the parts and after the time set in the production plan has elapsed.

-Make movements (carts, supports, among others) for the drying of parts.

-Manipulate parts and move cars using EPIS, complying with applicable risk prevention, occupational health and environmental regulations.

C5: Maintain the drying and curing site and equipment in safety, health and environmental health conditions, complying with the applicable regulations on risk prevention, occupational health and environmental health.

CE5.1 In a practical case of drying and curing of carpentry and furniture parts:

-Define the importance of maintaining the drying area in perfect safety and health conditions.

-Order the drying area (tunnel, cabin) with appropriate equipment and means, maintaining environmental conditions, complying with applicable regulations.

-Store the waste generated in the maintenance activity of the spaces and means used in the drying-cured according to the plan of the company's waste, complying with the applicable regulations of risk prevention, health labor and environmental.

-Prepare the drying area under the environmental conditions set out in the production plan.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 with respect to CE2.3; C3 with respect to CE3.2; full C4; C5 complete.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the correct production rules.

Prove a good professional.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Contents:

1. Maintenance facilities for the conditioning of surfaces of carpentry and furniture elements for the application of the final product

Facility cleanup protocol.

Products used in facility cleaning.

Useful and cleaning machinery.

Sanding Equipment. Features. Parameter throttling.

Components of sanding equipment: rollers, brushes, among others.

Types of sanders: manual and automatic.

2. Surface preparation methods for finishing

Process of finishing surfaces of carpentry and furniture items.

Application Surfaces.

Features for finishing.

Preparation of media and products for sanding and polishing: during defect preparation and correction.

Surface sanding for prior coating.

Masked.

Coated with previous coating.

Polishing of finished surfaces.

Landing and polishing machines and tools: application.

Finishes sanding abrasives: types and functionality.

Preparation techniques for sanding and polishing products: products, types and main features.

Precautions during handling and application of finishing products.

Massed machines, sanded. Features

Installations.

Treatments and disposal of waste generated by the finish.

Removal of sanding powder.

Applicable risk prevention, occupational health and environmental regulations.

3. Drying methods and techniques

Drying zones (tunnel, cabin, cameras).

Secados based on the finished products used.

Using machinery and drying facilities.

Appropriate equipment and media (carts and media).

Means of transport.

Manipulation.

Factors that influence the quality of drying.

Verifying the drying process.

Waste from the drying booths.

Applicable risk prevention, occupational health and environmental regulations.

4. Moving parts of carpentry and furniture for drying

Machinery and drying facilities: types and applications.

Dashboard.

Move and Transport Items: Utilization.

Movement and optimized parts positioning.

Packaging for the classification of useful.

Waste storage.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the conditioning of the surface for the application of the final product and the control of the drying in carpentry and furniture products, which will be accredited by one of the two forms following:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 5 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 3: APPLICATION OF SURFACE PRODUCTS FINISHING IN CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE

Level: 1

Code: MF0167_1

Associate with UC: Performing the application of surface finishing products with mechanical and manual means in the carpentry and furniture

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Explain the processes of tuning machines and equipment and the application of surface finishing products with manual-mechanical means.

CE1.1 Relate the different phases of product application processes to each other and within the process of part finishes.

CE1.2 Recognize the properties of the finishes according to the technical characteristics of their components and the surfaces to be applied.

CE1.3 Relate the machines and equipment for the application of products with the finishes to be applied and the desired types of finishes.

CE1.4 List the most common defects produced during the application process, its causes, and its correction.

CE1.5 List the risks involved in handling and handling application products, as applicable.

C2: Apply finishing products with handguns and other manual means, obtaining carpentry and furniture parts with the defined characteristics.

CE2.1 Specify the risks associated with the application of finishing products, as applicable.

CE2.2 In a scenario of applying finishing products, based on a given condition:

-Check that the machines, equipment and useful to be used in the application as well as the products to be applied, are those required for the type of work and material.

-Place the pieces in the workplace, allowing an application with minimal material waste, achieving the highest final quality.

-Select the means of application by considering different parameters (surface, material on which to apply and type of finish desired among others).

-Use individual protective equipment (EPIS), complying with applicable safety, health and environmental health regulations, so that the application is carried out with the minimum impact.

-Apply the finishing product, visually control the quality of the application and adapt parameters (pressure, viscosity and flow among others) to correct possible deviations, improving the quality of the application.

CE2.3 In an application scenario and depending on the product to be reached and its subsequent application:

-Determine the equipment and products to use in the application.

-Determine the optimal sequence of operations to perform.

-Perform the movement and placement of the parts.

-Position the applicator and parts.

C3: Apply the finish, operating with machines and automatic application equipment, getting parts with the defined features.

CE3.1 Describe the most common failures or defects that can occur during the application of the product.

CE3.2 Recognize the function of the various machine and equipment operating control devices and the risks involved in their mishandling.

CE3.3 In a scenario of finishing application, from given conditions:

-Dispose the materials properly in the feeders and equipment to obtain the required result.

-Maintain application parameters, by regulating devices (flow rate, curtain break, start rate among others).

-visually check product levels during application by removing them and preventing application stoppage or deficiencies in the application.

-Communicate defects detected during application to the top manager, interrupting the process if deemed necessary.

-Manipulate waste in compliance with applicable environmental regulations.

C4: Defer the results of finished work of parts and elements of carpentry and furniture, checking that the required characteristics are met.

CE4.1 Explain the risks arising from the finishing application operations, according to applicable regulations.

CE4.2 In a practical scenario of quality control of parts and elements of carpentry and furniture:

-Relate the possible defects that usually occur in parts during finishing jobs with the probable causes of them.

-Check the quality obtained with the expected specifications or results and in your case correct the deviations.

-Check the application equipment, verify its proper operation, and correct any deviations.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 with respect to CE2.2 and CE2.3; C3 with respect to CE3.3; C4 with respect to CE4.2.

Other capabilities:

Interpret and execute work instructions.

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the correct production rules.

Prove a good professional.

Demonstrate some autonomy in solving small contingencies related to their activity.

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Contents:

1. Manual application of the finish

Procedures and operations in the manual application.

Products for manual finishing. Preparation. Mixtures.

Useful in manual application, pistols: types, preparation, operations, other useful manual application (brush, roller).

Media technology on which the finish is performed.

Defects in manual finishing.

Correcting defects.

Control application operations.

State of the surfaces and the product to be applied.

Conditions of the application. Post-application control.

2. Industrial application of the finish

Machines and application equipment. Features. Application. Regulation. Operations.

Industrial application techniques of finishing. Phases.

Facilities and complementary equipment for the application (curtains, cabins, ventilation, compressed air). Operation and regulation.

Media technology on which the finish is performed.

Handling and transport of parts during application and drying. Systems. Media. Precautions.

Organization and distribution of the job.

Work organization techniques.

Sequencing operations of the industrial application of the finish.

Defects in the industrial finish.

Correcting defects.

Control application operations.

State of the surfaces and the product to be applied. Conditions of the application. Post-application control.

3. Rules applicable to the finishing

Characteristic risks of the facilities and processes of finishes.

Fire. Explosion. Toxicity.

Precautions to be taken during handling and application of components and finishing products.

Security items. Personal. EPIS. Machines. Installations.

Treatments and disposal of waste generated by the finish. Removal of sanding powder. Waste from the application booths. Remains of non-employed products. Packaging. Documentation.

First aid.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the application of finished products with mechanical means in carpentry and furniture, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

ANNEX XI

PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATION: CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE

Professional Family: Wood, Furniture and Corcho

Level: 1

Code: MAM276_1

General competition:

Perform basic manufacturing, installation and assembly operations of carpentry and furniture elements, using tools, equipment and machines specific to conventional machining of wood and its derivatives, placement for the preparation of products, in accordance with established procedures, with the required quality and in conditions of safety, occupational health and environmental protection.

Competition Units:

UC0162_1: Mechanizing Wood and Derivatives

UC0173_1: Adjust and pack carpentry and furniture products and items

UC0882_1: Support in assembling and installing carpentry and furniture items

Professional Environment:

Professional Scope:

Develops its professional activity in the production department, in contact with the departments of maintenance and quality, in wood, furniture and cork, in the area of carpentry and furniture dedicated to the manufacture of furniture and of carpentry elements, in entities of a private nature, in small, medium and large enterprises, normally for an employed person. It develops its activity depending on its case, functional and/or hierarchically of a superior. The principles of universal accessibility are applied in the development of professional activity in accordance with the applicable regulations.

Productive Sectors:

It is located in the wood and fog sector, in the subsector of the manufacture of carpentry and furniture elements and in the installation of carpentry and furniture.

Relevant Occupations and Jobs:

The terms of the following relationship of occupations and jobs are used with a generic and omnicomprensivo character of women and men.

Carpentry element assemblers-assemblers

Wood and/or ebanisteria products, in general

Mechanized train operators of agglomerated boards

carpenters

Bank-ship-owners

Associated Training (300 hours)

Training Modules

MF0162_1: Wood and Derived Mechanics (90 hours)

MF0173_1: Tuning and wrapping furniture and carpentry items (90 hours)

MF0882_1: Mounting and installing carpentry and furniture items (120 hours)

COMPETITION UNIT 1: MECHANIZE TIMBER AND DERIVATIVES

Level: 1

Code: UC0162_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Perform basic first-level maintenance and machine-to-machine maintenance, equipment, and wood machining work area operations to keep them operational, complying with applicable risk regulations work, safety and environment, following instructions.

CR 1.1 Basic maintenance operations are performed on wood and derivative machining equipment such as: manual or automatic machines, belt saw, tupi milling among others, according to the form and Frequency indicated.

CR 1.2 The tools, materials, and accessories usable in the machine or equipment of wood machining and derivatives are prepared, carrying out simple assemblies, keeping them operational, according to indications.

CR 1.3 The simple and interchangeable elements of the machine or wood machining equipment and derivatives are adjusted, checking that there is no slack.

CR 1.4 The simple and interchangeable elements of the machine or equipment for machining wood and derivatives, are cleaned, checking that there are no debris left.

CR 1.5 The operation of the machines or equipment, used in the machining of wood and derivatives are checked, detecting possible anomalies, informing the superior responsible, to possible anomalies in each shift, day or the batch change.

CR 1.6 The tools and tools used in cleaning and maintenance such as rags, spatulas, fixed keys, screwdrivers, oil, oil and other, are ordered, according to the order established.

CR 1.7 The setting of wood and timber machining machines is performed, considering the selection of tools, their sharpening and fixing parameters according to the product to be obtained.

CR 1.8 The workstation is conditioned, making available to use the materials and tools used in the machining of pieces of wood (flat and curved) and derived, following instructions and eliminating possible remains accumulated from the production process, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards.

CR 1.9 The records and annotations of maintenance operations on equipment used in the machining of wood and derivatives are carried out on the established support.

RP 2: Mechanizing flat pieces of wood and derivatives with manual or automatic machines to obtain machined parts with the established quality, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality regulations, following instructions.

CR 2.1 Manual machines are fed, taking into account the shape and quality defects of the wood, the direction of the fiber and guiding the pieces on the table, according to the work to be carried out, complying with the applicable regulations of safety, occupational health, environmental and quality.

CR 2.2 Automatic machines are fed, considering the process to be developed and the machine parameters such as: number of mechanized, speed of advancement, among others.

CR 2.3 The parts in the machining centres are positioned, considering the anchor system of the table and using the appropriate means of attachment to the table, complying with the applicable rules.

CR 2.4 Mechanized parts containing boxes, spikes, drills, recalds are controlled by checking templates and/or visual observation, separating the defective parts, complying with applicable regulations.

CR 2.5 The checking of the sanded and/or calibrated parts is verified by the touch, checking its thickness and disposing of the defective parts according to instructions and complying with the applicable regulations.

RP 3: Mechanize curved pieces of wood and derivatives, handling the ribbon saw, to obtain machined parts with the established quality, complying with the applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The parts to be machined are marked, selecting the marking template to be used, depending on the part to be contoured, obtaining the maximum use of the wood or board, considering the direction of the fiber and the Wood characteristics, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards.

CR 3.2 The marked pieces are roughly separated into the ribbon saw so that individual pieces are achieved to facilitate their handling.

CR 3.3 The pieces are contoured in the ribbon-saw so that the cut is adjusted, following the marks, using the required auxiliary elements, thus reducing the number of disposable parts due to breakage or other defects.

RP 4: Mechanize parts of wood and derivatives, handling the tupi milling machine, using templates or in the air to obtain parts with the established quality, complying with the applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 4.1 The pieces of wood and mechanized derivatives with the tupi milling machine are fixed to the template, by means of the fixing elements, considering the mechanical physical characteristics of the piece (knots, direction of the fiber, between other), complying with the applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality regulations.

CR 4.2 The curved to air-machined templates or parts are fastened, adopting positions that minimize the risks.

CR 4.3 The pieces of wood or derived derivatives, are contoured, adjusting the copier in the required position, following the outline of the template or the marks of the piece, complying with the applicable regulations of safety, health work, environment and quality.

RP 5: Distribute machined parts for subsequent machining processes, complying with applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 5.1 The classification of machined parts is performed according to their quality and sequence of processes, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards.

CR 5.2 Mechanised parts are stacked on required transport elements, suitable for parts, facilitating their mobility and subsequent handling, complying with safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards. applicable.

CR 5.3 Stacked machined parts are transported, so that the batteries are not damaged or broken, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards.

CR 5.4 The work item is completed, indicating the number of pieces made and the incidents that have arisen during machining and time spent.

Professional context:

Production media:

Tape Sierra. Tupi milling machine. Brushing. Regruesadora. Multiple circular saw. Tupi. 4-Caras. Moldurera. Ribbon saw or endless. Numerical control machining centers. Chant-plating.

Products and results:

Basic first-level maintenance and tuning of machines, equipment, and work area. Machined pieces of wood and derivatives, flat and curved. Machined parts, using templates. Mechanized parts distributed for subsequent machining processes.

Information used or generated:

Production Orders. Flat. Machine manuals. Quality manuals. Part of production. Signing of times. Parts of non-compliance. List of cutting. Road map. Applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality standards.

COMPETITION UNIT 2: ADJUST AND PACK CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE PRODUCTS AND ELEMENTS

Level: 1

Code: UC0173_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Adjust parts, accessories, and mechanisms of carpentry and furniture for the composition of the product, complying with the applicable regulations for the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, following instructions.

CR 1.1 Product junctions are repassed and fitted with portable tools until they are scratched.

CR 1.2 Mobile elements are fitted with portable tools until they slide and/or fit gently, complying with applicable labour and environmental risk prevention regulations.

CR 1.3 The different components of the product are disassembled and, if required, their position is numbered so that the different parts can be reassembled in the required position.

CR 1.4 The adjustment equipment used is maintained according to maintenance instructions, keeping them in state of use and operation.

RP 2: Control the quality of the finished carpentry and furniture product, in accordance with established specifications, following instructions.

CR 2.1 Finished carpentry and furniture products are selected according to indications and located at the place of quality control.

CR 2.2 Controlled finished products that present non-conformities are identified and separated.

CR 2.3 Control records are completed at their level based on the results of the inspection.

CR 2.4 The completed control records are delivered to the controller to take corrective action as appropriate.

RP 3: Embaling finished products, for marketing purposes, complying with applicable regulations on the prevention of occupational and environmental risks, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The parameters of the thermosettable plastic baler are adjusted according to the products to be packed, considering the parameters of: plastic roll size, mat speed and oven temperature, among others.

CR 3.2 The products to be packaged with termoretractile plastic are protected with the materials specified in the packaging instructions prior to their entry into the tunnel.

CR 3.3 The packaged parts are checked by checking that they are fully covered and with the protections set at the indicated location, and are set aside for reprocess in case they do not conform.

CR 3.4 Manual packaging or with machines that do not apply heat is performed with the packaging materials specified in the packaging instructions, and it is proven that the products are subject to and with the protection laid down in the packaging. indicated place, in compliance with the applicable labour and environmental risk prevention rules.

CR 3.5 The packaged products are identified with the tags or other specified media.

CR 3.6 The packaging equipment used is maintained as instructed in the maintenance instructions, to be kept in perfect state of use and operation.

Professional context:

Production media:

Retractable Baler. Flejadora. Packer. Measuring instruments (flexometer, squad, gauge, level). Computer equipment. Bar code readers. Radio frequency equipment. Electronic tags or tags and identification elements.

Products and results:

Adjustments of components and accessories of carpentry and furniture. Quality control of the finished carpentry and furniture product. Packaging of finished wood and furniture products.

Information used or generated:

Package orders reviewed. Reports of non-compliance. Regulations on the prevention of occupational, environmental and quality risks, applicable. Manuals for the use and maintenance of machinery and packaging equipment.

COMPETITION UNIT 3: SUPPORT IN THE ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION OF CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE ELEMENTS

Level: 1

Code: UC0882_1

Professional realizations and realization criteria:

RP 1: Participate in the transport of materials, equipment and tools for the assembly and installation of carpentry and furniture elements, following instructions, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental regulations and quality.

CR 1.1 The materials, equipment and tools for the installation of the carpentry and furniture product are prepared before loading, checking that all the elements are available, verifying that the packaging is in perfect condition, so as the operation of the equipment and tools, reporting any failures to the controller.

CR 1.2 The materials, equipment and tools are loaded and unloaded, considering the type of part, and the means of transport, using the means of fixation necessary to avoid displacement of the cargo in the transport of the same.

CR 1.3 Equipment and equipment for the installation of carpentry and furniture products are collected from the installation site, checking that they are all, removing and separating the waste, complying with the applicable safety regulations, occupational health, environmental health and applicable quality.

RP 2: Distribute materials, equipment and supplies for the installation of the carpentry and furniture product, complying with applicable safety, health, environmental and quality regulations following instructions.

CR 2.1 The material of carpentry and furniture elements is distributed at the site of installation, considering the conditions of the place, without causing damage, complying with the applicable regulations of safety, occupational health, and environment.

CR 2.2 Equipment, machines and tools used in the assembly and installation of carpentry and furniture elements, are distributed at the installation site, in the established order, checking that all the equipment is available. elements.

CR 2.3 The carpentry and furniture elements are unpacked, checking that the elements are in the required state, as indicated by the labels, complying with the applicable rules.

RP 3: Install the carpentry and furniture elements, preparing the auxiliary elements, for assembly and installation, complying with applicable regulations, safety, occupational health, environmental and quality, following instructions.

CR 3.1 The materials to be installed are grouped, according to the mounting and installation needs, by checking the materials for assembly.

CR 3.2 The mounting planes are interpreted to proceed with the installation of carpentry and furniture elements, in the intended time and with the specified materials and means.

CR 3.3 The elements of carpentry and furniture, are fixed, considering the technical characteristics of the architectural elements that serve as support, complying with the applicable regulations of safety, occupational health, environmental and Applicable quality.

CR 3.4 The carpentry and furniture elements are installed on surfaces free of dirt, preventing people and architectural elements from suffering damage, complying with the applicable safety regulations, occupational health, environmental and applicable quality.

RP 4: Adjust parts, fittings and mechanisms to complete the assembly of the carpentry and furniture product, complying with applicable regulations, following instructions.

CR 4.1 The parts, elements, fittings and mechanisms are placed, according to mounting instructions, verifying that it is the required one and that they fulfill the function for which they were installed.

CR 4.2 Mobile parts and mechanisms are checked, verifying operation based on project specifications.

CR 4.3 The conditions of the installation site are restored, eliminating waste, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality regulations.

Professional context:

Production media:

Teams, useful and portable hand tools. Portable pneumatic machines. Prefabricated joinery and furniture assemblies and sub-assemblies.

Products and results:

Distribution of materials, equipment and tools of carpentry and furniture. Elements of joinery and furniture, installed. parts, fittings and their mechanisms, adjusted.

Information used or generated:

Projects, plans, and installation manuals (incident sheet, assembly, and installation). Applicable safety, occupational health, environmental and quality regulations. Work instructions.

TRAINING MODULE 1: WOOD AND DERIVATIVES MACHINING

Level: 1

Code: MF0162_1

Associated with UC: Mechanizing Wood and Derivatives

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Carry out the operations of cleaning, preparing and maintaining the first level of machinery and equipment of wood and derivatives, complying with applicable regulations, safety, occupational health, environmental and quality, following instructions.

CE1.1 Recognize the operation, constitution and safety devices of machinery and equipment used in the machining of wood and derivatives.

CE1.2 Identify first-level maintenance operations of wood and derivative machining equipment.

CE1.3 Explain the most frequent failures or basic operating problems, during the use of the wood and derivative machining equipment, indicating the correction in each case.

CE1.4 In a practical case of maintenance of wood and timber machining equipment, based on the following conditions:

-Replace items in equipment and installations at the time and condition marked by the maintenance plan.

-Carry out the maintenance of use and replacement of elements of the various equipment and systems of movement and stacking of materials.

-Maintain the cleaning and environmental protection conditions of the various spaces.

-Perform the cleaning of machines, equipment and areas, achieving the required levels in wood and derivative machining machines.

C2: Mechanizing wood and derivatives, using basic workshop machines to obtain parts with defined characteristics, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental regulations.

CE2.1 Specify the layout of the parts on the machines, considering the characteristics of the wood.

CE2.2 Identify startup and control devices.

CE2.3 In a practical machining case, using conventional machining machines for the road start of a given carpentry and furniture product:

-Place the parts in the machine according to the characteristics of the parts to be machined (faces, orientation, among others).

-Verify the protections and useful depending on the machining to be performed.

-Verify the placement and attachment of security elements and tools (feeders, protections, and stops, among others).

-Verify machine tuning.

-Mechanize the part, complying with applicable safety regulations, occupational health.

-Check the quality of the machined part.

C3: Mechanizing wood and derivatives with the endless mountain range, obtaining parts with defined characteristics, complying with applicable safety, occupational health, environmental regulations.

CE3.1 In a practical case of machining with the endless sierra, from a given condition:

-Handle startup devices.

-Control the preset parameters and correct deviations.

-Select the template, following the instructions in the manufacturing sheet.

-Mechanize parts, using the guided devices for shaped parts.

-Set the parts on the support systems for further machining.

-Mechanize the double-curvature parts, using the required media and devices.

C4: Mechanizing wood and derivatives with the milling machine, obtaining parts with defined characteristics, complying with applicable regulations, safety, occupational health, environmental.

CE4.1 Specify the risks associated with the machining of wood and derivatives with the milling machine, according to the applicable safety, occupational health, environmental regulations.

CE4.2 In a practical case of machining with the milling machine, from a given condition:

-Handle the commissioning and control devices.

-Control the preset parameters and correct deviations.

-Mechanize parts with shape using semi-automatic rollforward systems.

-Mechanize parts with shape on templates, complying with applicable regulations, safety, occupational health, environmental.

-Perform amorphous pieces on stops arranged for this purpose.

C5: Classify mechanized pieces of wood and derivatives, according to characteristics (master faces, positions, defects).

CE5.1 In a practical scenario of classification of machined parts of wood and derivatives, based on the given characteristics:

-Classify pieces according to their size, quality, moisture content, color, and vetoing.

-Check and fill in wood notes (number of pieces, measurements, moldings position).

-Use means of transport to bring the parts to the next manufacturing process.

C6: Manually feed the main industrial machines, obtaining parts with the required quality and dimensional characteristics.

CE6.1 In a scenario of manual feeding of industrial machines, from given characteristics:

-Perform the parts collection on the road map.

-Check the input and output of material in automatic or semi-automatic systems by achieving the desired quality.

-Feed the machines, checking the characteristics of the parts (master faces, sense of vein, situation, dimensions and orientation of defects).

-Position the devices according to the characteristics of the parts to be machined (parts with different measurements or profiles).

-Maintain the parameters prefixed by the machine operation control devices.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C1 with respect to CE1.4; C2 with respect to CE2.3; C3 complete; C4 with respect to CE4.2; C5 complete; C6 complete.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the production rules set by the organization.

Interpret and execute the work instructions.

Respect the organization's internal procedures and rules.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. Distribution of machined parts for machining processes

Types of parts obtained in machining: characteristics of the machined parts.

Classification of machined parts: utilities.

Stacking of parts in the production process of machining parts: features.

Transport of machined parts: types of transport, stacked of machined parts in transport.

Machining sequence: phases and stages of machining.

2. Machining with basic workshop machines (universal and conventional)

Basic machines and tools. Types, features, operation, applications, machining operations, sequence, power, checks.

More frequent risks in machine and useful operations.

Machine and personal protection measures.

Applicable safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.

More frequent risks in machining with basic workshop machines.

3. Machining with industrial equipment

Machining centers. Operation.

Computerized machining: applications, parts fastening systems.

Machining centers: preparation, commissioning checks, and control.

Machining operations. Feeding and placement of the material.

Machining control.

More frequent risks in machining with industrial equipment.

4. Maintenance of industrial equipment

Basic or usage maintenance.

Operations. Maintenance instructions. Interpretation.

Monitoring for maintenance.

Aspects and elements of the machines that require it.

Cutting tools. Maintenance. Sharpened.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the mechanisation of wood and derivatives, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 3 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 2: FITTING AND PACKAGING FURNITURE AND CARPENTRY ELEMENTS

Level: 1

Code: MF0173_1

Associate to UC: Adjust and pack products and items of carpentry and furniture

Duration: 90 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Classify the different furniture adjustment systems and carpentry elements according to their applications, features and machines and equipment involved.

CE1.1 Explain the process of adjusting furniture and carpentry elements, indicating their purpose.

CE1.2 Describe the different settings that can be made in furniture and carpentry elements (cabinets, tables, boxes, chairs), specifying the mounting processes involved and the subassemblies, components, and ancillary accessories.

CE1.3 Identify the main fittings to be used in furniture and carpentry elements for junctions that do not require movement, relating them to the machining and adjustment technology each of them requires, as well as its core applications.

CE1.4 Indicate the equipment that is used for the adjustment of furniture and carpentry elements, describing their implementation and operation, as well as the operations they require for their maintenance and preservation.

CE1.5 List the parameters to consider in the insertion of hardware with automatic machines, and specify which variables are adjusted.

CE1.6 List the factors to be aware of in the subset setting.

C2: Run the tuning operations of the carpentry and furniture components and accessories, obtaining mounted products, according to the specifications set.

CE2.1 In a practical, component and accessory setting scenario:

-Select the machines and tools to use based on the type of tuning to be performed, setting them to the point for later use.

-Make up the joints between the pieces that make up each product, repassing them, and adjusting them with tools or portable machines.

-Perform the adjustment of the mobile elements, accessories and their mechanisms with tools or portable machines, in conditions of safety and occupational health.

-Unmount, after checking the adjustment and operation, the different components of the product, numbing its position so that the different parts can be reassembled.

-Perform cleanup operations, first-level maintenance, and replacement of tools or tools following the existing maintenance plan.

C3: Analyze the quality control processes of the final product, leaving it in a condition to be packed.

CE3.1 Explain the process of final quality control of furniture and carpentry elements, indicating the minimum control to be performed on each unit, specifying rejection criteria.

CE3.2 Locate defective furniture and carpentry elements, indicating the severity of each defect, how to sub- heal it, and fill in the appropriate documentation.

C4: Characterize techniques for packing carpentry and furniture items, obtaining protected items according to specifications.

CE4.1 Indicate the different types of materials used to pack furniture and carpentry elements (cardboard, bubble plastic, expanded polyurethane, among others), detailing the characteristics, applications and degree of protection of the same.

CE4.2 Explain the packaging process, indicating the different existing systems, relating them to the packaging materials, protection of the element to be packed and total cost.

CE4.3 In a practical case, properly characterized with packaging of furniture products or carpentry elements:

-Indicate the equipment used, describing its operation and the operations it requires for its maintenance and preservation.

-List the machine parameters to be adjusted by specifying depending on which variables are regulated.

-Embaling furniture and carpentry elements, manually and using the automatic baler, prior to the preparation of materials, adjustment of parameters and load of the machine.

-Perform the basic maintenance operations of the machines used.

-Specify prevention measures and security items to use.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 complete; C4 with respect to CE4.3.

Other capabilities:

Maintain the work area with the appropriate degree of order and cleanliness.

Communicate effectively with the right people at every moment, respecting the channels established in the organization.

Take responsibility for the work that you develop.

Adapt to the organization, its organizational and technological changes, as well as new situations or contexts.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Respect internal organization procedures and rules.

Contents:

1. Inspection of finished products

Purpose. Techniques.

Acceptance and rejection criteria. Sampling.

Inspection instructions.

2. Packaging of furniture and carpentry elements

Concept. Material. Types (cardboard, bubble plastic, retractable, expanded polyurethane).

Features and properties. Baling parameters (gage, temperature). Levels of protection.

Regular applications.

Automatic balers: description, preparation and tuning of parameters, operation and maintenance.

Quality control. Influencing factors. Purpose. Techniques.

3. Finished product store

Concept. Purpose. Techniques.

Documentation used.

Storage conditions.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and techniques related to the adjustment and packaging of products and elements of carpentry and furniture, which shall be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 5 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.

TRAINING MODULE 3: ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION OF CARPENTRY AND FURNITURE ELEMENTS

Level: 1

Code: MF0882_1

Associate with UC: Support in assembling and installing carpentry and furniture items

Duration: 120 hours

Assessment Capabilities and Criteria:

C1: Describe the assembly and installation processes of furniture and carpentry elements.

CE1.1 Recognize the different types of installation and their purposes.

CE1.2 Describe the different types of installation with their assembly and installation processes.

CE1.3 Relate the various element-fixing systems with the media to which they attach.

CE1.4 Identify the main fittings to be used in furniture and carpentry elements, for joints with or without movement, relating them to the machining and adjustment technology required by each of them, as well as with their main applications.

CE1.5 Indicate equipment that is used for the setting of furniture and carpentry elements, describing their tuning and operation, as well as the operations they require for their maintenance and preservation.

CE1.6 Indicate the parameters to consider in the insertion of hardware with automatic machines, and specify which variables are adjusted.

CE1.7 List the factors to consider in setting subsets in the furniture installation.

C2: Perform loading and unloading operations on the transport for installation of furniture and carpentry elements.

CE2.1 In a practical case, properly characterized in the transport of materials for the installation of furniture or carpentry elements:

-Prepare materials, equipment, and tools, checking that all items are available.

-Verify the status of the packaging.

-Check the operation of the equipment and tools.

-Load and unload materials, equipment and supplies in the means of transport according to the order and position of the elements, following instructions.

-Use the necessary fixing means to prevent load displacement damage to the transport.

-Distribute the material according to the work plan and without causing damage to materials, facilities or people.

-Perform the unpacking of the material at the installation site, avoiding any malfunction and following the instructions on the label.

-Check that all unpacked material matches the intended material.

-Perform download and unpack operations under working health conditions, using appropriate individual protective equipment.

C3: Perform the interpretation of the installation and installation plans, checking the lists of proposed materials, installation locations, and measurements.

CE3.1 In a furniture installation scenario with established conditions:

-Verify that the drawings indicate the exact location of the installation.

-Check that the materials correspond to what is indicated by features and capabilities.

-Review that the sketches and templates incorporate the necessary data and measures to be able to successfully perform the installation.

-Perform measurements with the appropriate means for proper job execution.

C4: Act according to the procedures for the preparation of portable equipment, hand tools and assembly products, applying safety and health measures.

CE4.1 In a convenient furniture assembly scenario:

-Check that all the equipment, tools, and products required for the installation and in the handling and application state are available.

-Defer the tools, machines, and tools necessary to mount the elements that make up the installation, according to the job plan set.

-Prepare the portable and mounting machinery and the necessary means, taking into account the type of support (extensions and fixing elements, among others).

-Verify the operating status of the computers to be used, communicating any detected failures.

-Consider and apply occupational health and safety measures.

C5: Perform according to project specifications, fixing the components of the installation.

CE5.1 In a scenario of setting installation components:

-Select the tools and tools considering their suitability for the job, and the features of the media to which to fix the installation.

-Collaborate on the fixing of the parts accurately and without causing damage to the media, materials or people.

-Dispose the means of work in order and reduce the risk of accidents.

-Make the fixings so that they allow subsequent modifications in the cases that are possible.

-Adopt the necessary security and occupational health measures in the manipulation of the elements.

C6: Apply techniques to perform hardware and add-on placement.

CE6.1 In a scenario of placement of hardware and add-ons:

-Check that the hardware and its mechanisms are in perfect condition, with all of its components and do not present any damage to its operation or to reduce its time of use.

-Perform the fitting of hardware with the appropriate machines and tools, exerting the precise pressure, ensuring its correct operation and avoiding tears that merit the resistance of the elements.

-Mount the hardware by following the instructions and specifications of the technical documentation, as well as the instructions received from the immediate superior.

-Check that the tolerances of the opening systems are reached according to their moving conditions.

-Perform the placement of hardware and accessories, adopting the necessary safety and health measures in handling.

-Restore the environmental and hygienic conditions of the installation site with adequate means and in conditions of safety and occupational health.

-Perform recycling of materials in compliance with applicable regulations.

Capabilities whose acquisition must be completed in a real work environment:

C2 full; C3 full; full C4; C5 full; C6 complete.

Other capabilities:

Take responsibility for the work you are developing.

Comply with the production rules set by the organization.

Interpret and execute the work instructions.

Respect the organization's internal procedures and rules.

Habit to the organization's work rate.

Demonstrate flexibility to understand changes.

Contents:

1. Transport and distribution of machinery and parts of joinery and furniture

Loading and unloading carpentry and furniture items.

Personal protection items.

Distribution of machines and elements of carpentry and furniture.

Handling and transporting furniture components (crystals, mirrors among others).

Symbology used in packaging.

Safety and Health Standards. Typology of risks. Methods of protection and prevention. Individual protective equipment and safety devices. Symbology used. First aid.

2. Unpacking and mounting of carpentry and furniture elements

More frequent packaging systems.

Materials used in packaging.

Recycling of packaging materials.

Mount systems.

Tools, machines and accessories used in the assembly. Handling.

Safety and Health Standards. Typology of risks. Methods of protection and prevention. Individual protective equipment and safety devices. Symbology used. First aid.

3. Installation of carpentry and furniture elements

Preparing the job. I repose on work.

Machines, tools, and tools used in installation. Hand tools and electro-portable machines. Operations. Furniture and carpentry installation operations.

Applicable safety and occupational health regulations in the installation of carpentry and furniture elements Tipologia of risks. Methods of protection and prevention. Individual protective equipment and safety devices. Symbology used. First aid.

Quality in the installation of carpentry and furniture. Quality of the installation. Factors involved. Quality assessment. Items to consider.

4. Assembly of parts, fittings and mechanisms of carpentry and furniture

Fixing systems. Applications. Characteristics of the media. Fittings and fittings. Types, features and applications. Documentation, catalogs, and technical sheets.

Applicable safety and occupational health regulations in the assembly of parts, fittings and carpentry and furniture mechanisms

Typology of risks. Methods of protection and prevention. Individual protective equipment and safety devices. Symbology used. First aid.

Quality in the assembly. Quality of the installation. Factors involved.

Quality assessment. Items to consider.

Training context parameters:

Spaces and installations:

The spaces and facilities will provide a response, in the form of a classroom, a workshop, a workshop of practices, a laboratory or a singular space, to the training needs, according to the Professional Context established in the Unit Partner competence, taking into account the applicable regulations of the production sector, risk prevention, occupational health, universal accessibility and environmental protection.

Professional profile of trainer or trainer:

1. Domain of knowledge and related techniques support in the assembly and installation of carpentry and furniture elements, which will be accredited by one of the following two forms:

-Level 1 academic training (Spanish Framework of Qualifications for Higher Education) or other higher level education related to the professional field.

-Professional experience of a minimum of 5 years in the field of competencies related to this training module.

2. Accredited pedagogical competence in accordance with what is established by the competent administrations.